MA5600T&MA5603T&MA5608T Hardware Description 23

SmartAX MA5600T/MA5603T/MA5608T Multi-
service Access Module
Hardware Description
Issue 23
Date 2018-04-27
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2018. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5600T/MA5603T/MA5608T Multi-service
Access Module
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware used in the MA5600T/MA5603T/MA5608T, including
the cabinet, subrack, chassis, board, cable, and electromechanical device.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers

l Hardware installation engineers
l Installation and commissioning engineers
l Field maintenance engineers
l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Access Module
Symbol Description
NOTE Calls attention to important information, best practices and

tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 23 (2018-04-27)

Based on issue 22 (2017-12-29), the document is updated as follows:
Position Description
3.8.1 Upstream Interface Updated the description of the upstream interface boards
Boards Comparison comparison.

3 Board Added the 3.8.7 H802GICK Board Description and

3.23.3 H806VPEF Board Description.
5 Cable Added the 5.1.4 AC Power Cable (Device).

3 Board Added the 3.8.13 H801X2CK Board Description and

3.19.8 H80DCSPE Board Description.
Included the V800R018C10 updates.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Access Module

3 Board Added the 3.8.12 H802X2CS Board Description and

3.22.23 H80DSDPM Board Description.

3 Board Added the 3.22.8 H80BVDMF Board Description.
5.9 Local Maintenance and Updated the cable connector and pin assignments.
Environment Monitoring
Combo Cable

3 Board Added the 3.22.11 H80DSDMM Board Description,

3.20.6 H80BASPB Board Description and 3.20.7
H80CASPB Board Description.
3.2 Mapping Between Updated the description of the card support version.
Boards and Software
Versions
3.3 Power Consumption and Added the note for the power consumption of the board.
Maximum Frame Size of
Boards

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Access Module
3 Board Added the 3.20.6 H80BASPB Board Description, 3.20.7

H80CASPB Board Description and 3.22.11
H80DSDMM Board Description.
3.2 Mapping Between Optimized the description of the card support version.
Boards and Software
Versions

3.1.2 Board Dimensions Added the dimension of MPWE board.
3.7.3 H801MCUD1 Board Added the pin assignment of the BITS/TOD port of
Description H801MCUD1 board.
2.3.3 Configuration MA5600T IEC Service Subrack supports the H802MABH

backplane.
2.6.7 Power Distribution Added the MPWE board.

Principle
5.4.2 120-ohm Clock Cable Added the pin assignment of the 120-ohm Clock Cable.

3 Board The ETSI service subrack supports a new backplane

H803MABC.
3.6.1 SCU Boards The GE/10GE upstream ports of the H801SCUH and
Comparison H801SCUV boards support automatic switching for
remote software commissioning using GE upstream
transmission.
Included the V800R016C00SPC100 updates.

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Access Module
3 Board Added the 3.21.15 H807ADPE Board Description,

3.21.14 H807ADPD Board Description, 3.21.16
H807ADPM Board Description, 3.22.21 H80DVCPE
Board Description, 3.22.20 H80DVCPD Board
Description, 3.22.22 H80DVCPM Board Description,
3.19.7 H80DCCPE Board Description, and 3.14.2
H801TOPB Board Description.

3.8 Upstream Interface Updated the description of the upstream interface board
Board (GIU) and universal interface board.
3.9 Universal Interface
Board (GPIO)
3 Board Added the 3.22.14 H80AVCPD Board Description and

3.22.15 H80AVCPM Board Description.

3.2 Mapping Between l Modified the H801GICF replacement relationship.

Boards and Software l Modified the software version supported by the
Versions H806CCPE board.

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Access Module
3 Board Added the 3.6.3 H802SCUB Board Description, 3.11.3

H801MPWE Board Description, 3.19.4 H806CAME
Board Description.
3.4 Board Modified the H80BADPE and H80BVDPE boards

Configuration(MA5600T/ supported by the H801SCUF control board.
MA5603T)

3 Board Added the 3.6.6 H801SCUK Board Description.
1 Cabinet Optimized the description of cabinets.
3 Board Optimized the description of boards, including panel

appearance and LED status.

3 Board Added the boards: 3.15.6 H807GPBH Board

Description, 3.15.8 H805GPFD Board Description,
3.19.6 H806CCPE Board Description, 3.22.16
H806VCPE Board Description, 3.23.4 H806VPGA
Board Description, 3.16.3 H801XGBD Board
Description.
4 Optical and Electrical Added the 4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module.
Module Added an one-channel one-fiber bi-directional FE optical
module in 4.5 FE Optical Module.
3.3 Power Consumption and The power consumption and maximum frame size of
Maximum Frame Size of boards are all introduced in 3.3 Power Consumption and
Boards Maximum Frame Size of Boards. Parameter MTU is
modified to Maximum Frame Size. Parameter Maximum
Frame Size indicates the maximum frame transmission
capability of a board.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Access Module
3.6 Control Board (SCU) Optimized the LED status description of control boards.
3.7 Control Board (MCU)
3.21 ADSL2+ Service Board Added the DC block in the working principle figures of
3.22 VDSL2 Service Board xDSL boards.
3.24 SHDSL Service Board

3.5 Board Added the H802GPBD, H805VDRD boards in 3.5 Board

Configuration(MA5608T) Configuration(MA5608T).
3.2 Mapping Between The Out of Production information is replaced by Life

Boards and Software Cycle Status information in 3.2 Mapping Between
Versions Boards and Software Versions. The out of production
information in the board description is deleted. Please
query the information in 3.2 Mapping Between Boards
and Software Versions.

3.4 Board Modified the mapping between some boards and versions.
Configuration(MA5600T/
MA5603T)
l 3.21.1 32-Channel Optimized the description.

ADSL2+ Service Board
Comparison
l 3.22.1 24-Channel
VDSL2 Service Board
Comparison
l 3.22.3 64-Channel
VDSL2 Service Board
Comparison
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Access Module

3.12.1 Comparison Between Added the comparison of SPU boards.

SPU Service Processing
Boards
4.3 GE Optical/Electrical Optimized the description.

Module

3 Board Added the boards: H801CKMD, 3.17.4 H802OPGE

Board Description, 3.12.4 H801SPUC Board
Description, 3.24.5 H802SHGM Board Description.

3.2 Mapping Between Modified the mapping between some boards and versions.
Boards and Software
Versions
Appearance of subracks Deleted the notes below the figures of subrack

appearance.

Appearance of cabinets Added appearance description of cabinets.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Access Module
Parameters of subracks and Modified the power consumption of service subracks and
chassises chassises.
Work temperature of boards Added the description of work temperature of boards.
3.23.2 H806VPEA Board Added the power consumption of H806VPEA board.

Description
3.2 Mapping Between Modified the mapping between some boards and versions.
Boards and Software
Versions
3 Board l Optimize the comparison of similar boards. Some

software specifications are added.
l Optimize the board description. The figures of external
connections and internal principle are combined as one
figure.

3 Board Added the boards: 3.15.9 H801GPMD Board

Description, 3.7.4 H801MCUE Board Description,
3.11.2 H801MPWD Board Description, 3.6.10
H801SCUV Board Description, 3.12.5 H801SPUF
Board Description, 3.23.2 H806VPEA Board
Description.

This issue is the first official release.
The hardware description of V800R008C01 and later versions is integrated to facilitate query
of hardware support and implementation for various versions.
3.2 Mapping Between Boards and Software Versionsis added to describe Software
Versions Supported by This Board, Out of Product or Not, and Substitution Relationship.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

Access Module
Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................1
1.1 N63E-22 Cabinet Description........................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 Appearance.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Specification................................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.3 Configuration (MA5600T ETSI subrack)................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 Configuration (MA5608T)........................................................................................................................................ 14
1.1.5 Cable Hole................................................................................................................................................................. 17
1.1.6 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................18
1.1.7 Air Filter.................................................................................................................................................................... 19
1.1.8 Cable Manager...........................................................................................................................................................20
1.1.9 Air Deflector..............................................................................................................................................................21
1.1.10 Grounding................................................................................................................................................................ 22
1.1.11 External Connections...............................................................................................................................................23
1.1.12 Heat Dissipation...................................................................................................................................................... 29
1.2 N66E-18 Cabinet Description...................................................................................................................................... 31
1.2.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 32
1.2.2 Specification.............................................................................................................................................................. 33
1.2.3 Configuration (ETSI subrack)................................................................................................................................... 34
1.2.4 Configuration (MA5603T)........................................................................................................................................ 39
1.2.5 Cable Hole................................................................................................................................................................. 41
1.2.6 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................43
1.2.7 Air Filter.................................................................................................................................................................... 44
1.2.8 Cable Manager...........................................................................................................................................................46
1.2.9 Grounding.................................................................................................................................................................. 47
1.2.10 External Connections...............................................................................................................................................48
1.2.11 Heat Dissipation.......................................................................................................................................................54
1.3 N66E-22 Cabinet Description...................................................................................................................................... 55
1.3.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 55
1.3.2 Specification.............................................................................................................................................................. 56
1.3.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................58
1.3.4 Cable Hole................................................................................................................................................................. 59
1.3.5 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................60
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Access Module
1.3.6 Air Filter.................................................................................................................................................................... 61

1.3.7 Cable Manager...........................................................................................................................................................63
1.3.8 Grounding.................................................................................................................................................................. 64
1.3.9 External Connections.................................................................................................................................................65
2 Subrack and Chassis................................................................................................................... 69

2.1 MA5600T ETSI Service Subrack Description............................................................................................................. 69
2.1.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 69
2.1.2 Specification.............................................................................................................................................................. 71
2.1.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................73
2.1.4 ETSI Fan Tray (FCBB)..............................................................................................................................................75
2.1.5 ETSI Fan Tray (FCBI)...............................................................................................................................................80
2.1.6 ESD Jack....................................................................................................................................................................83
2.1.7 Grounding.................................................................................................................................................................. 84
2.1.8 Heat Dissipation........................................................................................................................................................ 84
2.2 MA5600T ETSI SPL Subrack Description.................................................................................................................. 85
2.2.1 Appearance ............................................................................................................................................................... 85
2.2.2 Specification.............................................................................................................................................................. 86
2.2.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................86
2.3 MA5600T IEC Service Subrack Description............................................................................................................... 87
2.3.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 87
2.3.2 Specification.............................................................................................................................................................. 88
2.3.3 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................90
2.3.4 IEC Fan Tray (FCBC)................................................................................................................................................92
2.3.5 IEC Fan Tray (FCBH)............................................................................................................................................... 97
2.3.6 ESD Jack..................................................................................................................................................................102
2.3.7 Grounding................................................................................................................................................................ 103
2.4 MA5623AR Extended subrack Description............................................................................................................... 105
2.4.1 Appearance and Ports.............................................................................................................................................. 105
2.4.2 Specification............................................................................................................................................................ 109
2.4.3 Function................................................................................................................................................................... 110
2.4.4 Indicators..................................................................................................................................................................111
2.4.5 Heat Dissipation.......................................................................................................................................................112
2.5 MA5603T Chassis Description...................................................................................................................................113
2.5.1 Appearance.............................................................................................................................................................. 113
2.5.2 Specification............................................................................................................................................................ 114
2.5.3 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................... 116
2.5.4 Fan Tray(FMCA)..................................................................................................................................................... 117
2.5.5 Fan Tray (FCBI)...................................................................................................................................................... 121
2.5.6 ESD Jack..................................................................................................................................................................125
2.5.7 Air Filter.................................................................................................................................................................. 125
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

Access Module
2.5.8 Grounding................................................................................................................................................................ 127

2.5.9 Power Distribution Principle................................................................................................................................... 127
2.5.10 Heat Dissipation.................................................................................................................................................... 128
2.6 MA5608T Chassis Description.................................................................................................................................. 128
2.6.1 Appearance.............................................................................................................................................................. 128
2.6.2 Specification............................................................................................................................................................ 129
2.6.3 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................131
2.6.4 Fan Tray...................................................................................................................................................................132
2.6.5 ESD Jack..................................................................................................................................................................135
2.6.6 Grounding................................................................................................................................................................ 135
2.6.7 Power Distribution Principle................................................................................................................................... 136
3 Board............................................................................................................................................ 138
3.1 Board Overview..........................................................................................................................................................140
3.1.1 Board Structure........................................................................................................................................................140
3.1.2 Board Dimensions................................................................................................................................................... 142
3.1.3 Board Name and Version......................................................................................................................................... 144
3.1.4 Board Label............................................................................................................................................................. 145
3.2 Mapping Between Boards and Software Versions..................................................................................................... 146
3.3 Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of Boards....................................................................................... 166
3.4 Board Configuration(MA5600T/MA5603T)............................................................................................................. 180
3.5 Board Configuration(MA5608T)............................................................................................................................... 190
3.6 Control Board (SCU)..................................................................................................................................................193
3.6.1 SCU Boards Comparison.........................................................................................................................................193
3.6.2 H801SCUB Board Description............................................................................................................................... 199
3.6.3 H802SCUB Board Description............................................................................................................................... 203
3.6.4 H801SCUF Board Description................................................................................................................................ 207
3.6.5 H801SCUH Board Description............................................................................................................................... 212
3.6.6 H801SCUK Board Description............................................................................................................................... 215
3.6.7 H801SCUL Board Description................................................................................................................................219
3.6.8 H801SCUN Board Description............................................................................................................................... 223
3.6.9 H802SCUN Board Description............................................................................................................................... 227
3.6.10 H801SCUV Board Description............................................................................................................................. 231
3.6.11 Daughter Board......................................................................................................................................................235
3.7 Control Board (MCU)................................................................................................................................................ 236
3.7.1 MCU Boards Comparison....................................................................................................................................... 236
3.7.2 H801MCUD Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 237
3.7.3 H801MCUD1 Board Description............................................................................................................................ 241
3.7.4 H801MCUE Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 246
3.8 Upstream Interface Board (GIU)................................................................................................................................ 250
3.8.1 Upstream Interface Boards Comparison..................................................................................................................250
3.8.2 H801GICD Board Description................................................................................................................................ 256
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Access Module
3.8.3 H801GICE Board Description.................................................................................................................................259

3.8.4 H801GICF Board Description.................................................................................................................................261
3.8.5 H801GICG Board Description................................................................................................................................ 264
3.8.6 H801GICK Board Description................................................................................................................................ 266
3.8.7 H802GICK Board Description................................................................................................................................ 269
3.8.8 H801GSCA Board Description............................................................................................................................... 272
3.8.9 H801X1CA Board Description............................................................................................................................... 275
3.8.10 H801X2CA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 278
3.8.11 H801X2CS Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 281
3.8.12 H802X2CS Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 284
3.8.13 H801X2CK Board Description............................................................................................................................. 287
3.8.14 H802P2CA Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 290
3.9 Universal Interface Board (GPIO)..............................................................................................................................293
3.9.1 GPIO Boards Comparison....................................................................................................................................... 293
3.9.2 H801BIUA Board Description................................................................................................................................ 293
3.9.3 H801CITA Board Description................................................................................................................................. 297
3.9.4 H801CITD Board Description.................................................................................................................................300
3.10 Power Board (PRT)...................................................................................................................................................307
3.10.1 Power Boards (PRT) Comparison......................................................................................................................... 307
3.10.2 H801PRTA Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 308
3.10.3 H801PRTE Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 309
3.10.4 H801PRTG Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 311
3.11 Power Board (MPW)................................................................................................................................................ 313
3.11.1 H801MPWC Board Description............................................................................................................................313
3.11.2 H801MPWD Board Description............................................................................................................................315
3.11.3 H801MPWE Board Description............................................................................................................................ 318
3.12 SPU Board................................................................................................................................................................ 320
3.12.1 Comparison Between SPU Service Processing Boards.........................................................................................320
3.12.2 H801SPUA Board Description..............................................................................................................................325
3.12.3 H801SPUB Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 328
3.12.4 H801SPUC Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 332
3.12.5 H801SPUF Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 336
3.13 Ethernet Service Access Board (ETH)..................................................................................................................... 339
3.13.1 Ethernet Service Access Boards Comparison....................................................................................................... 339
3.13.2 H801ETHA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 340
3.13.3 H801ETHB Board Description............................................................................................................................. 344
3.14 TDM Service Processing Board............................................................................................................................... 349
3.14.1 H801TOPA Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 349
3.14.2 H801TOPB Board Description..............................................................................................................................358
3.14.3 H801CSPA Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 361
3.15 GPON Service Board................................................................................................................................................364
3.15.1 GPON Service Board Comparison........................................................................................................................ 364
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

Access Module
3.15.2 H801GPBC Board Description............................................................................................................................. 368

3.15.3 H802GPBD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 371
3.15.4 H805GPBD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 374
3.15.5 H806GPBH Board Description............................................................................................................................. 377
3.15.6 H807GPBH Board Description............................................................................................................................. 380
3.15.7 H802GPFD Board Description..............................................................................................................................383
3.15.8 H805GPFD Board Description..............................................................................................................................386
3.15.9 H801GPMD Board Description............................................................................................................................ 389
3.16 10G GPON Service Board........................................................................................................................................392
3.16.1 10G GPON Service Board Comparison................................................................................................................ 392
3.16.2 H802XGBC Board Description.............................................................................................................................393
3.16.3 H801XGBD Board Description.............................................................................................................................396
3.17 P2P Interface Board..................................................................................................................................................399
3.17.1 P2P Interface Board Comparison.......................................................................................................................... 399
3.17.2 H801OPFA Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 401
3.17.3 H802OPGD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 405
3.17.4 H802OPGE Board Description............................................................................................................................. 409
3.18 ATM Interface Board................................................................................................................................................413
3.18.1 H801AIUG Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 413
3.19 Combo Board............................................................................................................................................................418
3.19.1 ADSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison..........................................................................................................418
3.19.2 VDSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison..........................................................................................................420
3.19.3 H80BCAME Board Description............................................................................................................................423
3.19.4 H806CAME Board Description............................................................................................................................ 428
3.19.5 H80BCVME Board Description............................................................................................................................434
3.19.6 H806CCPE Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 439
3.19.7 H80DCCPE Board Description............................................................................................................................. 444
3.19.8 H80DCSPE Board Description............................................................................................................................. 450
3.20 Voice Board.............................................................................................................................................................. 456
3.20.1 Voice Boards Comparison..................................................................................................................................... 456
3.20.2 H801ASRB Board Description............................................................................................................................. 457
3.20.3 H801ASPB Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 463
3.20.6 H80BASPB Board Description............................................................................................................................. 481
3.20.7 H80CASPB Board Description............................................................................................................................. 486
3.20.8 H802DSRD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 491
3.20.9 H802DSRE Board Description..............................................................................................................................496
3.20.10 H802EDTB Board Description........................................................................................................................... 502
3.20.11 H80AATRB Board Description........................................................................................................................... 512
3.21 ADSL2+ Service Board............................................................................................................................................516
3.21.1 32-Channel ADSL2+ Service Board Comparison.................................................................................................516
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Access Module
3.21.2 64-Channel ADSL2+ Service Board Comparison.................................................................................................517

3.21.3 H805ADIF Board Description...............................................................................................................................519
3.21.4 H808ADIF Board Description...............................................................................................................................524
3.21.5 H808ADLE Board Description............................................................................................................................. 529
3.21.6 H805ADLF Board Description............................................................................................................................. 534
3.21.7 H808ADLF Board Description............................................................................................................................. 539
3.21.8 H802ADPD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 543
3.21.9 H805ADPD Board Description............................................................................................................................. 547
3.21.10 H80BADPE Board Description...........................................................................................................................553
3.21.11 H808ADPM Board Description...........................................................................................................................559
3.21.12 H802ADQD Board Description.......................................................................................................................... 565
3.21.13 H802ADKM Board Description..........................................................................................................................571
3.21.14 H807ADPD Board Description........................................................................................................................... 577
3.21.15 H807ADPE Board Description........................................................................................................................... 583
3.21.16 H807ADPM Board Description.......................................................................................................................... 589
3.22 VDSL2 Service Board.............................................................................................................................................. 595
3.22.1 24-Channel VDSL2 Service Board Comparison...................................................................................................595
3.22.4 H805VDSA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 603
3.22.5 H805VDSF Board Description..............................................................................................................................607
3.22.6 H805VDTF Board Description............................................................................................................................. 612
3.22.7 H805VDRD Board Description.............................................................................................................................617
3.22.8 H80BVDMF Board Description............................................................................................................................622
3.22.9 H805VDMF Board Description............................................................................................................................ 627
3.22.10 H80BVCMM Board Description.........................................................................................................................633
3.22.11 H80DSDMM Board Description......................................................................................................................... 638
3.22.12 H802VDNF Board Description........................................................................................................................... 643
3.22.13 H802VDJM Board Description........................................................................................................................... 649
3.22.14 H80AVCPD Board Description...........................................................................................................................655
3.22.15 H80AVCPM Board Description.......................................................................................................................... 660
3.22.16 H806VCPE Board Description............................................................................................................................665
3.22.17 H80AVDPD Board Description...........................................................................................................................671
3.22.18 H80BVDPE Board Description...........................................................................................................................676
3.22.19 H80BVDPM Board Description..........................................................................................................................682
3.22.20 H80DVCPD Board Description.......................................................................................................................... 688
3.22.21 H80DVCPE Board Description...........................................................................................................................693
3.22.22 H80DVCPM Board Description..........................................................................................................................699
3.22.23 H80DSDPM Board Description.......................................................................................................................... 704
3.22.24 H80BVDQM Board Description......................................................................................................................... 710
3.23 Vectoring Processing Board......................................................................................................................................716
3.23.1 Mapping Between the Vectoring Processing Board with Other Boards................................................................716
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

Access Module
3.23.2 H806VPEA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 724

3.23.3 H806VPEF Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 731
3.23.4 H806VPGA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 738
3.24 SHDSL Service Board..............................................................................................................................................741
3.24.1 SHDSL Service Board Comparison...................................................................................................................... 741
3.24.2 H803SHDA Board Description............................................................................................................................. 742
3.24.3 H802SHLB Board Description..............................................................................................................................746
3.24.4 H80ASHLM Board Description............................................................................................................................ 751
3.24.5 H802SHGM Board Description............................................................................................................................ 757
3.25 ADSL2+ SPL Board.................................................................................................................................................762
3.25.1 Differences Between ADSL SPL Boards.............................................................................................................. 762
3.25.2 H801SPLF Board Description...............................................................................................................................764
3.25.3 H801SPLH Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 768
3.25.4 H801SPLL Board Description...............................................................................................................................772
3.25.5 H801SPPLA Board Description............................................................................................................................ 776
3.25.6 H801SPPLB Board Description............................................................................................................................ 780
3.25.7 H801SPPLC Board Description............................................................................................................................ 784
3.25.8 H801SPPHA Board Description........................................................................................................................... 788
3.25.9 H801SPPF1 Board Description............................................................................................................................. 792
3.25.10 H801SPPF Board Description............................................................................................................................. 795
3.26 VDSL2 SPL Board................................................................................................................................................... 799
3.26.1 Differences Between VDSL SPL Boards.............................................................................................................. 799
3.26.2 H801VSTH Board Description............................................................................................................................. 801
3.26.3 H801VSTL Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 805
3.26.4 H801VSNF Board Description..............................................................................................................................809
3.26.5 H801VSNLA Board Description...........................................................................................................................813
3.26.6 H801VSPHA Board Description...........................................................................................................................817
3.26.7 H801VSPLA Board Description........................................................................................................................... 821
3.26.8 H801VSPLC Board Description........................................................................................................................... 826
3.27 Extension Board....................................................................................................................................................... 830
3.27.1 H801SHET Board Description.............................................................................................................................. 830
3.28 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................................................834
4 Optical and Electrical Module................................................................................................ 837

4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 837
4.2 PON Optical Module.................................................................................................................................................. 842
4.3 GE Optical/Electrical Module.................................................................................................................................... 846
4.4 10GE Optical Module.................................................................................................................................................851
4.5 FE Optical Module..................................................................................................................................................... 855
4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 857
4.7 STM-1 Optical Module.............................................................................................................................................. 858
5 Cable............................................................................................................................................ 859
5.1 Power Cable and Ground Cable................................................................................................................................. 860
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Access Module
5.1.1 DC Power Cable (Cabinet)...................................................................................................................................... 860

5.1.2 DC Power Cable (Device)....................................................................................................................................... 861
5.1.3 AC Power Cable (Cabinet)...................................................................................................................................... 862
5.1.4 AC Power Cable (Device)....................................................................................................................................... 863
5.1.5 PGND Cable (Cabinet)............................................................................................................................................ 864
5.1.6 PGND Cable (Device)............................................................................................................................................. 865
5.2 Subscriber Cable.........................................................................................................................................................866
5.2.1 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 32/24-Channel Board)....................................................... 866
5.2.2 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64/48-Channel Board)....................................................... 869
5.2.3 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64-Channel Board)............................................................ 871
5.2.4 32-Channel Inter-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 32/24-Channel Board)....................................................... 873
5.2.5 32-Channel Inter-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64/48-Channel Board)....................................................... 875
5.2.6 32-Channel Subscriber Cable (for 64/48 channel board)........................................................................................ 877
5.2.7 32-Channel Subscriber Cable (for 32/24/16 channel board)................................................................................... 879
5.2.8 64-Channel Subscriber Cable.................................................................................................................................. 882
5.2.9 32-Channel xDSL Subscriber Cable (old pin assignments).................................................................................... 886
5.3 E1 Trunk Cable...........................................................................................................................................................888
5.3.1 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable.......................................................................................................................................... 888
5.3.2 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable........................................................................................................................................ 890
5.4 Clock Cable................................................................................................................................................................ 892
5.4.1 75-ohm Clock Cable................................................................................................................................................ 892
5.4.2 120-ohm Clock Cable.............................................................................................................................................. 893
5.4.3 Clock Transfer Cable............................................................................................................................................... 894
5.5 Network Cable............................................................................................................................................................ 895
5.6 Optical Fiber............................................................................................................................................................... 897
5.7 Environment Monitoring Cable..................................................................................................................................899
5.8 Local Maintenance Serial Cable.................................................................................................................................901
5.9 Local Maintenance and Environment Monitoring Combo Cable...............................................................................903
6 Electromechanical Device........................................................................................................ 905

6.1 I-Type DC PDU.......................................................................................................................................................... 906
6.2 C3-Type DC PDU.......................................................................................................................................................916
6.3 B-Type DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................................921
6.4 ETP4890 Power System............................................................................................................................................. 925
6.5 EPS75-4815AF Power System................................................................................................................................... 932
6.6 GEPS4845 Power System.......................................................................................................................................... 939
6.7 PMIB01 Sensor Transfer Box.....................................................................................................................................943
6.8 PMIB02 Sensor Transfer Box.....................................................................................................................................946
6.9 SPD28SZ surge protector........................................................................................................................................... 949
6.10 100 Ah Battery..........................................................................................................................................................952
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

Access Module
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
1 Cabinet
About This Chapter
1.1 N63E-22 Cabinet Description

The N63E-22 cabinet complies with the ETSI standard. This topic provides the appearance,
and specification of the N63E-22 cabinet, and describes the configuration, cable holes, ESD
jack, air filter, external cable connections, and ventilation of the cabinet.
The N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet complies with both the ETSI standard and the IEC
standard. This topic covers the appearance, configuration, cable holes, ESD jack, air filter,
external cable connections, ventilation, and specification of the N66E-18 dual-standard
cabinet.
The N66E-22 cabinet complies with the IEC standard. This topic provides the appearance,

The N63E-22 cabinet complies with the ETSI standard. This topic provides the appearance,
1.1.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the N63E-22 cabinet.
The N63E-22 cabinet is an ETSI 300 mm middle standing pillar cabinet of NC purple grey.
The N63E-22 cabinet houses the MA5600T ETSI subrack and MA5608T chassis.
The N63E-22 cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), a front door, a rear panel fixed by
screws, and side panels on the left and right sides.
Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Access Module
The door of the N63E-22 cabinet is removable and the top of the cabinet has the grounding
point.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the N63E-22 cabinet
1.1.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight and power parameters of the N63E-22 cabinet.

Access Module
Installation Size
Figure 1-2 Dimensions of the N63E-22 cabinet

Access Module
Table 1-1 Dimensions and weight of the N63E-22 cabinet

Parameter Specification
Standard compliance ETSI cabinet (21-inch): ETSI 300 119-3
Weight (empty cabinet) 45 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 300 mm x 2200 mm
Installation dimensions of the Installation interface

cabinet top l Hole positions: 413 mm x 200 mm (W x D)
l Nut specifications: four M8 nuts
Installation dimensions of the Installation interface

cabinet bottom l Hole positions: 413 mm x 187 mm (W x D)
l Bolt specifications: four M12 expansion bolts
Distance between mounting bar 1 SU = 25 mm. (SU: System Unit.)

holes
Available space 83 SU
Angle opening width 500 mm
Fixing centres 515 mm
Distance between the 47 mm

installation surface of the
mounting bar and the inner side
of the air filter on the cabinet
front door
NOTE
For cabinet power parameters, see relevant PDB parameter requirements.
1.1.3 Configuration (MA5600T ETSI subrack)

The N63E-22 cabinet adopts the DC power. This topic describes the MA5600T ETSI subrack
configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet, and lists the maximum number of subscribers of the
cabinet.
The N63E-22 cabinet has the following configurations:
l Configuration of one ETSI subrack
l Configuration of two ETSI subracks
l Configuration of one ETSI subrack and one SPL subrack
l Configuration of the OLT and OLS

Access Module
Configuration of One ETSI Subrack
Figure 1-3 Configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with one ETSI subrack
Empty
82 JTD
1
(25 mm)
DC PDU (100 mm)
JTM JTD JTA JAC
O O O O O O O O 1 2 1 1
N N N N N N N N JTP JTD JAC
1 3 2
JAB JTD JTA
1
JAK 4J TD 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 5
JAK JTD JTA
2 6
79
SW 1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW 1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SPDALM JAK JTD 3
7
3 JTS CO
JTA
1 M 3
4
Empty (1000 mm)
38 STATUS
FAN
PRTE GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD X2CS
SCUN SCUN
RUN ALM
ALARM RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN LINK ACT
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY 0
ACT ACT 1
NEG(-)
PON PON PON PON PON PON PON PON RESET RESET PON PON PON PON PON PON PON PON
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
RTN(+) 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
CON
CON
33
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ESC
ESC
Service subrack
PRTE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ALARM
TX1
RX1
LINK A CT LINK ACT
0 0
NEG(-) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
3 3
(450 mm)
RTN(+)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TX 0 TX 0
RX 0 RX 0
X2CS
RUN ALM
CITD LINK ACT
TX 1 TX 1
RX 1 RX 1
0
RUN
MIN
MAJ
26
1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
RX 2 RX 2
IN1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BITS/TOD
TX0
OUT
RX0
TX 3 TX 3
RX 3 R X3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ET H COM
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
ALM
RX1
21
20
19
18 Cabling teeth (100 mm)
17
Empty (400 mm)

Access Module
NOTE
l The filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten subracks.

l For the I-type or C3-type PDU, use installation holes 79 and 82; for the B-type PDU, use installation
holes 79 and 81.
l The cabinet can also support an additional service subrack. In this case, it is recommended that the
air deflector (if not configured) be configured.

Access Module
Configuration of Two ETSI Subracks
Figure 1-4 Configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with two ETSI subracks
Empty
82 JTD
1
(25 mm)
DC PDU (100 mm)
JTM JTD JTA JAC
O O O O O O O O 1 2 1 1
N N N N N N N N JTP JTD JAC
1 3 2
JAB JTD JTA
1
JAK 4J TD 2
1 5
JAK JTD JTA
79
2 6
SW 1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW 1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SPDALM JAK JTD 3
7
3 JTS CO
JTA
1 M 3
4
Empty (50 mm)

76 STATUS
FAN
SCUN SCUN
RUN ALM
ACT ACT 1
NEG(-)
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
71
RTN(+) 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
CON
CON
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ESC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ESC
Service Subrack
PRTE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ALARM
TX1
RX1
LINK A CT LINK ACT
0 0
NEG(-) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
(450 mm)
RTN(+) 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TX 0 TX 0
RX 0 RX 0
X2CS
RUN ALM
CITD LINK ACT
TX 1 TX 1
RX 1 RX 1
0
RUN
MIN
MAJ
64
1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
RX 2 RX 2
IN1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BITS/TOD
TX0
OUT
RX0
TX 3 TX 3
RX 3 R X3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ET H COM
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
ALM
RX1
59
58
57
55
Empty (250 mm)
42
Air deflector (150 mm)
39
38 STATUS
FAN
SCUN SCUN
RUN ALM
ACT ACT 1
NEG(-)
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
RTN(+) 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
33
CON
CON
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ESC
ESC
Service Subrack
PRTE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ALARM
TX1
RX1
LINK ACT LINK A CT
0 0
NEG(-) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
3 3
(450 mm)
RTN(+)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TX 0 TX 0
RX 0 RX 0
X2CS
RUN ALM
CITD LINK ACT
TX 1 TX 1
RX 1 RX 1
0
RUN
MIN
MAJ
26
1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
RX 2 RX 2
IN1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BITS/TOD
TX0
OUT
RX0
TX 3 TX 3
R X3 RX 3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ET H COM
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
ALM
RX1
21
20
19
17
Empty (400 mm)

Access Module
NOTE

holes 79 and 81.
l The air deflector is included in the standard configuration.

Access Module
Configuration of One ETSI Subrack and One SPL Subrack

Access Module
Figure 1-5 Configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with one ETSI subrack and one
SPL subrack
Empty
82 J TD
1
(25 mm)
DC PDU (100 mm)
J TM J TD J TAJ AC
O O O O O O O O 1 2 1 1
N N N N N N N N J TP J TD J AC
1 3 2
J AB J TD J TA
1
J AK J TD
4 2
OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F
1 5
J AK J TD J TA
2 6
SW 1 S W2 S W3 S W4 SW 1 S W2 S W3 S W4 S PDAL M J AK J TD 3
7
79
3 J TS CO
J TA
1 M 3
4
Empty (50 mm)

76 FAN
STATUS
PRTE ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD ADPD X2CS
SCUN SCUN
RUN ALM
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN
ALARM RUN RUN LINK ACT
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
ALM ALM
ACT ACT 1
NEG(-)
RESET RESET
71
RTN(+)
CON
CON
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
ESC
ESC
Service subrack
PRTE
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
ALARM
TX1
RX1
LINK A CT LINK A CT
0 0
NEG(-) 1 1
2 2
3 3
(450 mm)
RTN(+)
TX 0 TX 0
R X0 RX 0
X2CS
RUN ALM
CITD
LINK ACT
TX 1 TX 1
R X1 RX 1
0
64
RUN
MIN
MAJ
1
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
xDSL 0
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
R X2 RX 2
IN1
BITS/TOD
TX0
OUT
RX0
TX 3 TX 3
R X3 RX 3
ET H COM
TX1
ALM
RX1
59
58 SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL SPPL
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL1
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
xDSL0
53
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
LINE0
SPL subrack (400 mm)

LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
LINE1
48
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
PSTN0
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
P ST N1
43
42
41
39
Empty (1000 mm)

Access Module
NOTE

holes 79 and 81.

Access Module
Configuration of the OLT and OLS

Access Module
Figure 1-6 N63E-22 cabinet installed with the OLT and OLS
Empty
(25 mm)
82 JTM1
JTD1
JTD2
DC PDC (100 mm)

JTA1 JAC1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
JTP1 JTD3 JAC2
JAB1 JTD4 JTA2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF JAK1 JTD5
JAK2 JTD6
JTA3
79
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SPD
JAK3 JTD7
ALM
JTS1 COM3
JTA4
Empty (50 mm)

76 FAN
STATUS
SCUN SCUN
RUN ALM
0
BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY
ACT ACT 1
NEG(-)
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
71
RTN(+) 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
CON
CON
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ESC
ESC
PRTE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ALARM
TX1
RX1
LINK A CT LINK A CT
Service subrack (450 mm)

0 0
NEG(-) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
RTN(+) 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TX 0 TX 0
RX 0 RX 0
X2CS
RUN ALM
TX 1 TX 1
LINK ACT
RX 1 RX 1
0
64
1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
TX 2 TX 2
RX 2 RX 2
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
TX0
RX0
TX 3 TX 3
RX 3 RX 3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
RX1
59
58
57 Optical fiber trough (75 mm)
Empty (75 mm)
51
50
Optical fiber trough (75 mm)
Empty
(25 mm)
48
47
OFMS-1x64 (125 mm)
45
44
Empty (75 mm)

40
39 Fiber management tray (50 mm)
Empty (75 mm)
34
33
Optical fiber trough (75 mm)
Empty
31 (25 mm)
30
OFMS-1x64 (125 mm)
28
27
Empty (75 mm)

23
22 Fiber management tray (50 mm)
Empty (50 mm)
19
18 OFMS-1x8（50 mm）
Empty (50 mm)
15
14 FTU (50 mm)
Empty (50 mm)
11
10 Switch (50 mm)
Empty (200 mm)

Access Module
NOTE

holes 79 and 81.
l The OFMS-1*8, FTU, and S2318 shown in Figure 1-6 are required when the cabinet functions as a
master cabinet and they need to be installed onsite. For details, see iManager N2510 Line Assurance
System.
1.1.4 Configuration (MA5608T)

The N63E-22 cabinet adopts the DC power. This topic describes the MA5608T configuration
of the N63E-22 cabinet, and lists the maximum number of chassises of the cabinet.
The N63E-22 cabinet has the following configurations:
l Configuration of one MA5608T
l Configuration of two MA5608T
Configuration of One MA5608T

Figure 1-7 shows the configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with one MA5608T.

Access Module
Figure 1-7 Configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with one MA5608T
Configuration of Two MA5608T

Figure 1-8 shows the configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with two MA5608T.

Access Module
Figure 1-8 Configuration of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with two MA5608T
NOTE
l In Figure 1-8 and Figure 1-8, the filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten subracks.
holes 79 and 81.
l The cabinet can also support an additional service subrack. In this case, it is recommended that the
air deflector (if not configured) be configured.

Access Module
1.1.5 Cable Hole

The power cables and subscriber cables are led into the N63E-22 cabinet from the top and the
bottom of the cabinet. This topic describes the positions of cable holes at the top and the
bottom of the N63E-22 cabinet.
The cables of the N63E-22 cabinet can be routed in the overhead cabling mode or the
underfloor cabling mode.
l In the overhead cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the top of
the cabinet. Figure 1-9 shows the positions of cable holes at the top of the cabinet.
l In the underfloor cabling mode, external cables are led into the cabinet through the
bottom of the cabinet. Figure 1-10 shows the positions of cable holes at the bottom of
the cabinet.
Figure 1-9 Cable holes at the top of the cabinet (top view)

Access Module
Figure 1-10 Cable holes at the bottom of the cabinet (top view)
NOTE
The unit for figures in this topic is mm, unless otherwise stated.
1.1.6 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the N63E-22 cabinet is on the middle of the left mounting angle, which is
used to connect the ESD wrist strap to prevent device damage caused by electrostatic
discharge.
The position of the N63E-22 cabinet ESD jack, as shown in Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 ESD jack of the N63E-22 cabinet

Access Module
1.1.7 Air Filter

The air filters are installed on the inner side of the front door and at the bottom of the cabinet.
This topic provides the appearance and dimensions of the air filters, and describes the material
and function of the air filters.
Appearance and Dimensions

Figure 1-12 and Table 1-2 lists the materials and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side
of the front door of the N63E-22 cabinet.
Figure 1-12 Dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door of the N63E-22
cabinet
436.00 mm
Front door
2035.00 mm
7.00 mm
Table 1-2 Material of the air filter on the inner side of the front door of the N63E-22 cabinet
Cabinet Material
N63E-22 50PPI (50 sponge picks per inch) black sponge
Figure 1-13 shows the air filter at the bottom of the N63E-22 cabinet.

Access Module
Figure 1-13 Appearance of the air filter at the bottom of the N63E-22 cabinet
345mm
269mm
mm
m m
180
116
7mm
Table 1-3 lists the materials and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the N63E-22
cabinet.
Table 1-3 Materials of the air filter at the bottom of the N63E-22 cabinet
Cabinet Material
N63E-22 50PPI (50 sponge picks per inch) black sponge
Function
The air filter on the inner side of the front door prevents dust from entering the cabinet.
During the ventilation, cool air enters the cabinet through the air intake vent at the bottom of
the cabinet. The air filter at the bottom of the cabinet prevents dust from entering the cabinet.
1.1.8 Cable Manager

This topic describes the appearance and functions of the cable manager.
Appearance
Figure 1-14shows the appearance of the cable manager.
Figure 1-14 Appearance of the cable manager
Upper
cable
manager
Lower
cable
manager

Access Module
Functions
The cable manager is configured under the service subrack or SPL subrack.
The cable manager supports the following functions:
l The main function of the upper cable manager is to clearly separate cables of each slot
from each other so that cables can be routed in order and cables in one slot do not affect
the insertion or removal of the board in the neighboring slot.
l The main function of the lower cable manager is to bear optical fibers.
1.1.9 Air Deflector

This topic describes the appearance, specifications and function of the air deflector.
Appearance
Figure 1-15 shows the appearance of the air deflector.
Figure 1-15 Appearance of the air deflector
Mounting
ear
Specifications
Table 1-4 lists the specifications of the air deflector.
Table 1-4 Dimensions and weight of the air deflector

Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H) 493.7 mm x 289.2 mm x 147.2 mm
Weight 2.2 kg
Function
The N63E-22 cabinet needs the air deflector when it installed with two ETSI subracks. The
air baffle of the air deflector blocks the hot air from the lower service subrack and exhausts

Access Module
the hot air out of the front of the air deflector. The N66E-18 cabinet need the air deflector too
when it installed with two MA5600T. For details about the configuration, reference the 1.1.3
Configuration (MA5600T ETSI subrack).
1.1.10 Grounding
This topic describes the grounding principle of the N63E-22 cabinet and the position of the
ground point.
NOTICE
Connect the ground cables properly to guarantee protection against lightening and
interference for the N63E-22 cabinet.
The power input end of the N63E-22 cabinet has a noise filter. The center ground of the noise
filter connects to the cabinet, called the cabinet ground, that is, the protection ground. Ground
the cabinet securely so that the influence electricity, leakage electricity can flow to the
ground, improving the protection against electromagnetic interference.
Use a ground cable to connect the ground point of the cabinet to the ground bar of the
telecommunications room or to the ground directly. It is recommended that the grounding
resistance of the telecommunications room should be less than 10 ohms. Refer to the local
standards to ground the cabinet.
The ground point of the cabinet is on the top of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-16.

Access Module
Figure 1-16 Grounding of the N63E-22 cabinet
1.1.11 External Connections

This topic describes the external connections of the N63E-22 cabinet.
NOTE
External cables are not used in the assembly and debugging of the integrated equipment, but are
delivered to the customers and installed on site.
External Connections of the N63E-22 Cabinet Installed with Two Service

Subracks (PON)
Figure 1-17 and Figure 1-18 show the external connections of the N63E-22 cabinet installed
with two service subracks.

Access Module
Figure 1-17 External connections of the cabinet installed with two service subracks (overhead
cabling)
DC power DDF
distribution cabinet
PDU
Fan tray
ODF ODF
Fan tray

Access Module
Figure 1-18 External connections of the cabinet installed with two service subracks
(underfloor cabling)
PDU
Fan tray
Fan tray
ODF
DDF
ODF DC power
External Connections of the N63E-22 Cabinet Installed with Two Service

Subracks (xDSL)

Access Module
Figure 1-19 External connections of the cabinet installed with two service subracks (overhead
cabling)
DC power
MDF
PDU
Fan tray
MDF ODF
Fan tray

Access Module
Figure 1-20 External connections of the cabinet installed with two service subracks
(underfloor cabling)
PDU
Fan tray
Fan tray
ODF
MDF
DC power
MDF
NOTE
l The GIU slot can be installed with the upstream optical interface board to provide upstream
transmission or cascading over optical fibers. The upstream optical interface board is connected to
the ODF through optical fibers.
l The GIU slot can be installed with the upstream electrical interface board to provide upstream
transmission or cascading over the electrical port. The upstream electrical interface board is
connected to the GE port of the upper layer device or cascading device through network cables.
External Connections of the N63E-22 Cabinet Installed with One Service Subrack
and One SPL Subrack (xDSL)
Figure 1-21 and Figure 1-22 show the external connections of the cabinet installed with one
service subrack and one SPL subrack.

Access Module
Figure 1-21 External connections of the cabinet installed with one service subrack and one
SPL subrack (overhead cabling)

Access Module
Figure 1-22 External connections of the cabinet installed with one service subrack and one
SPL subrack (underfloor cabling)
NOTE
l The GIU slot can be installed with the upstream optical interface board to provide upstream
transmission or cascading over optical fibers. The upstream optical interface board is connected to
the ODF through optical fibers.
l The GIU slot can be installed with the upstream electrical interface board to provide upstream
transmission or cascading over the electrical port. The upstream electrical interface board is
connected to the GE port of the upper layer device or cascading device through network cables.
1.1.12 Heat Dissipation

This topic describes the ventilation of the N63E-22 cabinet.
The N63E-22 cabinet has a fan tray at the top of the service subrack to exhaust hot air for heat
dissipation.
NOTE
The following uses the MA5600T ETSI service subrack configured in the N63E-22 cabinet as an
example to describe the ventilation principles. When the MA5608T chassis is configured in the
N63E-22 cabinet, the air enters the cabinet from the left side and is exhausted from the right side.

Access Module
The ventilation of the N63E-22 cabinet is as follows: Cool air enters the cabinet through the
cable space at the bottom of the service subrack. The air is exhausted by the fans upward
through the service subracks. The air exits from the top or from the air deflector of the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-23and Figure 1-24.
Figure 1-23 Ventilation of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with two service subracks

Access Module
Figure 1-24 Ventilation of the N63E-22 cabinet installed with one service subrack and one
SPL subrack

The N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet complies with both the ETSI standard and the IEC
standard. This topic covers the appearance, configuration, cable holes, ESD jack, air filter,
external cable connections, ventilation, and specification of the N66E-18 dual-standard
cabinet.

Access Module
1.2.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet.
The N66E-18 cabinet is a dual-standard 600 mm cabinet of NC purple grey. One side
complies with IEC and the other side complies with ETSI.
The N66E-18 cabinet houses the MA5600T ETSI/IEC subrack and MA5603T chassis.
The N66E-18 cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), a front door, a rear door, and side
panels on the left and right sides.
Doors of the N66E-18 cabinet are removable and the top of the cabinet has the grounding
point. All N66E-18 cabinets have the same keys for the front and rear doors.
Figure 1-25 Appearance of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet

Access Module
1.2.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions and weight of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet.
Installation Size
Figure 1-26 Dimensions of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet

Access Module
Table 1-5 Dimensions and weight of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet

Standard compliance l ETSI side (21-inch): ETSI 300 119-3

l IEC side (19-inch): IEC 60297-3
Weight (empty cabinet) 67.3 kg
Installation dimensions of the cabinet top Installation interface

l Hole positions: 450 mm x 400 mm (W x
D)
l Nut specifications: six M8 nuts
Installation dimensions of the cabinet Installation interface

bottom l Hole positions: 413 mm x 487 mm (W x
D)
l Bolt specifications: four M12 expansion
bolts
Distance between mounting bar holes l ETSI side: 1 SU = 25 mm

l IEC side: 1 U = 44.45 mm
Available space l ETSI side: 67 SU

l IEC side: 37 U
Angle opening width l ETSI side: 500 mm

l IEC side: 450 mm
Fixing centres l ETSI side: 515 mm

l IEC side: 465 mm
Distance between the installation surface of l ETSI side: 54 mm

the mounting bar and the inner side of the l IEC side: 95 mm
cabinet door
NOTE
1.2.3 Configuration (ETSI subrack)

The N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet uses AC or DC power supply. This topic describes the
configurations of MA5600T ETSI subracks in the cabinet.
NOTE
The MA5600T ETSI subrack is installed on the ETSI side of the cabinet.

Access Module
DC-powered Cabinet with Two ETSI Subracks
NOTE
l In Figure 1-27, the filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten subracks.
l The I-type PDU is used for the DC power supply.
l Cabinet installation against the wall or back-to-back cabinet installation is not supported.
l When high-density boards are configured, cables in some areas are close to the air exhaust vents of
the ETSI subrack. In this case, to ensure smooth ventilation, no cabling is allowed at least 1 U space
around the air exhaust vents.

Access Module
DC-powered Cabinet with One ETSI Subrack and One SPL Subrack
SPL subrack
NOTE
l The I-type PDU is used for the DC power supply.
AC-powered Cabinet with Two ETSI Subracks

Figure 1-29 shows the configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two ETSI
subracks.

Access Module
NOTE
l The EPS75-4815A power supply provides only two 40 A inputs. Therefore, only one power board is
allowed in each of the two ETSI subracks.
l In the range of 90 V AC to 175 V AC, the output current of the EPS75-4815AF power system
decreases linearly, limited within a specified range. In areas with 110 V power supply, dual-live-wire
input is recommended. When 110 V single-live-wire input is used, the output power of the
EPS75-4815AF power system reduces to half (maximum: 1600 W) of that in 220 V. In this case,
only one subrack is allowed in the cabinet.
l When high-density boards are configured, cables in some areas are close to the air exhaust vents of
the ETSI subrack. In this case, to ensure smooth ventilation, no cabling is allowed at least 1 U space
around the air exhaust vents.
AC-powered Cabinet with One ETSI Subrack

Figure 1-30 shows the configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with one ETSI subrack.

Access Module
Figure 1-30 Configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with one ETSI subrack
NOTE
l Two power cables are configured for the ETSI subrack by default.
l Only this configuration is able to provide the battery group, and at most 100 AH is supported.
EPS75-4815AF power system reduces to half (maximum: 1600 W) of that in 220 V.
AC-powered Cabinet with One ETSI Subrack and One SPL Subrack
Figure 1-31 shows the configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with one ETSI subrack
and one SPL subrack.

Access Module
SPL subrack
NOTE
l Two power cables are configured for the ETSI subrack by default.
1.2.4 Configuration (MA5603T)

The N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet uses AC or DC power supply. This topic describes the
configurations of MA5603T in the cabinet.
NOTE
the MA5603T chassis is installed on the IEC side of the cabinet.
DC-powered Cabinet with Two MA5603T Chassis

Figure 1-32 shows the configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two MA5603T
chassis.

Access Module
Figure 1-32 Configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two MA5603T chassis
NOTE
l In Figure 1-32, the filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten chassis.
l When all the service slots in the chassis are installed with the VDSL, combo, or PON boards, one
chassis is allowed in the cabinet.
AC-powered Cabinet with Two MA5603T Chassis

Figure 1-33 shows the configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two MA5603T
chassis.

Access Module
Figure 1-33 Configuration of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two MA5603T chassis
NOTE
l In Figure 1-33, the filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten chassis.
l When all the service slots in the chassis are installed with the VDSL, combo, or PON boards, one
chassis is allowed in the cabinet.
EPS75-4815AF power system reduces to half (maximum: 1600 W) of that in 220 V. In this case,
only one chassis is allowed in the cabinet.
1.2.5 Cable Hole

The power cables and subscriber cables are led into the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet from
the top and the bottom of the cabinet. This topic describes the positions of cable holes at the
top and the bottom of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet.

Access Module
The cables of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet can be routed in the overhead cabling mode
or the underfloor cabling mode.
the cabinet.

Access Module
NOTE
The unit for figures in this topic is mm, unless otherwise stated.
1.2.6 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet is on the middle of the left mounting
angle, which is used to connect the ESD wrist strap to prevent device damage caused by
electrostatic discharge.
The position of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet ESD jack, as shown in Figure 1-36.

Access Module
Figure 1-36 ESD jack of the N66E-18 dual-standard cabinet
1.2.7 Air Filter

The N66E-18 cabinet is installed with an air filter on the inner side of the doors and at the
bottom. This topic covers the appearance, dimensions, material, and maintenance of the air
filters.

In the N66E-18 cabinet, the air filters are installed on the inner side of the doors and at the
bottom of the cabinet.
of the doors of the N66E-18 cabinet.

Access Module
Figure 1-37 Dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the doors of the N66E-18 cabinet
Table 1-6 Material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the doors of the
N66E-18 cabinet
Cabinet Material Dimensions (Width x Height x Thickness)
N66E-18 50PPI (50 sponge 522.00 mm x 1630.00 mm x 7.00 mm

picks per inch) black
sponge

Access Module
cabinet.
Table 1-7 Materials and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the N63E-22 cabinet
Cabinet Material Dimensions (W x D x H)
N66E-18 50PPI (50 sponge 494.00 mm x 410.00 mm x 7.00 mm

picks per inch) black
sponge
Function
1.2.8 Cable Manager

Appearance
Upper
cable
manager
Lower
cable
manager
Functions

Access Module
1.2.9 Grounding
ground point.
NOTICE

Access Module

This topic describes the external connections of the N66E-18 cabinet.
NOTE
For the external connections of the MA5600T (DC/AC-powered, two service subracks or one service
subrack+one SPL subrack) and MA5603T (DC-powered, two chassis), see the following similar figures.
External Connections of the DC-powered Cabinet with One Service Subrack and
One SPL Subrack (MA5600T)
Figure 1-41 and Figure 1-42 show the external connections of the DC-poweredN66E-18
cabinet installed with one service subrack and one SPL subrack.

Access Module
Figure 1-41 External connections of the DC-powered cabinet installed with one service
subrack and one SPL subrack (overhead cabling)

Access Module
Figure 1-42 External connections of the DC-powered cabinet installed with one service
subrack and one SPL subrack (underfloor cabling)
External Connections of the AC-powered Cabinet with One Service Subrack

(MA5600T, with a Battery Group)

Access Module
Figure 1-43 External connections of the AC-powered cabinet installed with one service
subrack (overhead cabling)

Access Module
Figure 1-44 External connections of the AC-powered cabinet installed with one service
subrack (underfloor cabling)
External Connections of the AC-powered Cabinet with two MA5603T Chassis

with two MA5603T chassis.

Access Module
Figure 1-45 External connections of the AC-powered cabinet installed with two MA5603T
chassis (overhead cabling)

Access Module
Figure 1-46 External connections of the AC-powered cabinet installed with two MA5603T
chassis (underfloor cabling)

The N66E-18 cabinet has a fan tray at the top of the service subrack to exhaust hot air for heat
dissipation.
NOTE
The following uses the MA5600T ETSI service subrack configured in the N63E-22 cabinet as an
example to describe the ventilation principles. When the MA5603T chassis is configured in the
N63E-22 cabinet, the air enters the cabinet from the left side and is exhausted from the right side.
The ventilation of the N66E-18 cabinet is as follows: Cool air enters the cabinet through the
cable space at the bottom of the service subrack. The air is exhausted by the fans upward

Access Module
through the service subracks. The air exits from the top or from the air deflector of the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-47.
Figure 1-47 Ventilation of the N66E-18 cabinet installed with two service subracks

The N66E-22 cabinet complies with the IEC standard. This topic provides the appearance,
1.3.1 Appearance
This topic provides the appearance of the N66E-22 cabinet.
The N66E-22 cabinet is an IEC 600 mm middle standing pillar cabinet of NC purple grey.
The N66E-22 cabinet houses the MA5600T IEC subrack and MA5603T chassis.

Access Module
The N66E-22 cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), a front door, a rear panel fixed by
screws, and side panels on the left and right sides.
The door of the N66E-22 cabinet is removable and the top of the cabinet has the grounding
point. All N66E-22 cabinets have the same key for the front door.
Figure 1-48 Appearance of the N66E-22 cabinet
1.3.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight and power parameters of the N66E-22 cabinet.

Access Module
Installation Size
Figure 1-49 Dimensions of the N66E-22 cabinet

Access Module
Table 1-8 Dimensions and weight of the N66E-22 cabinet

Standard Compliance IEC cabinet (19-inch): IEC 60297-3
Weight (Empty Cabinet) 73 kg
Installation Dimensions of the Cabinet Installation interface

Top l Hole positions: 450 mm x 400 mm (W x
D)
l Nut specifications: six M8 nuts
Installation Dimensions of the Cabinet Installation interface

Bottom l Hole positions: 413 mm x 487 mm (W x
D)
l Bolt specifications: four M12 expansion
bolts
Distance Between Mounting Bar Holes 1 U = 44.45 mm
Available Space 46 U
Angle Opening Width 450 mm
Fixing Centres 465 mm
Distance Between the Installation Surface 192 mm

of the Mounting Bar and the Inner Side of
the Cabinet Front Door
NOTE
1.3.3 Configuration
The N66E-22 cabinet adopts the DC power. This topic describes the service subrack
configuration, maximum number of subscribers and maximum power consumption of the
N66E-22 cabinet.
Figure 1-50 shows the configuration of the N66E-22 cabinet installed with two service
shelves.

Access Module
Figure 1-50 Configuration of the N66E-22 cabinet installed with two service shelves
Empty (1U)
134
131
ON
OFF
SW1
ON
OFF
SW 2 SW 3 SW 4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PGND
RTN 1(+)
RTN
2 (+)
NEG 1 (- )
NEG2 (- )
C3-Type DC PDU(2U)
FAN
Empty (1U)
ST AT US
124 P RT E GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD X2CS
S C UN SC U N
RUN ALM
R UN
A LA RM RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN A LM
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN LINK ACT
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY A CT BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY 0
A CT
1
N EG (-) RE S E T
PON PON PON PON PON PON RE S E T PON PON PON PON PON PON PON PON
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
CON
CON
R TN(+)
117
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IEC Service Subrack2
ESC
ES C
P RT E
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TX1
A LA RM
LI NK A CT LIN K A C T
RX1
0 0
N EG (-)
2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
(10U)
2
3 3
R TN(+)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
TX 0 TX 0
RX0 RX0
X2CS
RUN ALM
C ITD LINK ACT
TX 1 TX 1
RX1
0
106
RX1
1
RUN
MIN
MAJ
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
RX2 RX2
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
IN1
TX0
RX0
BITS/TOD
OUT
TX 3 TX 3
RX 3
6 6 6 6 6 6 RX3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ET H COM
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
RX1
99
ALM
96
94
Cabling teeth(3U)
90
88
Empty(13U)
FAN
46
ST AT US
P RT E GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD SC U N GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD GPBD X2CS
S C UN
RUN ALM
RUN
A LA RM RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN ALM
R UN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN LINK ACT
ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM A LM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM ALM
BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY A CT BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY BSY 0
A CT
1
N EG (-) RE S E T
PON PON PON PON PON PON RE S E T PON PON PON PON PON PON PON PON
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
CON
CON
R TN(+)
39
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
TX0
RX0
ETH
ETH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ESC
ES C
P RT E
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TX1
IEC Service Subrack1

A LA RM
LIN K A C T LI NK A CT
RX1
0 0
N EG (-)
2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2
3 3
R TN(+)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C ITD
TX 0
RX0
TX 1
RX1
TX 0
RX0
TX 1
X2CS
RUN ALM
LINK ACT
0
(10U)
28
RX1
1
RUN
MIN
MAJ
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
IN0
TX 2 TX 2
RX2 RX2
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
IN1
TX0
RX0
BITS/TOD
OUT
TX 3 TX 3
RX3
6 6 6 6 6 6 RX 3
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ET H COM
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
TX1
RX1
21
ALM
18
16
Cabling teeth(3U)
12
10
Empty(3U)
NOTE
In Figure 1-50, the filled holes are for floating nuts to fasten subracks.
1.3.4 Cable Hole

The power cables and subscriber cables are led into the N66E-22 cabinet from the top and the
bottom of the cabinet. This topic describes the positions of cable holes at the top and the
bottom of the N66E-22 cabinet.
The cables of the N66E-22 cabinet can be routed in the overhead cabling mode or the
underfloor cabling mode.
the cabinet.

Access Module
Hole for
optical fibers
Trunk cables
Reserved
Network cables
Hole for optical

fibers
Front door
Hole for power cables and
ground cables
Hole for power cables and
ground cables
Hole for
optical fibers Trunk cables
Network cables
Hole for optical

fibers
Front door
1.3.5 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the N66E-22 cabinet is on the middle of the left mounting angle, which is
discharge.
The position of the N66E-22 cabinet ESD jack, as shown in Figure 1-53.

Access Module
Figure 1-53 ESD jack of the N66E-22 cabinet
1.3.6 Air Filter

The N66E-22 cabinet is installed with an air filter on the inner side of the front door and at the
bottom. This topic provides the appearance and dimensions of the air filters, and describes the
material and maintenance of the air filters.

In the N66E-22 cabinet, the air filters are installed on the inner side of the front door and at
the bottom of the cabinet.
of the front door of the N66E-22 cabinet.

Access Module
Figure 1-54 Dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door of the N66E-22
cabinet
436.00 mm
Front door
2035.00 mm
7.00 mm
Table 1-9 Material and dimensions of the air filter on the inner side of the front door of the
N66E-22 cabinet
Cabinet Material Dimensions (W x D x Thickness)
N66E-22 50PPI black sponge 522.00mm×2046.00mm×7.00mm

Access Module
cabinet.
Table 1-10 Materials and dimensions of the air filter at the bottom of the N66E-22 cabinet
Cabinet Material Dimensions (W x D x H)
N66E-22 50PPI black sponge 415.00mm×500.00mm×7.00mm
Function
1.3.7 Cable Manager

Appearance
Upper
cable
manager
Lower
cable
manager
Functions

Access Module
1.3.8 Grounding
ground point.
NOTICE

Access Module

This topic describes the external connections of the N66E-22cabinet.
NOTE
Figure 1-58 and Figure 1-59 show the external connections of the N66E-22 cabinet.

Access Module
Figure 1-58 External connections of the cabinet (overhead cabling)
DC power ODF
distribution
cabinet
DC PDU
Fan tray
MDF MDF
Fan tray

Access Module
Figure 1-59 External connections of the cabinet (underfloor cabling)
DC PDU
Fan tray
Fan tray
DC power
ODF
distribution
cabinet
MDF MDF

The N66E-22 cabinet has a fan tray at the top of the service shelf to exhaust hot air for heat
dissipation.
The ventilation of the N66E-22 cabinet is shown in Figure 1-60.
l The ventilation for the upper shelf of the N66E-22 cabinet is as follows:
a. Cold air enters the cabinet through the front of the cooling space.
b. The air flows upward through the upper shelf.
c. The air is exhausted from the top of the cabinet.
l The ventilation for the lower shelf of the N66E-22 cabinet is as follows:
a. Cool air enters the service shelves through the bottom of the cabinet and the bottom
of the service shelf.
b. The air flows upwards through the service shelves.

Access Module
c. The air flows to the back of the cabinet along the air baffle.
d. The air exits through the top of the cabinet.
Figure 1-60 Ventilation of the N66E-22 cabinet

Access Module
Hardware Description 2 Subrack and Chassis
2 Subrack and Chassis
About This Chapter
2.1 MA5600T ETSI Service Subrack Description

This topic provides the appearance, specification, function, working principle, configuration
and fan tray of the ETSI service subrack.
2.2 MA5600T ETSI SPL Subrack Description
This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the ETSI SPL subrack, and describes
the structure, function, and configuration of the subrack.
2.3 MA5600T IEC Service Subrack Description
and fan tray of the IEC service subrack.
2.4 MA5623AR Extended subrack Description
This topic provides the appearance, ports, and function of the MA5623AR extended subrack.
2.5 MA5603T Chassis Description
This topic describes the chassis and fan tray of the MA5603T.
2.1 MA5600T ETSI Service Subrack Description

and fan tray of the ETSI service subrack.
2.1.1 Appearance
The ETSI service subrack provides 23 slots, and has a fan tray at the top. The subrack is
installed in the cabinet through the mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of
the ETSI service subrack.

Access Module
Appearance
Figure 2-1 Appearance of the ETSI service subrack(GPON)

Access Module
Figure 2-2 Appearance of the ETSI service subrack(xDSL)
2.1.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight, and power consumption of the ETSI service
subrack.
Specifications
Table 2-1 Specifications of the ETSI service subrack

Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, including 530.00 mm x 275.80 mm x 447.20 mm

mounting ears)
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 490.00 mm x 275.80 mm x 447.20 mm

mounting ears)
Maximum weight at full 33.00 kg

configuration (including mounting
ears)

Access Module
Table 2-2 Power parameters of the ETSI service subrack

Power supply mode DC (dual power for backup)
Rated voltage -48 V / -60 V
Working voltage range -38.4 V to -72 V
Maximum input current 40 A
Table 2-3 Power consumption of the ETSI service subrack (Unit: W)

Typical Static Maxim Typica Board configuration
Configura power um l
tion consum power power
ption consum consu
ption mption
ADSL2+ 306.84 1266.55 786.695 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H805ADPD*16
VDSL2 514.84 1522.55 1018.69 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

5 D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H80BVDPM(17a)*16
P2P 1234.84 1810.55 1522.69 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

5 D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H802OPGD*16
POTS 370.84 706.55 538.695 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H808ASPB*16
GPON 802.84 994.55 898.695 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

(H805GPB D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
D) +H805GPBD*16

(H806GPB D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
H) +H806GPBH*16

(H802SCU D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
N +H805GPFD*16
+H805GPF
D)
GPON 648.84 1178.55 913.695 H801SCUH*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CIT

(H801SCU D+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
H +H805GPFD*16
+H805GPF
D)

Access Module
NOTE
The power consumption of the subrack is tested in the following conditions:

l Working voltage: -53.5 V DC.
l Ambient temperature: 25 °C.
l Static power consumption: All ports do not carry any loads. Specifically, users under POTS ports
hang up phones, xDSL ports are deactivated, and optical modules are not installed on optical ports
l Maximum power consumption: All ports fully carry loads. However, only 25% users under POTS
ports concurrently pick up phones and the feeding current is 20 mA.
l Typical power consumption: half of the total value of static power consumption and maximum
power consumption.
l The preceding table lists power consumption under typical configuration. For power consumption
under other configurations, use Access Network Hardware Configuration Tool.
2.1.3 Configuration
The ETSI service subrack provides 16 slots for service boards, two slots for control boards,
two slots for power boards, one for universal interface board and tow for upstream interface
boards. This topic lists the types of boards supported by the ETSI service subrack and the slot
restriction.
Configuration
H801MABC, H802MABC and H803MABC are the backplane supported by the ETSI service
subrack. H801MABC does not support the Vectoring feature, H802MABC and H803MABC
support the Vectoring feature.
Figure 2-3 Configuration of boards in the ETSI service subrack

Fan tray
21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Power
G
I
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Control board
Control board
22 U
Power
20
0
G G
P I
I U
O
Table 2-4 lists the configuration of boards in the ETSI service subrack. For details, see 3.4
Board Configuration(MA5600T/MA5603T).

Access Module
Table 2-4 Boards in the ETSI service subrack

Slot Type Slot Supported Board Remarks
Control board 9,10 Control board Two slots must be configured

(SCU) slot with the same control board.
You are advised to configure 2
control boards working in
active/standby mode.
Uplink 19,20 Uplink interface board Mixed configuration of

interface upstream interface boards is
board (GIU) supported; however, it is
slot recommended to use the same
upstream interface board in the
configuration.
Power board 21,22 Power board It is recommended to configure

slot the same power board in the
two slots.
Universal 0 Universal interface board -

interface
board (GPIO)
slot

Access Module
Service board 1-8,11-18 l Service board Mixed configuration of service

slot – SPU board boards is supported. When the
SPL board or transfer extension
– Ethernet service board is configured in the slot,
access board select the slot next to the
– TDM service corresponding service board.
processing board NOTE
– GPON service l GPON boards are
board recommended to be installed
from left to right and other
– 10G GPON service boards are recommended from
board right to left.
– P2P interface board l A vectoring processing board
can be installed only in slots 8
– ATM interface
and 11. When installed in slot
board 8, the board processes the
– Combo board vectoring services of slots 1-6.
When installed in slot 11, the
– Voice board board processes the vectoring
– ADSL2+ service services of slots 13-18. Slots 7
board and 12 cannot house vectoring
service boards but can house
– VDSL2 service other service boards.
board
– Vectoring
processing board
– SHDSL service
board
l SPL board
– ADSL SPL board
– VDSL SPL board
l Extension board
2.1.4 ETSI Fan Tray (FCBB)

A fan tray functions heat dissipation, monitoring, and fan speed adjustment, which ensures
that the device works at a stable temperature.
Appearance
Four fans are configured in the ETSI fan tray (FCBB) of the MA5600T.

Access Module
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.90 kg
Power consumption l Static: 23 W

l Maximum: 65 W
Function
The functions of the fan tray are as follows:
l Heat dissipation
The fan tray is at the top of the service subrack and exhausts hot air for heat dissipation.
The cool air flows to the subrack from the bottom of the subrack and then is exhausted
from the top of the subrack after passing the boards.
l Monitoring
The fan tray is configured with the fan monitoring board to detect whether the fans are
working in the normal state. The fan monitoring board also provides the port for
communication with the control board. The detected information is transmitted to the
control board through the fan monitoring board periodically.
l Speed adjustment
The rotating speed of the fans can be adjusted according to the detected temperature
automatically or be adjusted by setting the related data manually.
LED
Indicato Color Status Meaning Operation Description
r
STATUS Yellow Blinking The fan tray No action is required.

quickly (on is not
for 0.3 s and registered
off for 0.3 s or is being
repeatedly) loaded.

Access Module

r
The Check communication between the

communica fan tray and device.
tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.
Green Blinking The fan tray No action is required.

works in
the normal
state.
Yellow Blinking The fan tray Handle it based on the

slowly (on generates corresponding alarm.
for 1 s and alarms that
off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
Red Blinking The fan tray l Increase the fan speed to lower
is faulty or the temperature.
the fan tray l Replace the faulty fan tray.
generates
an over-
temperature
alarm.
NOTE
When only one power board is configured, the LED turns yellow and blinks. The services are not
affected.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FCBB monitoring board, which supports the -48 V / -60 V input voltage
and provides a set of DIP switches SW2. The following figure shows the layout of DIP
switches and default settings.
ON SW2
H801FCBB
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
Table 2-5 describes the settings of SW2.

Access Module
Table 2-5 Settings of SW2

DIP Switch Indication Default Settings
SW2-1 It is used to set the subnode address of the OFF

fan tray that maps the data configuration.
SW2-2 ON
l ON: The address bit is 0.
SW2-3 l OFF: The address bit is 1. ON
By default, the address bit is 1.
SW2-4 ON The baud rate of the ON

communication between the fan
tray and the control board is 19200
bit/s.
OFF The baud rate of the

bit/s.
SW2-5 It is used to set the quantity of fans. ON
SW2-6 OFF
SW2-7 It is used to set the mode of adjusting the ON

fan speed.
SW2-8 OFF
Table 2-6, Table 2-7, and Table 2-8 describe the settings of the DIP switches of SW2.
Table 2-6 Settings of SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3

SW2-3 SW2-2 SW2-1 Address Value
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7

Access Module
NOTE
When SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3 are used to set the subnode address, make sure that the DIP switch
settings are consistent with the data configuration. But the subnode address value cannot be the same as
that of the environment monitoring board.
Table 2-7 Settings of SW2-5 and SW2-6

SW2-6 SW2-5 Fan Quantity
ON ON 6
ON OFF 8
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 10
NOTE
Four fans are configured in the ETSI fan tray (FCBB) of the MA5600T.

SW2-8 SW2-7 Speed Adjustment Mode Adjustment Strategy
ON ON Temperature measurement at Strategy 1

the air intake vent (reserved)
ON OFF Temperature measurement at Strategy 2

the air exhaust vent
OFF ON Temperature measurement at Strategy 3

the air intake vent
OFF OFF Temperature measurement at Strategy 4

the air intake vent (the fan stops
rotating)
NOTE
The ETSI fan tray (FCBB) of the MA5600T must use speed adjustment policy 3.
Fan Speed Adjustment

Set the fan speed adjustment mode to "automatic" or "manual" in the command line interface
(CLI). After the fans are installed, they work in automatic mode by default.
l Automatic mode
– Control-system-triggering: The control system automatically adjusts fan speed
according to the board temperatures for energy conservation.
– Monitoring-board-triggering: Electric switches 7 and 8 of the SW2 DIP switch on
the monitoring board are set in four different ways to achieve four speed adjustment
policies (the ETSI subrack supports only the third policy).

Access Module
NOTE
The automatic mode has two variants (automatically selected by the system): control-system-
triggering and monitoring-board-triggering.
l Manual mode
Commands are executed to adjust fan speed. The levels range from 0 to 6, level 0 being
the lowest speed and level 6 being the highest speed.
2.1.5 ETSI Fan Tray (FCBI)

Appearance
Four fans are configured in the ETSI fan tray (FCBI) of the MA5600T.
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.90 kg

l Maximum: 67 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
l Monitoring
l Speed adjustment

Access Module
LED
r

quickly (on is not
for 0.125 s registered
and off for or is being
0.125 s loaded.
repeatedly)
tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.

works in
the normal
state.

off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
Red Blinking (on The fan tray l Increase the fan speed to lower
for 0.125 s is faulty or the temperature.
and off for the fan tray l Replace the faulty fan tray.
0.125 s generates
repeatedly) an over-
temperature
alarm.
NOTE
When only one power board is configured, the LED turns yellow and blinks. The services are not
affected.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FCBI monitoring board, which supports the -48 V / -60 V input voltage,
which provides a set of DIP switches SW1-S1.
Table 2-9 describes the settings of SW1-S1.

Access Module
Table 2-9 Settings of SW1-S1
S1-1 It is used to set the subnode address of the OFF

S1-2 ON
S1-3 l OFF: The address bit is 1. ON
S1-4 ON The baud rate of the ON

bit/s.

bit/s.
S1-5 It is used to set the scenario of fans. The ON

high eight dip switch should be 0000 1010
S1-6 for ETSI subrack. OFF
S1-7 l 0 indicates the switch should be ON. ON

l 1 indicates the switch should be OFF.
S1-8 OFF
SW1-1 ON
SW1-2 ON
SW1-3 ON
SW1-4 ON
Table 2-10 describes the settings of the DIP switches of low three switch.
Table 2-10 Settings of S1-1, S1-2, and S1-3
S1-3 S1-2 S1-1 Address Value
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6

Access Module
OFF OFF OFF 7
NOTE
When S1-1, S1-2, and S1-3 are used to set the subnode address, make sure that the DIP switch settings
are consistent with the data configuration. But the subnode address value cannot be the same as that of
the environment monitoring board.

l Automatic mode
– Monitoring-board-triggering: Electric switches 7 and 8 of the SW2 DIP switch on
policies (the ETSI subrack supports only the third policy).
NOTE
l Manual mode
2.1.6 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the ETSI subrack is on the left of the fan tray, which is used to connect the
ESD wrist strap to prevent device damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
The position of the ETSI subrack ESD jack, as shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Position of the ETSI subrack ESD jack

Access Module
2.1.7 Grounding
This topic describes the grounding principle of the ETSI subrack and the position of the
ground point.
NOTICE
interference for the ETSI subrack. When a Huawei cabinet is installed, the service subrack is
grounded through mounting ears and therefore no separate ground cables are required. When
a third-party cabinet is installed, the separate ground cable needs to be connected to the
service subrack and ground point on the cabinet.
The power input end of the ETSI subrack has a noise filter. The center ground of the noise
filter connects to the subrack, called the subrack ground, that is, the protection ground.
Ground the subrack securely so that the influence electricity, leakage electricity can flow to
the ground, improving the protection against electromagnetic interference.
Use a ground cable to connect the ground point of the subrack to the ground bar of the
standards to ground the subrack.
The ground point of the subrack is on the left corner of the subrack, as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Grounding of the ETSI subrack

This topic describes the ventilation of the MA5600T ETSI service subrack.
The MA5600T ETSI service subrack has a fan tray at the top to exhaust hot air for heat
dissipation.

Access Module
The airflow is as follows: The cool air enters the MA5600T ETSI service subrack at the
bottom, and is blown towards the top side by the fans, and finally, exits at the top side of the
MA5600T ETSI service subrack.Figure 2-6 shows the heat dissipation of the MA5600T ETSI
service subrack.
Figure 2-6 Ventilation of the MA5600T ETSI service subrack
2.2 MA5600T ETSI SPL Subrack Description

This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the ETSI SPL subrack, and describes
the structure, function, and configuration of the subrack.
2.2.1 Appearance
The ETSI SPL subrack provides 22 slots. The SPL subrack is installed in the cabinet through
the mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance and composition of the ETSI SPL
subrack.

Access Module
Appearance
Figure 2-7 Appearance and composition of the ETSI SPL subrack
NOTE
Figure 2-7 shows the ETSI SPL subrack configured with the high-density SPL boards.
2.2.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions and weight of the ETSI SPL subrack.
Specifications
Table 2-11 Specifications of the ETSI SPL subrack

Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, including 530.00 mm x 235.00 mm x 397.20 mm

mounting brackets)

mounting brackets)
Maximum weight 22.50 kg
Maximum power consumption 0W
2.2.3 Configuration
The ETSI SPL subrack can be configured with 16 SPL boards.

Access Module
Configuration
The ETSI SPL subrack provides 22 slots.
Figure 2-8 Configuration of boards in the ETSI SPL subrack
20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Filler panel
21
Filler panel
Filler panel
Filler panel
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Filler panel
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
0
Filler panel
Table 2-12 Boards in the ETSI SPL subrack

Slot Supported Board
1-8,11-18 SPL board
0,9,10,19-21 Filler panel
NOTE
The ETSI SPL subrack is used to accommodate the low-density SPL board, high-density SPL board
with built-in front panel, and transfer board with built-in front panel.
2.3 MA5600T IEC Service Subrack Description

and fan tray of the IEC service subrack.
2.3.1 Appearance
The IEC service subrack provides 21 slots, and has a fan tray at the top. The subrack is
installed in the cabinet through the mounting brackets. This topic provides the appearance of
the IEC service subrack.

Access Module
Appearance
Figure 2-9 Appearance of the IEC service subrack(xDSL)
2.3.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight, and power consumption of the IEC service
subrack.
Specifications
Table 2-13 Specifications of the IEC service subrack
Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, including 482.60 mm × 275.80 mm × 441.70 mm

mounting ears)
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 442.00 mm × 275.80 mm × 441.70 mm

mounting ears)
Maximum weight at full 30.54 kg

configuration (including mounting
ears)

Access Module
Table 2-14 Power parameters of the IEC service subrack

Table 2-15 Power consumption of the IEC service subrack (Unit: W)

Typical Static Maximu Typical Board configuration
Configu power m power power
ration consump consump consum
tion tion ption
ADSL2+ 290.84 1155.55 723.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

TD+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBH
+H805ADPD*14
VDSL2 472.84 1379.55 926.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

+H80BVDPM(17a)*14
POTS 346.84 665.55 506.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

+H808ASPB*14
P2P 1102.84 1631.55 1367.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

+H802OPGD*14
GPON 724.84 917.55 821.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

(H805GP TD+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBH
BD) +H805GPBD*14

(H806GP TD+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBH
BH) +H806GPBD/H806GPBH*14

(H802SC TD+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBH
UN +H806GPBD/H802GPFD*14
+H803G
PFD)
GPON 786.84 1253.55 1020.195 H801SCUH*2+H801X2CS*2+H801CI

(H801SC TD+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBH
UH +H806GPBD/H802GPFD*14
+H803G
PFD)

Access Module
NOTE

l Working voltage: -53.5 V DC
l Ambient temperature of 25 °C
power consumption.
2.3.3 Configuration
The IEC service subrack provides 14 slots for service boards, two slots for control boards,
two slots for power boards, one for universal interface board and tow for upstream interface
boards. This topic lists the types of boards supported by the IEC service subrack and the slot
restriction.
Configuration
H801MABH and H802MABH are the backplane supported by the IEC service subrack.
H801MABH does not support the Vectoring feature, H802MABH supports the Vectoring
feature.
Figure 2-10 Configuration of boards in the IEC service subrack
Fan tray
19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Power
G
I
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Service board
Control board
Control board
20 U
Power
18
0
G G
P I
I U
O
Table 2-16 shows the configuration of boards in the IEC service subrack.

Access Module
Table 2-16 Boards in the IEC service subrack


slot with the same control board. You
are advised to configure 2
control boards working in active/
standby mode.
Uplink 17,18 Uplink interface board Mixed configuration of upstream

interface interface boards is supported;
board (GIU) however, it is recommended to
slot use the same upstream interface
board in the configuration.
Power board 19,20 Power board It is recommended to configure

slot the same power board in the two
slots.
Universal 0 Universal interface board -

interface
board (GPIO)
slot
Service board 1-6,9-16 l Service board Mixed configuration of service

slot – SPU board boards is supported.
NOTE
– TDM service
processing board l GPON boards are recommended
to be installed from left to right
– Combo board and other boards are
– Voice board recommended from right to left.
l A vectoring processing board
– ADSL2+ service can be installed only in slots 9
board and 10. When installed in slot 9,
– VDSL2 service the board processes the
board vectoring services of slots 1-6.
When installed in slot 10, the
– Vectoring board processes the vectoring
processing board services of slots 11-16.
– SHDSL service
board
– P2P service board
– GPON service
board
– 10G GPON
service board
l SPL board
– ADSL SPL board
–,
– VDSL SPL board
l Extension board

Access Module
2.3.4 IEC Fan Tray (FCBC)

Appearance
Eight fans are configured in the IEC fan tray (FCBC) of the MA5600T.
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.20 kg

l Maximum: 52 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
l Monitoring
l Speed adjustment

Access Module
LED
r

quickly (on is not
repeatedly) loaded.

tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.

works in
the normal
state.

off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
generates
an over-
temperature
alarm.
NOTE
When only one PRTE board is configured, the LED turns yellow and blinks. The services are not
affected.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FCBC monitoring board, which provides a set of DIP switches. This
section describes the indications and settings of the DIP switches SW2. The following figure
shows the layout of DIP switches and default settings.

Access Module
NOTE


SW2-2 ON

bit/s.

Access Module

bit/s.
SW2-6 OFF

fan speed.
SW2-8 OFF

ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7
NOTE

ON ON 6
ON OFF 8
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 10

Access Module
NOTE
Six fans are configured in the IEC fan tray (FCBC) of the MA5600T.




the air intake vent

rotating)
NOTE
The IEC fan tray (FCBC) of the MA5600T must use speed adjustment policy 3.

NOTE
The fan tray dissipates heat for the device to ensure that the device works at a normal temperature. When
the ambient temperature of the device exceeds its environment specifications, the system automatically
reports a high-temperature (or low-temperature) alarm.
l Automatic mode
– Fan-control mode: The system automatically adjusts the fan speed according to the
board temperatures for energy saving.
– Control-board-control mode: Electric switches 7 and 8 of the SW2 DIP switch on
policies (the IEC subrack supports only the third policy), as described in Table
2-21.

Access Module
Table 2-21 Fan speed adjustment strategies

No. Description
1 l At the temperature less than 25°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full
speed.
l At the temperature from 25°C to 35°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100%
of the full speed.
l At the temperature greater than 35°C, the fans rotate at full speed.
speed.
of the full speed.
speed.
of the full speed.
4 l At the temperature less than 15°C, the fans stop rotating.

l At the temperature from 15°C to 45°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the
full speed.
of the full speed.
NOTE
When the automatic mode is used, the device automatically switches between the fan-control
mode and control-board-control mode.
l Manual mode
2.3.5 IEC Fan Tray (FCBH)

Appearance
Ten fans are configured in the IEC fan tray (FCBH) of the MA5600T.

Access Module
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.55 kg

l Maximum: 52 W
l Static: 21 W
l Maximum: 88 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
l Monitoring
l Speed adjustment
Configuration
The IEC fan tray is configured with 10 fans. Each fan can be installed and dismounted
separately.

Access Module
LED
r

quickly (on is not
for 0.125 s registered
and off for or is being
0.125 s loaded.
repeatedly)
tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.

works in
the normal
state.

off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
Red Blinking (on The fan tray l Increase the fan speed to lower
for 0.125 s is faulty or the temperature.
and off for the fan tray l Replace the faulty fan tray.
0.125 s generates
repeatedly) an over-
temperature
alarm.
NOTE
When only one power board is configured, the yellow LED is on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly. The
services are not affected.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FCBH monitoring board, which provides a set of DIP switches. This
section describes the indications and settings of the DIP switches SW2. The following figure
shows the layout of DIP switches and default settings.

Access Module
NOTE

SW2-2 ON

bit/s.

bit/s.

Access Module
SW2-6 ON

fan speed.
SW2-8 ON
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7
NOTE
ON ON 10
ON OFF 8
OFF ON 6
OFF OFF 4
NOTE
Ten fans are configured in the IEC fan tray (FCBH) of the MA5600T.

Access Module

the air intake vent


the air intake vent

rotating)
NOTE
The IEC fan tray (FCBH) of the MA5600T must use speed adjustment policy 1.

The fan tray provides fan speed adjustment in automatic mode and manual mode.
NOTE
The fan tray dissipates heat for the device to ensure that the device works at a normal temperature. When
the ambient temperature of the device exceeds its environment specifications, the system automatically
reports a high-temperature (or low-temperature) alarm.
l Automatic mode
– Fan-control mode: The system automatically adjusts the fan speed according to the
board temperatures for energy saving.
– Control-board-control mode: Electric switches 7 and 8 of the SW2 DIP switch on
policies (the IEC subrack supports only one policy).
NOTE
When the automatic mode is used, the device automatically switches between the fan-control
mode and control-board-control mode. When the control board and fan tray both function
properly, the default fan speed adjustment mode of the fan tray is control-board-control mode.
When the fan tray fails to communicate with the control board, the system automatically switches
to the fan-control mode.
l Manual mode
Commands are executed to adjust the fan speed. The levels range from 0 to 6, level 0
being the lowest speed and level 6 being the highest speed.
2.3.6 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the IEC subrack is on the left of the fan tray, which is used to connect the
ESD wrist strap to prevent device damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
The position of the ETSI subrack ESD jack, as shown in Figure 2-11.

Access Module
Figure 2-11 Position of the IEC subrack ESD jack (xDSL)
2.3.7 Grounding
This topic describes the grounding principle of the IEC subrack and the position of the ground
point.
NOTICE
interference for the IEC subrack. When a Huawei cabinet is installed, the service subrack is
The power input end of the IEC subrack has a noise filter. The center ground of the noise filter
connects to the subrack, called the subrack ground, that is, the protection ground. Ground the
subrack securely so that the influence electricity, leakage electricity can flow to the ground,
improving the protection against electromagnetic interference.
Use a ground cable to connect the ground point of the subrack to the ground bar of the
standards to ground the subrack.
The ground point of the subrack is on the left corner of the subrack, as shown in Figure 2-12.

Access Module
Figure 2-12 Grounding of the IEC subrack

This topic describes the ventilation of the MA5600T IEC service subrack.
The MA5600T IEC service subrack has a fan tray at the top to exhaust hot air for heat
dissipation.
The airflow is as follows: The cool air enters the MA5600T IEC service subrack at the
bottom, and is blown towards the top side by the fans, and finally, exits at the top side of the
MA5600T IEC service subrack.Figure 2-13 shows the heat dissipation of the MA5600T IEC
service subrack.

Access Module
Figure 2-13 Ventilation of the MA5600T IEC service subrack
2.4 MA5623AR Extended subrack Description

This topic provides the appearance, ports, and function of the MA5623AR extended subrack.
NOTE
V800R012C00 and later versions support the MA5623AR extended subrack, which is upstream
connected to the ETHB board through the GE port for extended subrack cascading.
2.4.1 Appearance and Ports

The MA5623AR is a 1 U-high box-shaped device.
The MA5623AR provides two configuration models, which differ in the power supply mode
(DC or AC). Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 show the appearance of MA5623AR. Table 2-26
describes the ports on MA5623AR.

Access Module
Figure 2-14 Appearance of an AC-powered MA5623AR

AC power Grounding Maintenance
Battery sensor port Mounting ear
port point network port Battery port
Uplink Maintenance serial Environment VDSL2 port

optical port port / Environment monitoring port
monitoring port
Figure 2-15 Appearance of an DC-powered MA5623AR
DC power port
Table 2-26 Ports on a MA5623AR

Port Name Silk Number Function
Screen of Ports
AC power port – 1 Connects to 110 V or 220 V AC power.
DC power port – 1 Connects to 48 V DC power.
Ground point – 1 Connects the device to the ground.
Uplink optical 0, 1 2 GE optical port:

port l Uses the small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical module.
l Supports different transmission distances
using various SFP optical modules.
l Supports single-mode and multi-mode
optical modules.
Maintenance ETH 1 It is a 100M Base-T commissioning network

network port port and supports 100 Mbit/s full-duplex
autonegotiation.

Access Module

Screen of Ports
Maintenance CONSO 1 The MA5623AR provides one serial port,

serial port/ LE which can function as a maintenance serial
Environment port and maintenance network port at the
monitoring port same time after a console-Ethernet integrated
(RS-232 port) cable is connected to it.
l During the BIOS loading process, this
serial port can only be used as a
maintenance serial port. In this case, the
first user port on the device can be used as
the maintenance network port.
l When the device is running, the functions
of this port are as follows:
– It can be used as a maintenance serial
port. In this case, you can configure a
user port on the device to manage the
device locally.
– It can function as a maintenance serial
port and maintenance network port at
the same time after a console-Ethernet
integrated cable is connected to it.
l When the serial port mode of the
MA5623AR is emu, can be connected to
environment monitoring unit (EMU) to
monitor the digital parameter. The port can
also be used for the communication
between the device and Fe-lithium
batteries.
Battery port BAT-/B 1 The port is used to connect the device to lead-
AT+ acid batteries. The port uses a design that
protects against inverse cable connector
insertion, and the through-current capacity is
16 A.
NOTE
The DC-powered MA5623AR does not support the
battery port.
Battery sensor SENSO 1 The port supports external temperature

port R sensors if the device uses an AC power source
and lead-acid batteries.
NOTE
The DC-powered MA5623AR does not support the
battery sensor port.
Environment ALAR 1 Supports four digital sensors: door status,

monitoring port M surge protection, main distribution frame, and
smoke sensors.

Access Module

Screen of Ports
VDSL2 Port xDSL0 2 The VDSL2 port supports a maximum

and transmission distance of 3.5 km (11,482 feet)
xDSL1 and supports VDSL2 service access in 48
channels.
NOTE
For pin assignments of the xDSL0 port, see Table
2-27. For pin assignments of the xDSL1 port, see
Table 2-28.
Mounting ears – 2 Used for fixing the device.
Table 2-27 Pin assignments of the xDSL0 port

Pin Signa Pin Signa Port Pin Signa Pin Signa
l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
2.4.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight, and power consumption of the MA5623AR
extended subrack.
Table 2-29 Dimensions and weight of the MA5623AR
Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 442mm×220mm×43.6mm

mounting brackets)
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 482.6mm×220mm×43.6mm

brackets)
Weight (empty chassis) 3.2 kg
Power (17a) l Static: 23 W

l Maximum: 73 W

Access Module
Item Specification
Maximum power (8b) l Static: 23 W

l Maximum: 79 W
NOTE

l -53.5 V DC
l Ambient temperature of 25°C
l Static power consumption: power consumption of the powered-on equipment with no load (all user
ports are deactivated)
l Maximum power consumption: power consumption of the powered-on equipment with full services
2.4.3 Function
The MA5623AR extended subrack can be considered as the extension service board for the
primary subrack of the MA5600T/MA5603T. The primary subrack manages the MA5623AR
extended subrack in the same way as it manages its service boards. The MA5623AR extended
subrack provides the same functions as the VDSL2 board of the primary subrack. It connects
to the ETHB board through the GE upstream port, cascading the primary subrack.
The MA5623AR extended subrack supports the following functions:
l 48-channel VDSL2 access service.

l Vectoring.
l Port protection
l 2-pair VDSL2 bonding when the 8a, 8b, 8c, or 8d profile is used.
l Single-ended loop test (SELT)
l Metallic loop test (MELT)
l VDSL2 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, and 17a profiles
l G.992.1 Annex A, G.992.3 Annex A/B/L/M, G.992.5 Annex A/B/M, G.993.2 Annex
A/B
l G.INP physical layer retransmission
NOTE
In bonding mode, the G.INP physical-layer retransmission is not supported.

l Temperature query and high-temperature alarm
l Automatic power shutdown in case of a high temperature
Figure 2-16 shows the external connections of the MA5623AR extended subrack.
NOTE
The MA5623AR extended subrack supports –48/–60 V DC and 220 V AC input power. The
MA5623AR extended subrack that supports 220 V AC input power is used as an example in the
following figure.

Access Module
Figure 2-16 External connections of the MA5623AR extended subrack
PDU
220 V input
GE optical port
ETHB
upstream
VDSL2 access board on
MA5623AR
the main
surbrack
Clock signal Serial port signal
Clock
ESC
source
2.4.4 Indicators
The MA5623AR provides various indicators on the panel to help users learn about the
running status of the device.
Figure 2-17 shows the panel indicators provided by the MA5623AR and Table 2-30
describes the status and meanings of these indicators.
Figure 2-17 Indicators provided by the MA5623AR

PWR LINK AUTH/ACT
1
0
RUN/ALM
xDSL1 xDSL0
Table 2-30 Status and meanings of the indicators provided by the MA5623AR
Indicator Name Color Status Description
PWR Power supply Green On The device is

status powered on.
indicator
- Off The device is
powered off.
RUN/ALM Running Red Blinking (on The device is

status for 0.25 s and starting up.
indicator off for 0.25 s
repeatedly)

Access Module
Indicator Name Color Status Description
Green Blinking (on The device is

for 1 s and off working properly.
for 1 s
repeatedly)
Red On The device is faulty.
LINK Link status Green On The uplink optical

indicator port is receiving
optical signals.
- Off The uplink port

fails to receive
optical signals or an
optical fiber is not
connected to
device.
ACT Data status Green Blinking The GE optical port

indicator is transmitting or
receiving data.
- Off No data is
transmitted or
received on the GE
optical port.

The MA5623AR supports a high density of user access. In addition, the MA5623AR adopts
an optimal design to implement wind cooling heat dissipation.
Two fans are located in the right side of the MA5623AR, used for ventilation of the chassis in
the exhaust mode.
The airflow is as follows: the cool air enters the MA5623AR at the left side, and is blown
towards the right side by the fans, and finally, exits at the right side of the MA5623AR
Figure 2-18 shows the airflow for the MA5623AR
Figure 2-18 Airflow for the MA5623AR

Access Module
MA5623AR supports automatic setting the fan speed, the fan speed is automatically adjusted
according to the temperature detected by the temperature sensor configured on the control
board.
The fans of the MA5623AR support alarm report when the fan is blocked.

2.5.1 Appearance
The MA5603T is 6 U high.
Figure 2-19 Appearance of the MA5603T chassis(xDSL)

Air filter
Cable teeth
Fan tray
Figure 2-20 Appearance of the MA5603T chassis(GPON)

Air filter
Cable teech
Fan tray

Access Module
2.5.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight, and power consumption of the MA5603T chassis.
Table 2-31 Dimensions and weight of the MA5603T

Item Specification

mounting brackets)
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 482.60 mm x 283.20 mm x 263.90 mm

brackets of 19-inch standard)
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 535.00 mm x 283.20 mm x 263.90 mm

brackets of ETSI standard)
Weight (empty chassis) 7.00 kg
Table 2-32 Power parameters of the MA5603T

Table 2-33 Power consumption of the MA5603T chassis (Unit: W)

Typical Static Maximum Typical Board configuration
Configu power power power
ration consumptio consumptio consumptio
n n n
ADSL2+ 189.84 606.55 398.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS

*2+H801CITD
+H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H805ADPD*6
VDSL2 267.84 702.55 485.195 H801SCUN*2+H801X2CS

*2+H801CITD
+H80BVDPM(17a)*6

Access Module
Typical Static Maximum Typical Board configuration

Configu power power power
ration consumptio consumptio consumptio
n n n
POTS 213.84 396.55 305.195 H801SCUN*2+H801X2CS

*2+H801CITD
+H808ASPB*6
P2P 537.84 810.55 674.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS

*2+H801CITD
+H802OPGD*6
GPON 375.84 504.55 440.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS

(H805GP *2+H801CITD
BD) +H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H805GPBD*6
GPON 309.84 486.55 398.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS

(H806GP *2+H801CITD
BH) +H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H806GPBH*6
GPON 273.84 510.55 392.195 H802SCUN*2+H801X2CS

(H802SC *2+H801CITD
UN +H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H805G +H805GPFD*6
PFD)
GPON 391.84 678.55 535.195 H801SCUH*2+H801X2CS

(H801SC *2+H801CITD
UH +H801PRTE*2+H801FCBI
+H805G +H805GPFD*6
PFD)
NOTE

l Working voltage: -53.5 V DC
l Ambient temperature: 25°C
power consumption.

Access Module
2.5.3 Configuration
This topic provides the configuration of the boards in the MA5603T chassis, and lists the type
of the boards.
H801MABO and H802MABO are the backplanes supported by the MA5603T. H801MABO
does not support the Vectoring feature, and H802MABO supports the Vectoring feature.
Figure 2-21 Configuration of boards in the MA5603T chassis
Table 2-34 lists the configuration of boards in the MA5603T chassis. For details, see 3.4
Board Configuration(MA5600T/MA5603T).
Table 2-34 Boards in the MA5603T chassis

(SCU) slot with the same control board.
You are advised to configure
2 control boards working in
Uplink 8,9 Uplink interface board Mixed configuration of

interface upstream interface boards is
board (GIU) supported; however, it is
slot recommended to use the same
upstream interface board in
the configuration.
Power board 10,11 Power board It is recommended to

slot configure the same power
board in the two slots.

Access Module
Universal 12 l Universal interface -

interface board
board (GPIO) l Vectoring processing
slot board
Service board 0-5 l Service board Mixed configuration of

slot – SPU board service boards is supported.
When the SPL board is
– Ethernet service configured in the slot, select
access board the slot next to the
– TDM service corresponding service board.
processing board
– GPON service board
– 10G GPON service
board
– P2P interface board
– ATM interface board
– Combo board
– Voice board
– ADSL2+ service
board
– VDSL2 service board
– SHDSL service
board
l SPL board
– ADSL SPL board
– VDSL SPL board
l Extension board
2.5.4 Fan Tray(FMCA)

Appearance
Six fans are configured in the fan tray (FMCA) of the MA5603T.

Access Module
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.0 kg

(including FMCA board) l Maximum: 72 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
The fan tray is at the left of the service subrack and blows air for heat dissipation of the
service subrack. The cool air flows to the subrack from the left of the subrack and then is
exhausted from the right of the subrack after passing the boards.
l Monitoring
The fan tray is configured with a fan monitoring board. The fan monitoring board
transmits speed adjustment signals to the fan tray, collects the rotating speed signals of
the fans, and reports the rotating speed signals to the control board.
l Speed adjustment
automatically or be adjusted by software manually.
LED
r

quickly (on is not
repeatedly) loaded.

Access Module

r

tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.

works in
the normal
state.

off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
generates
an over-
temperature
alarm.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FMCA monitoring board, which supports the -48 V / -60 V input
voltage, which provides a set of DIP switches S1.
Table 2-35 describes the settings of S1.
Table 2-35 Settings of S1


S1-2 ON

bit/s.

Access Module

bit/s.
S1-5 It is used to set the quantity of fans. ON
S1-6 ON
S1-7 It is used to set the mode of adjusting the ON

fan speed.
S1-8 ON
Table 2-36, Table 2-37, and Table 2-38 describe the settings of the DIP switches of S1.

ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7
NOTE
When S1-1, S1-2, and W1-3 are used to set the subnode address, make sure that the DIP switch settings
Table 2-37 Settings of S1-5 and S1-6

S1-6 S1-5 Fan Quantity
ON ON 6
ON OFF 8
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 10

Access Module
Table 2-38 Settings of S1-7 and S1-8

S1-8 S1-7 Speed Adjustment Mode Adjustment Strategy



the air intake vent

rotating)
NOTE
The fan tray (FMCA) of the MA5603T must use speed adjustment policy 1.

l Automatic mode
– Monitoring-board-triggering: The speed is automatically adjusted based on the
temperature which is detected by a temperature sensor.
NOTE
l Manual mode
2.5.5 Fan Tray (FCBI)

Appearance
Six fans are configured in the fan tray (FCBI) of the MA5603T.

Access Module
Specification
Item Specification
Weight 2.00 kg
Power consumption (including l Static: 16 W

FCBI board) l Maximum: 67 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
l Monitoring
l Speed adjustment
LED
r

quickly (on is not
repeatedly) loaded.

tion
between the
host and the
fan tray is
interrupted.

works in
the normal
state.

Access Module

r

off for 1 s do not
repeatedly) affect
services.
generates
an over-
temperature
alarm.
DIP Switches
The fan tray uses the FCBI monitoring board, which supports the -48 V / -60 V input voltage,
which provides a set of DIP switches SW1-S1.
Table 2-39 describes the settings of SW1-S1.
Table 2-39 Settings of SW1-S1

S1-2 ON

bit/s.

bit/s.
S1-5 It is used to set the scenario of fans. The ON

high eight dip switch should be 0000 0000
S1-6 for MA5603T subrack. ON
S1-7 l 0 indicates the switch should be ON. ON

l 1 indicates the switch should be OFF.
S1-8 ON

Access Module
SW1-1 ON
SW1-2 ON
SW1-3 ON
SW1-4 ON
Table 2-40 describes the settings of the low three DIP switches of S1.
ON ON ON 0
ON ON OFF 1
ON OFF ON 2
ON OFF OFF 3
OFF ON ON 4
OFF ON OFF 5
OFF OFF ON 6
OFF OFF OFF 7
NOTE
When S1-1, S1-2, and S1-3 are used to set the subnode address, make sure that the DIP switch settings

l Automatic mode
– Monitoring-board-triggering: The speed is automatically adjusted based on the
temperature which is detected by a temperature sensor.
NOTE

Access Module
l Manual mode
2.5.6 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the MA5603T chassis is on the lower right corner of the chassis, which is
discharge.
The position of the MA5603T chassis ESD jack, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Position of the MA5603T chassis ESD jack
2.5.7 Air Filter

In the MA5603T chassis, the air filter is installed at the left of the chassis. This topic provides
the appearance, dimensions, and function of the air filters used in the MA5603T chassis.

Figure 2-23 shows the appearance of the air filter in the MA5603T chassis.

Access Module
Figure 2-23 Appearance of the air filter in the MA5603T chassis
Table 2-41 lists the material and dimensions of the air filter.
Table 2-41 Material and dimensions of the air filter

Chassis Material Dimensions (W x D x H)
MA5603T Wire netting 11.0 mm x 272.3 mm x 245.4 mm
Function
The air filter is installed at the left of the MA5603T chassis. The air filter is installed in the
slot at the left of the fan tray. When the cold air enters the chassis from the left of the chassis,
the air filter can filter the dust in the air.

Access Module
2.5.8 Grounding
This topic describes the grounding principle of the MA5603T chassis and the position of the
ground point.
NOTICE
interference for the MA5603T. When a Huawei cabinet is installed, the service subrack is
The power input end of the MA5603T has a noise filter. The center ground of the noise filter
connects to the chassis, called the chassis shell ground, that is, the protection ground. Ground
the chassis shell securely so that the influence electricity, leakage electricity can flow to the
Use a ground cable to connect the ground point of the chassis shell to the ground bar of the
standards to ground the chassis.
The ground point of the chassis shell is on the front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Grounding of the chassis
2.5.9 Power Distribution Principle

The MA5603T chassis adopts DC power supply. This topic describes the power distribution
principle of the MA5603T chassis.
Figure 2-25 shows the power distribution principle of the MA5603T chassis.
NOTE
The MA5603T chassis supports -48 V (-38.4 V to -57.6 V)/-60 V (-38.4 V to -72 V) power supply. The
following uses the -48 V as an example.
Figure 2-25 Power distribution principle of the MA5603T chassis

Access Module
The PRTE power interface board leads one -48 V input to the backplane, and then the
backplane supplies power to each board.
Two PRTE boards can be configured for dual-system hot backup. If one PRTE board is off,
the other supplies power to the chassis can guarantee normal running of the system.

This topic describes the ventilation of the MA5603T chassis.
The MA5603T chassis has a fan tray at the left to blow air for heat dissipation.
The airflow for the MA5603T chassis is as follows: The cool air flows to the chassis through
the left side, and then the fans blow the air to the right side of the chassis through the boards.
Finally, the air exits through the right side of the chassis. Figure 2-26 shows the ventilation of
the MA5603T chassis.
Figure 2-26 Ventilation of the MA5603T chassis

2.6.1 Appearance
The MA5608T is 2 U high.

Access Module
Figure 2-27 Appearance of the MA5608T chassis(xDSL)
Figure 2-28 Appearance of the MA5608T chassis(GPON)
2.6.2 Specification
This topic provides the dimensions, weight, and power consumption of the MA5608T chassis.
Table 2-42 Dimensions and weight of the MA5608T

Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 442mm×244.5mm×88.1mm

mounting brackets)
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 482.6mm×244.5mm×88.1mm

brackets of IEC standard)
Dimensions (W x D x H, including mounting 535mm×244.5mm×88.1mm

brackets of ETSI standard)
NOTE
ETSI standard dimension is to add the ETSI
mounting bracket on the IEC mounting bracket.
Weight (empty chassis) 3.55kg

Access Module
Table 2-43 Power parameters of the MA5608T

Power supply mode DC (dual power for backup) or AC power + battery
Rated voltage DC power supply: -48 V / -60 V

AC power supply: 110 V / 220 V
Working voltage range DC power supply: -38.4 V to -72 V

AC power supply: 100 V to 240 V
Maximum input current DC power supply: 10 A

AC power supply: 6 A
Table 2-44 Power consumption of the MA5608T chassis (Unit: W)

Typical Static Maximum Typical Board Configuration
Configu Power Power Power
ration Consumpti Consumptio Consumptio
on n n
ADSL2+ 78.5 225.5 152 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

C+H831FCBB
+H805ADPD*2
VDSL2 104.5 257.5 181 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

C+H831FCBB
+H80BVDPM(17a)*2
POTS 86.5 155.5 121 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

C+H831FCBB
+H808ASPB*2
P2P 194.5 293.5 244 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

C+H831FCBB
+H802OPGD*2
GPON 140.5 191.5 166 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

(H805GP C+H831FCBB
BD) +H805GPBD*2
GPON 118.5 185.5 152 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

(H806GP C+H831FCBB
BH) +H806GPBH*2
GPON 106.5 193.5 150 H801MCUD*2+H801MPW

(H805GP C+H831FCBB
FD) +H805GPFD*2

Access Module
NOTE

power consumption.
2.6.3 Configuration
This topic provides the configuration of the boards in the MA5608T chassis, and lists the type
of the boards.
H801MABR is the backplane supported by the MA5608T. When the MA5608T is configured
in a cabinet, the lower cable manager must be configured.
Figure 2-29 Configuration of boards in the MA5608T chassis (with H801MPWC or

H801MPWD power board)
0 Service board
FAN 1 Service board
2 Control board 3 Control board GPIO

4 Power board
Figure 2-30 Configuration of boards in the MA5608T chassis (with H801MPWE power
board)
0 Service board
1 Service board
FAN
Power Power
2 Control board 3 Control board 4GPIO 5
board board
Table 2-45 lists the configuration of boards in the MA5608T chassis. For details, see 3.5
Board Configuration(MA5608T).

Access Module
Table 2-45 Boards in the MA5608T chassis

Control board 2, 3 Control board Two slots must be configured

slot with the same control board.
You are advised to configure 2
control boards working in
Power board 4 H801MPWC, -

slot H801MPWD power
board
4, 5 H801MPWE power -
board
Service board 0, 1 Service board Mixed configuration of service

slot l SPU board boards is supported.
l Ethernet service
access board
l TDM service
processing board
l GPON service board
l 10G GPON service
board
l P2P interface board
l ATM interface board
l Combo board
l Voice board
l ADSL2+ service
board
l VDSL2 service board
l SHDSL service board
2.6.4 Fan Tray

Appearance
Two fans are configured in the fan tray of the MA5608T.

Access Module
Specification
Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H) 29mm×220mm×85.5mm
Weight 0.5kg
Power consumption (including l Static: 4 W

FCBB board) l Maximum: 39 W
Function
l Heat dissipation
l Monitoring
l Speed adjustment
LED
Indicat Color Status Meaning Operation Description
or
FAN Green On The fan No action is required.

tray
functions
properly.

Access Module
Indicat Color Status Meaning Operation Description

or
Red On The fan l A power alarm or temperature

tray is sensor alarm may be
abnormal. generated. Handle it based on
the specific alarm
l Adjust the fan speed because a
high temperature alarm or low
temperature alarm may be
generated.
l Check communication
between the fan tray and
device because
communication between them
may be interrupted.
l Fans may be faulty. Replace
the faulty fan tray.

Fans in the fan tray of the MA5608T chassis have the following modes:
l Self-check mode: Fans start running at full speed when the device is powered on for the
first time or is reset. After fans start up, the duty ratio of fans is initialized.
l Troubleshooting mode: Fans run at the old speed and related alarms are reported when
faults occur.
l Board-based fan speed adjustment mode: According to the temperatures detected by
temperature sensors on all boards, fans automatically adjust their speed.
l Temperature mode: According to the temperature of the fans, fans automatically adjust
their speed.
Figure 2-31 shows the status transfer of the fans after the fan tray starts up.
Figure 2-31 Fan status transfer

Access Module
2.6.5 ESD Jack

The ESD jack of the MA5608T chassis is on the middle of the fan tray, which is used to
connect the ESD wrist strap to prevent device damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
The position of the MA5608T chassis ESD jack, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Position of the MA5608T chassis ESD jack
2.6.6 Grounding
This topic describes the grounding principle of the MA5608T chassis and the position of the
ground point.
NOTICE
interference for the MA5608T. When a Huawei cabinet is installed, the service subrack is
Ground the chassis shell securely so that the influence electricity, leakage electricity can flow
to the ground, improving the protection against electromagnetic interference.
Use a ground cable to connect the ground point of the chassis shell to the ground bar of the
standards to ground the chassis.
The ground point of the chassis shell is on the left of the chassis, and there is a ground point
on the front of the left mounting bracket as shown in Figure 2-33.

Access Module
Figure 2-33 Grounding of the MA5608T chassis
2.6.7 Power Distribution Principle

The MA5608T chassis adopts AC and DC power supply. This topic describes the power
distribution principle of the MA5608T chassis.
The power distribution principle of the MA5608T, as shown in Figure 2-34.
NOTE
The MA5608T chassis adopts -48 V (-38.4 V to -57.6 V)/-60 V (-38.4 V to -72 V) DC power supply and
AC power supply. The following uses the -48 V DC as an example.
Figure 2-34 Power distribution principle of the MA5608T chassis
MPWC Back Board

plane
The MPWC power interface board leads two -48 V input to the backplane, and then the
backplane supplies power to each board.
The MPWC boards supports two -48 V DC input. If one input is off, the other supplies power
to the chassis can guarantee normal running of the system.
The MPWD power interface board supports the AC input. After AC/DC conversion, the
power is supplied to the system backplane at -48 V DC.
Two MPWE boards can be configured for dual-system hot backup. Each MPWC board
supports one -48 V DC input. If one MPWE board is off, the other supplies power to the
chassis can guarantee normal running of the system.

This topic describes the ventilation of the MA5608T chassis.

Access Module
The MA5608T chassis has a fan tray at the left to blow air for heat dissipation.
The airflow for the MA5608T chassis is as follows: The cool air flows to the chassis through
the left side, and then the fans blow the air to the right side of the chassis through the boards.
Finally, the air exits through the right side of the chassis. Figure 2-35 shows the ventilation of
the MA5608T chassis.
Figure 2-35 Ventilation of the MA5608T chassis

Access Module
Hardware Description 3 Board
3 Board
About This Chapter
This topic describes the function, front panel, port, daughter board, and pin assignments of the
boards, and lists the specification of the boards.
The temperature specification of the boards is +65°C. If there is special specification, you can
reference the function of the board.
3.1 Board Overview
This topic describes the structure, dimensions, name, version and label of the boards. This
manual describes the supply of boards supported by the product. However, the availability of
the boards is subject to the product change notices (PCNs). For the availability of the boards,
contact product managers at Huawei representative offices.
3.2 Mapping Between Boards and Software Versions
This topic provides the following information: mapping between boards and software
versions; whether a board is out of production; substitution relationship between boards.
3.3 Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of Boards
You can query power consumption, maximum frame size, and normal operating temperature
of all boards.
3.4 Board Configuration(MA5600T/MA5603T)
This topic describes the type, name, slot and mapping of the boards supported by the
MA5600T/MA5603T.
3.5 Board Configuration(MA5608T)
MA5608T.
3.6 Control Board (SCU)
A control board, as the control and management unit of the system, configures, manages, and
controls the device and also implements simple routing protocol functions.
controls the device and also implements simple routing protocol functions. The MCU control
board is used on the MA5608T.
3.8 Upstream Interface Board (GIU)

Access Module
Upstream interface boards provide upstream or cascading ports for the system. GIU is short
for general interface unit.
3.9 Universal Interface Board (GPIO)
Universal interface boards (installed in the GPIO slot) receive the clock signals and ESC
parameters. GPIO is short for general purpose input/output.
3.10 Power Board (PRT)
Power boards (PRT) lead in DC power for supplying power to the device MA5600T or
MA5603T.
3.11 Power Board (MPW)
Power boards (MPW) lead in DC or AC power for supplying power to the device MA5608T.
3.12 SPU Board
SPU is a service processing board.
3.13 Ethernet Service Access Board (ETH)
Ethernet service access boards provide Ethernet service cascading or upstream transmission,
which does not support user access and user management.
3.14 TDM Service Processing Board
TDM service processing boards include H801TOPA, H801TOPB and H801CSPA.
3.15 GPON Service Board
GPON service boards work with ONUs to provide GPON access service.
3.16 10G GPON Service Board
10G GPON service boards work with ONUs to provide 10G GPON access service.
3.17 P2P Interface Board
Point-to-point (P2P) interface boards work with Ethernet optical network terminals (for
example the ONT supporting GE upstream, MxU and lanswitch) to provide P2P optical
access services for users.
3.18 ATM Interface Board
The ATM interface board includes H801AIUG.
3.19 Combo Board
The combo board is a broadband and narrowband combo service board and provides three
application modes: combo mode, broadband mode, and narrowband mode. In combo mode,
the combo board supports both broadband and voice services.
3.20 Voice Board
Voice boards support VoIP POTS, ISDN BRA, and ISDN PRA services.
3.21 ADSL2+ Service Board
ADSL2+ service boards provide ADSL2+ access services using their broadband ports.
3.22 VDSL2 Service Board
VDSL2 service boards provide VDSL2 access services using their broadband ports.
3.23 Vectoring Processing Board
The Vectoring processing board provides the Vertoring feature, and it is used to eliminate the
signal crosstalk in the VDSL2 system.
SHDSL service boards provide SHDSL access services using their broadband ports.
3.25 ADSL2+ SPL Board

Access Module
The ADSL SPL board separates narrowband signals from ADSL signals.
3.26 VDSL2 SPL Board
The VDSL SPL board separates narrowband signals from VDSL signals.
3.27 Extension Board
Extension boards transfer services of the service boards.
3.28 Filler Panel
A filler panel is used to cover a slot that is not in use in a subrack.
3.1 Board Overview

This topic describes the structure, dimensions, name, version and label of the boards. This
manual describes the supply of boards supported by the product. However, the availability of
the boards is subject to the product change notices (PCNs). For the availability of the boards,
contact product managers at Huawei representative offices.
3.1.1 Board Structure

A board mainly consists of the printed circuit board (PCB) and the front panel.
Figure 3-1 shows the structure of a board (using the SCUN board as an example).

Access Module
Figure 3-1 Board structure
A board mainly consists of the following parts:

l PCB
The PCB houses various functional chips of the board and is the most important part of
the board. Through the front panel, the PCB provides indicators, buttons, and ports. For
some boards, the PCB also provides a position for installing a daughter board.
NOTE
Different boards provide different indicators, buttons, and ports; not all boards support a daughter
board. For details, see the description of each board.
l Front panel, including the captive screws, ejector levers, and plate
– Captive screws: secure the board in the subrack.
– Ejector levers: used for inserting or removing the board.
– Plate: connects the PCB and the ejector levers. The plate also provides a surface for
attaching some labels (such as the bar code label and laser label).

Access Module
3.1.2 Board Dimensions

This topic describes the dimensions of each type of board.
Figure 3-2 illustrates the dimensions of a board (using a service board as an example).
Figure 3-2 Board structure
Table 3-1 lists the dimensions of the boards supported by the product.

Access Module
Table 3-1 Board dimensions
Board Type Board Appearance Dimensions (W x D x H)
Control 25.40 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm

board(SCU)
Control 35.56 mm x 237.00 mm x 134.84 mm

board(MCU)
Universal 25.40 mm x 237.00 mm x 183.20 mm

interface
board
Upstream 25.40 mm x 237.00 mm x 197.20 mm

interface
board
Power 25.40 mm x 237.00 mm x 105.10 mm

board(PRT)
Power MPWC/MPWD: MPWC/MPWD: 35.56 mm x 252.70 mm x

board(MPW) 132.10 mm
MPWE: MPWE: 35.56 mm x 245.25 mm x 65.60 mm
Service board 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm

Access Module
Board Type Board Appearance Dimensions (W x D x H)
SPL board 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm
3.1.3 Board Name and Version

This topic describes the board name and version.
As shown in Figure 3-3 (using the SCUN board as an example), the board name and version
are printed on the PCB of a board.
Figure 3-3 Board name and version

Access Module
NOTE
l H801SCUN is the full board name. Different full board names indicate different boards. For
example, H802GPBD and H805GPBD are two different boards.
l SCUN is the board silk screen, indicating a type of board. For example, GPBD includes H802GPBD
and H805GPBD that have the same silk screen.
l VER.B is the board PCB version. The PCB version will be upgraded with regard to technology
development or due to end of production of some key components. Generally, a PCB version change
does not cause board function changes, unless otherwise specified in the document.
3.1.4 Board Label

This topic describes the meanings of the labels attached to the board front panel.
Laser Label
The optical ports of all boards use the same laser label: CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT, which
indicates a class 1 laser.
The optical port with a class 1 laser provides an output optical power lower than 10 dBm (10
mW).
DANGER
Please do not look into an optical port without eye protection. The laser will injure your eyes.
Bar Code Label

The bar code label is the first 16 digits of a generally board label, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Board bar code

Access Module
Position Name Introduction
1-6 The last six The first two digits of the board BOM is 03. The BOM is
digits of the used to identify the board.
board BOM.
7, 8 EMS code Codes for differentiating different vendors.
9 Year The year of production date, the last digit is used. For
example, year 2004 is recorded as 4. From 2010, letters are
used, A to Z indicate years starting from 2010.
10 Month The month of production date, in hexadecimal notation. For

example, October is displayed as A.
11-16 Serial number The serial number (SN) of a board. It is updated every
month and ranges from 000001 to 999999.
3.2 Mapping Between Boards and Software Versions

This topic provides the following information: mapping between boards and software
versions; whether a board is out of production; substitution relationship between boards.
The mapping between boards and version V800R008C01 and later versions are provided in
the following table. For the boards supported by a specific version, see Board Overview in the
Product Description of the version.
NOTE
l Life cycle status is available until the release date. "EOM" indicates end of marketing. "EOP"
indicates end of production. The availability of the boards is subject to the product change notices
(PCNs). For the availability of the boards, contact product managers at Huawei representative
offices.
l A board housing smaller ports cannot be replaced with a board housing more ports.
l "All the versions" refer to V800R008C01 and later versions.
l Compatible in xx: The board is supported by reverse loading from xx (of the same R version).
l Compatible in xx-xx: The board is supported by reverse loading in these versions.
Table 3-2 Mapping between boards and software versions

Board Name Software Versions Supported Life Cycle Substitution Relationship
by This Board Status
Control board (SCU)
H801SCUB All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H802SCUB

board

Access Module

H802SCUB l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01HP3035(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02HP3035(SPC30
0)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00HP1022
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPH108
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPH208
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPH208
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC102
l V800R015C10 and later
versions
H801SCUF All the versions EOM N/A
H801SCUH V800R011C00 and later versions N/A N/A
H801SCUL All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H801SCUN/

H802SCUN board
H801SCUN All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H802SCUN

board
H802SCUN l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC317(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC102
versions

Access Module

H801SCUK l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC317(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC102
versions
H801SCUV V800R013C00 and later versions N/A N/A
Control board (MCU)
H801MCUD V800R012C00 and later versions N/A N/A
H801MCUE V800R013C00 and later versions N/A N/A
H801MCUD1 V800R012C00 and later versions N/A N/A
Upstream interface board
H801GICD All the versions N/A N/A
H801GICE All the versions N/A N/A
H801GICF All the versions N/A Replaceable with the H801X2CS

board (supported by V800R011C00
and later versions)
H801GICG All the versions N/A Replaceable with the H801GICF

board (supported by
V800R013C10SPH217/
V800R015C00SPC107 and later
patch versions)
H801GICK All the versions N/A Replaceable with the H802GICK

board
H802GICK l Compatible in V800R017C10– N/A Replaceable with the H801GICK

V800R018C00(supported by board
loading the corresponding
patch file)
versions
H801GSCA All the versions N/A N/A
H801X1CA All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H801X2CS

board
H801X2CA All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H801X2CS

board

Access Module

H801X2CS All the versions N/A Replaceable with the H802X2CS

board
H802X2CS l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R017C10 (supported by
patch file)
versions
H801X2CK l Compatible in V800R017C10– N/A N/A

V800R018C00(supported by
patch file)
versions
H802P2CA All the versions N/A N/A
Universal interface board
H801BIUA All the versions EOM N/A
H801CITA All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801CITD

board
H801CITD All the versions N/A N/A
Power interface board (PRT)
H801PRTA All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801PRTE

board
H801PRTE All the versions N/A N/A
H801PRTG All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801PRTE

board
Power interface board (MPW)
H801MPWC V800R012C00 and later versions N/A N/A
H801MPWD V800R012C00 and later versions N/A N/A

Access Module

H801MPWE l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R012C00SPH108
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPH208
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPH208
versions
SPU board
H801SPUA All the versions N/A N/A
H801SPUB All the versions N/A N/A
H801SPUC V800R013C10 and later versions N/A N/A
H801SPUF V800R013C00 and later versions N/A N/A
Ethernet service access board
H801ETHA All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801ETHB

board
H801ETHB All the versions N/A N/A
TDM service process board
H801CSPA All the versions EOM N/A
H801TOPA All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H801TOPB

board when configured with STM-1
daughter board

Access Module

H801TOPB l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPH321+HP30
32+HP3035(SPC100)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116+HP102
5
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111+HP102
7
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101+HP101
1
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPH210
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPH210
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPH105
l Compatible in
V800R015C10HP1006
versions
GPON interface board
H801GPBC All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H802GPBD/

H805GPBD/H805GPFD/
H806GPBH/H807GPBH board
H802GPBD All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H805GPBD/

H806GPBH/H807GPBH board
H805GPBD l Compatible in EOM Replaceable with the H802GPBD/

V800R008C01SPC100 H806GPBH/H807GPBH board
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
versions

Access Module

H802GPFD l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H805GPFD

V800R008C01SPC315(SPC10 board
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in V800R009C00
l Compatible in
V800R010SPC106
versions
H805GPFD l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPH321(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in
V800R009C00SPH107
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH110
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
H806GPBH l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H807GPBH

V800R008C01SPC312(SPC10 board
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC312(SPC30
0)
l Compatible in V800R009C00–
V800R011C00
versions

Access Module

H807GPBH l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H806GPBH

V800R008C01SPH321(SPC10 board
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in
V800R009C00SPH107
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH110
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
H801GPMD V800R013C00 and later versions N/A N/A
10G GPON interface board
H802XGBC l Compatible in V800R011C00 EOM N/A

versions
H801XGBD l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R011C00SPH110
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
P2P interface board
H801OPFA All the versions EOM N/A
H802OPGD All the versions N/A N/A

Access Module

H802OPGE l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC317(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC317(SPC30
0)
l Compatible in
V800R009C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
versions
ATM interface board
H801AIUG All the versions EOM N/A
Combo Board
H80BCAME l Compatible in EOM Replaceable with the H806CAME

V800R008C02SPC300 board
versions
H806CAME l Compatible in V800R009C00– N/A N/A

V800R015C00
versions
H80BCVME l Compatible in V800R010C00 N/A N/A

versions

Access Module

H806CCPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DCCPE

V800R010C00SPH116 board
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPH210
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPH210
versions
H80DCCPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H806CCPE

l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC210
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC210
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions
H80DCSPE l Compatible in V800R015C00– N/A N/A

V800R018C00
versions
Voice board
H801ASRB All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H808ASPB

board
H801ASPB All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H808ASPB

board
H808ASPB All the versions N/A N/A

Access Module

H809ASPB l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R009C00
versions
H80BASPB l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R016C10
versions
H80CASPB l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R016C10
versions
H802DSRD All the versions N/A N/A
H802DSRE All the versions EOP N/A
H802EDTB All the versions N/A N/A
H80AATRB V800R016C10 and later versions N/A N/A
ADSL2+ service access board
H805ADIF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H802ADQD/

H80BVDQM board
H808ADIF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H802ADQD/

H80BVDQM board
H808ADLE All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H80BADPE/

H807ADPE board
H805ADLF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H805ADPD

board
H808ADLF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H805ADPD/

H807ADPD board
H802ADPD All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H805ADPD/

H807ADPD board
H805ADPD All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H802ADPD/

H807ADPD board

Access Module

H807ADPD l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H802ADPD/

V800R008C01SPH321+HP30 H805ADPD board
32+HP3035(SPC100)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPH321+HP30
32+HP3035(SPC300)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116+HP102
2
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions
H802ADQD All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H80BVDQM

board
H802ADKM All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H808ADPM/

H807ADPM board
H80BADPE All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H807ADPE

board

Access Module

H807ADPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80BADPE

V800R008C01SPH321+HP30 board
32+HP3035(SPC100)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPH321+HP30
32+HP3035(SPC300)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116+HP102
2
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions
H808ADPM l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H807ADPM

0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPH313(SPC30
0)
l Compatible in
V800R009C05SPH106
versions

Access Module

H807ADPM l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H808ADPM/

V800R008C01SPH321+HP30 H802ADKM board
32+HP3035(SPC100)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPH321+HP30
32+HP3035(SPC300)
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH116+HP102
2
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions
VDSL2 service access board
H805VDSA All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H805VDMF/

H80AVDPD board
H805VDSF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H805VDMF/

H80AVDPD board
H805VDTF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H802VDNF/

H80BVDQM board
H805VDRD All the versions EOM N/A
H805VDMF All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H80BVDMF/

H80DSDMM board
H80BVDMF l Compatible in V800R009C00– N/A Replaceable with the H805VDMF

V800R017C00 board
version
H802VDNF All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H80BVDQM

board

Access Module

H802VDJM All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H80BVDPM

board
H80AVDPD l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DVCPD

V800R008C01SPC100– board
V800R011C00
versions
H80BVDPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DVCPE

l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
versions
H80BVDPM l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DVCPM

l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
versions
H80BVDQM l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC312(SPC10
0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC312(SPC30
0)
l Compatible in V800R009C00–
V800R011C00
versions
H80BVCMM l Compatible in V800R010C00 N/A Replaceable with the H80DSDMM

l V800R011C00 and later board
versions

Access Module

H806VCPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DVCPE

0)
l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in
V800R010C00SPH111
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
H80DVCPE l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H806VCPE

l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions

Access Module

H80AVCPD l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80DVCPD

l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
H80DVCPD l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80AVCPD

l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions

Access Module

H80AVCPM l Compatible in EOM Replaceable with the H80DVCPM

l Compatible in
V800R008C02SPC300
l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC206
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC205
versions
H80DVCPM l Compatible in N/A Replaceable with the H80AVCPM

l Compatible in
V800R011C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R012C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R013C00SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R013C10SPC209
l Compatible in
V800R015C00SPC101
l Compatible in
V800R015C10SPC101
versions
H80DSDMM l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R016C00SPC101
versions
H80DSDPM l Compatible in V800R013C00- N/A N/A

V800R017C00
versions
Vectoring processing board

Access Module

H806VPEA l Compatible in V800R012C00 N/A Replaceable with the H806VPEF

l V800R013C00 and later board
versions
H806VPEF l Compatible in V800R017C10- N/A N/A

V800R018C00
versions
H806VPGA V800R015C00 and later versions N/A N/A
SHDSL service access board
H803SHDA All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H802SHLB/

H80ASHLM board
H802SHLB All the versions EOM Replaceable with the H80ASHLM/

H802SHGM board
H80ASHLM All the versions EOM N/A
H802SHGM l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R013C00
versions
ADSL SPL board
H801SPLF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801SPPF1

board
H801SPLH All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801SPPHA

board
H801SPLL All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801SPPLA

board
H801SPPLA All the versions EOM N/A
H801SPPLB All the versions EOM N/A
H801SPPLC All the versions EOM N/A
H801SPPHA All the versions EOM N/A
H801SPPF1 All the versions EOM N/A
H801SPPF All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801SPPF1

board
VDSL SPL board

Access Module

H801VSTH All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801VSPHA

board
H801VSTL All the versions EOP Replaceable with the H801VSNLA

board
H801VSNF All the versions EOM N/A
H801VSNLA All the versions EOM N/A
H801VSPHA All the versions EOM N/A
H801VSPLA All the versions N/A N/A
H801VSPLC All the versions N/A N/A
SHDSL extension board
H801SHET All the versions N/A N/A
FAN
H801FCBB All the versions EOS Replaceable with the

H801FCBI(ETSI) board
H801FCBC All the versions N/A Replaceable with the H801FCBH

board
H801FCBH l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R009C00
versions
H801FCBI(ETSI) l Compatible in N/A N/A

V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R009C00
versions
H801FCBI(MA56 l Compatible in N/A N/A

03T) V800R008C01SPC100–
V800R009C00
versions
H801FMCA All the versions N/A Replaceable with the

H801FCBI(MA5603T) board
H831FCBB V800R012C00 and later versions N/A N/A
Environment monitoring
H801ESCA All the versions N/A N/A

Access Module

H801SPDA All the versions N/A N/A
Table 3-3 Mapping between daughter boards and software versions

Board Name Board position Software Versions Life Substitution
Supported by This Cycle Relationship
Board Status
H801CKMC SCU control board All the versions N/A N/A
H801CKMD SCU control board V800R013C10 and later N/A N/A

versions
H801FLBA SCU control board All the versions N/A Replaceable with the
H801CKMC board
H801M2XA SCU control board All the versions N/A N/A
H801O2CE H801TOPA All the versions N/A N/A
H801CSSA H801TOPA All the versions N/A N/A
H801NH1A H801TOPA All the versions N/A N/A
H801EH1A H801TOPA All the versions N/A N/A
H801BITSB H801CITD All the versions N/A N/A
H806SHUAB H802SHLB All the versions N/A N/A
H806SHUI H80ASHLM All the versions N/A N/A
H801CKMA H801BIUA All the versions EOM N/A
H801O2CS H801AIUG All the versions N/A N/A
3.3 Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of

Boards
You can query power consumption, maximum frame size, and normal operating temperature
of all boards.
Table 3-4 lists the power consumption and maximum frame size of boards. "-" indicates N/A.
The operating temperature of all the boards is -40°C to +65°C. The lowest board startup
temperature is -25°C.

Access Module
NOTE
l The power consumption of the board is tested in the following conditions:

l Static power consumption: All ports do not carry any loads. Specifically, users under POTS
ports hang up phones, xDSL ports are deactivated, and optical modules are not installed on
optical ports
l Maximum power consumption: All ports fully carry loads. However, only 25% users under
POTS ports concurrently pick up phones and the feeding current is 20 mA.
l The board power consumption slightly varies with the power module configured for the board and
discreteness of components.
Table 3-4 Power consumption and maximum frame size of boards
Board Power Consumption Maximum Frame Size
Control board (SCU)
H801SCUB l Static: 18.8 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
l Maximum: 22 W enabled, a maximum of 9216 bytes can be
supported.
H802SCUB l Static: 14 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801SCUF l Static: 22 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801SCUH l Static: 89 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

l Maximum: 111 W (Fully enabled, a maximum of 9216 bytes can be
configured with 10GE service supported.
board)
l Maximum: 134 W (Fully
configured with 20GE service
board)
H801SCUL l Static: 40.4 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
l Maximum: 42.1 W enabled, a maximum of 9216 bytes can be
supported.
H801SCUN l Static: 41 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H802SCUN l Static: 30 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801SCUK l Static: 30 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.

Access Module
H801SCUV l Static: 89 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

l Maximum: 111 W (Fully enabled, a maximum of 9216 bytes can be
configured with 10GE service supported.
board)
l Maximum: 134 W (Fully
configured with 20GE service
board)
Control board (MCU)
H801MCUD l Static: 24 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801MCUD1 l Static: 29 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801MCUE l Static: 24 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
Upstream interface board (GIU)
H801GICD l Static: 5.3 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801GICE l Static: 5.8 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801GICF l Static: 3.9 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801GICG l Static: 6.3 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801GICK l Static: 6.6 W 2000 bytes

l Maximum: 7 W
H802GICK l Static: 7 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801GSCA l Static: 8 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.

Access Module
H801X1CA l Static: 11.1 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801X2CA l Static: 20.2 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801X2CS l Static: 17.6 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H802X2CS l Static: 7 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801X2CK l Static: 7 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H802P2CA l Static: 9 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 10 W
Universal interface board (GPIO)
H801BIUA l Static: 5.3 W -

l Maximum: 5.3 W
H801CITA l Static: 1.9 W -

l Maximum: 4.3 W
H801CITD l Static: 3.64 W -

l Maximum: 4.55 W
Power interface board (PRT)
H801PRTA l Static: 1.5 W -

l Maximum: 1.5 W
H801PRTE l Static: 1.5 W -

l Maximum: 1.5 W
H801PRTG l Static: 0.2 W -

l Maximum: 0.2 W
Power interface board (MPW)
H801MPWC l Static: 2.5 W -

l Maximum: 2.5 W

Access Module
H801MPWD l Static: 2 W -
l Maximum transfer efficiency: 93%
(220 V, 100% load, 25°C)
H801MPWE l Static: 1.5 W -

l Maximum: 1.5 W
SPU board
H801SPUA l Static: 28 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 35 W
H801SPUB l Static: 21 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 24 W
H801SPUC l Static: 53 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801SPUF l Static: 32 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801ETHA l Static: 19.6 W 1600 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is
supported.
H801ETHB l Static: 20 W 2052 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H801CSPA l Static: 22 W -
l Maximum: 23 W

Access Module
H801TOPA l H801NHlA daughter board: -

– Static: 24.2 W
– Maximum: 25.3 W
l H801EH1A daughter board:
– Static: 24.2 W
– Maximum: 25.3 W
l H801O2CE daughter board:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 24.5 W
l H801CSSA daughter board:
– Static: 25 W
– Maximum: 25 W
H801TOPB l Static: 13 W -
l Maximum: 16 W
H801GPBC l Static: 70.6 W l For V800R011C00 and earlier versions: 2000

l Maximum: 78 W bytes
l For V800R012C00 and later versions: 2004
bytes
H802GPBD l Static: 45 W l For V800R011C00 and earlier versions: 2000

bytes
H805GPBD l Static: 43 W l For V800R011C00 and earlier versions: 2000

bytes
H802GPFD l Static: 45 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 73 W
H805GPFD l Static: 26 W 2004 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
H806GPBH l Static: 32 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 46 W
H807GPBH l Static: 25 W 2004 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.

Access Module
H801GPMD l Static: 32 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 46 W
H802XGBC l Static: 67 W 2004 bytes

l Maximum: 85 W
H801XGBD l Static: 26 W 2004 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
P2P interface board
H801OPFA l Static: 20.2 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 28.5 W
H802OPGD l Static: 70 W l For V800R011C00 and earlier versions: 1800

bytes
H802OPGE l Static: 53 W 2004 bytes. After the jumbo frame function is

supported.
ATM interface board
H801AIUG l Static: 24.9 W -

l Maximum: 33.4 W
Combo board
H80BCAME l Static: 26 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 75 W
H806CAME l Static: 22 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 69 W
H80BCVME l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Static: 32 W l ATM: 1800 bytes
– Maximum: 86 W (the
convergence ration is 25%.)
l 8b:
– Static: 32 W

Access Module
H806CCPE l 12a/17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

l 8b:
– Static: 41 W
H80DCCPE l 12a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

l 17a:
– Static: 36 W
l 8b:
– Static: 36 W
H80DCSPE l 12a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

l 17a:
– Static: 36 W
l 35b:
– Static: 36 W
Voice board
H801ASRB l Static: 12 W -
l Maximum: 37 W
H801ASPB l Static: 15.5 W -

l Maximum: 64 W

Access Module
H808ASPB l Static: 16 W -
l Maximum: 31 W (calculated based
on the 25% convergence ratio)
H809ASPB l Static: 15 W -
l Maximum: 31 W (calculated based
on the 25% convergence ratio)
H80BASPB l Static: 13 W -
l Maximum: 29 W
H80CASPB l Static: 13 W -
l Maximum: 29 W
H802DSRD l Static: 18 W -
l Maximum: 40 W
H802DSRE l Static: 18 W -
l Maximum: 40 W
H802EDTB l Static: 32 W -
l Maximum: 38 W
H80AATRB l Static: 4 W -
l Maximum: 4 W
H808ADIF l Static: 12 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 49.2 W
H808ADLE l Static: 12.4 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 56.8 W
H805ADLF l Static: 15 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 46 W
H808ADLF l Static: 12 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 50.4 W
H802ADPD l Static: 25 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 82.5 W

l Maximum: 66 W

l Maximum: 41 W

Access Module
H802ADQD l Static: 25 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 82.5 W
H802ADKM l Static: 28 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 81 W
H80BADPE l Static: 12.4 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 56.8 W
H807ADPE l Static: 20 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 41 W
H808ADPM l Static: 15 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 62 W
H807ADPM l Static: 22 W 1800 bytes

l Maximum: 43 W
H805VDSA l Static: 29.4 W l PTM: 1600 bytes

l Maximum: 76.5 W l ATM: 1800 bytes
H805VDSF l Static: 27.3 W l PTM: 1600 bytes

l Maximum: 57 W l ATM: 1800 bytes
H805VDTF l Static: 25.7 W l PTM: 1600 bytes

l Maximum: 60.7 W l ATM: 1800 bytes
H805VDRD l Static: 20 W l PTM: 1600 bytes

H805VDMF l 17a: l PTM: 1600 bytes

– Maximum: 80 W
l 8b:
– Static: 34 W
– Maximum: 87 W
H80BVDMF l 17a: l PTM:1800 bytes

– Static: 18 W l ATM:1800 bytes
– Maximum: 57 W
l 8b:
– Static: 18 W
– Maximum: 62 W

Access Module
H802VDNF l 17a: l PTM: 1536 bytes

– Maximum: 90 W
l 8b:
– Static: 35.2 W
– Maximum: 96 W
H802VDJM l 17a: l PTM: 1536 bytes

– Maximum: 82 W
l 8b:
– Static: 33 W
– Maximum: 99 W
H80AVDPD l 17a: l PTM: 1518 bytes

– Maximum: 77 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 89 W
H80BVDPE l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 79 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 86 W
H80BVDPM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 82 W
l 8b:
– Static: 25 W
– Maximum: 89 W
H80BVDQM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 81 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 82 W

Access Module
H80BVCMM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 75 W
l 8b:
– Static: 30 W
– Maximum: 77 W
H80AVCPD l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 65 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 70 W
H80DVCPD l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 64 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 70 W
H80AVCPM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 67 W
l 8b:
– Static: 26 W
– Maximum: 72 W
H80DVCPM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 66 W
l 8b:
– Static: 26 W
– Maximum: 72 W
H806VCPE l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 65 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 70 W

Access Module
H80DVCPE l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 64 W
l 8b:
– Static: 24 W
– Maximum: 70 W
H80DSDMM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 59 W
l 8b:
– Static: 26 W
– Maximum: 58 W
l 35b:
– Static: 26 W
– Maximum: 64 W
H80DSDPM l 17a: l PTM: 2000 bytes

– Maximum: 73 W
l 8b:
– Static: 29 W
– Maximum: 72 W
l 35b:
– Static: 29 W
– Maximum: 78 W
H806VPEA l Static: 21 W (not configured with -

service board)
l Maximum: 51 W (fully configured
with 6 VCMM boards in vectoring
mode)

Access Module
H806VPEF l Static: 52 W (not configured with -

service board)
with 6 VCPM boards in Vectoring
mode)
with 6 SDMM boards in
SuperVector mode)
with 6 SDPM boards in
SuperVector mode)
H806VPGA l Static: 46 W (not configured with -

service board)
with 12 VCMM boards in vectoring
mode)
H803SHDA l Static: 22 W l PTM: 1594 bytes

H802SHLB l Static: 16 W l PTM: 1594 bytes

H80ASHLM l Static: 16 W l PTM: 1594 bytes

H802SHGM l Static: 22 W l PTM mode: 2000 bytes

l Maximum: 29 W l ATM-PTM mode:
– PTM: 1594 bytes
– ATM: 1800 bytes
FAN
H801FCBB l Static: 23 W -
l Maximum: 65 W
H801FCBC l Static: 17 W -
l Maximum: 52 W
H801FCBH l Static: 21 W -
l Maximum: 88 W
H801FCBI l Static: 13 W -
(ETSI) l Maximum: 67 W

Access Module
H801FCBI l Static: 16 W -
(MA5603T) l Maximum: 67 W
H801FMCA l Static: 30 W -
l Maximum: 72 W
H831FCBB l Static: 4 W -
l Maximum: 39 W
Environment monitoring board
H801ESCA l Static: 4 W -
l Maximum: related to the connected
sensor
Daughter board
H801CKMC l Static: 4 W (with H801SCUN) -

l Maximum: 4 W (with H801SCUN)
H801CKMD l Static: 6 W (with H802SCUN) -

H801FLBA l Static: 3 W (with H801SCUN) -

H801M2XA l Static: 25 W (with H802SCUN) -

l Maximum: 25 W (with
H802SCUN)
3.4 Board Configuration(MA5600T/MA5603T)

MA5600T/MA5603T.
NOTE
l This manual describes the supply of boards supported by the product. However, the availability of
the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact product mangers at
Huawei representative offices.
l The MA5600T supports two service subracks: ETSI and IEC. The ETSI service subrack has two
more slots for service boards than the IEC service subrack, but they two support the same types of
boards.
l In the table, "Yes" indicates "supported" and "No" indicates "not supported".

Access Module
Table 3-5 Boards supported by the MA5600T/MA5603T

Board Board Mapping
Name
H801SCUB/ H801SCU H801SCU H801SCUN/ H801SCU H801SCU
H802SCUB F L H802SCUN/ H V
H801SCUK
Upstream interface board
H801GICD Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
H801GICE Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
H801GICF No No Yes Yes Yes No
H801GICG No No Yes Yes Yes No
H801GICK No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H802GICK No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801GSCA Yes Yes No No l MA5600 No

T: Yes
l MA5603
T: No
H801X1CA No Yes Yes Yes Yes No
H801X2CA No No Yes Yes Yes No
H801X2CS No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H802X2CS No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801X2CK No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H802P2CA Yes No No l MA5600T: No No No

l MA5603T:
– OLT mode:
No
– MSAN
mode(copper
-fiber hybrid
access): No
– MSAN
mode(copper
access): Yes
Universal interface board
H801BIUA l MA5600T l MA560 l MA560 l MA5600T: Yes No No

: Yes 0T: Yes 0T: Yes l MA5603T: No
l MA5603T l MA560 l MA560
: No 3T: No 3T: No

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H801CITA l MA5600T No l MA560 l MA5600T: Yes l MA5600 No

: Yes 0T: Yes l MA5603T: No T: Yes
l MA5603T l MA560 l MA5603
: No 3T: No T: No
H801CITD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power interface board
H801PRTA l MA5600T No l MA560 l MA5600T: Yes l MA5600 No

: Yes 0T: Yes l MA5603T: No T: Yes
l MA5603T l MA560 l MA5603
: No 3T: No T: No
H801PRTE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801PRTG Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SPU board
H801SPUA No No Yes Yes Yes No
H801SPUB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801SPUC No No No Yes Yes Yes
H801SPUF No No No Yes Yes Yes
H801ETHA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
H801ETHB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801TOPA No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801TOPB No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801CSPA No No Yes Yes Yes No
H801GPBC Yes (only No Yes Yes Yes No

supported
before the
version
V800R016C1
0)
H802GPBD No No Yes Yes Yes No

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H805GPBD No No Yes Yes Yes No
H802GPFD No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H805GPFD No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H806GPBH No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H807GPBH No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H801GPMD No No No No No Yes
H802XGBC No No No Yes Yes No
H801XGBD No No No Yes Yes No
P2P interface board
H801OPFA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
H802OPGD No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
H802OPGE No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
ATM interface board
H801AIUG Yes No No Yes No No
Combo Board
H80BCAME Yes No No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H806CAME Yes No No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BCVME Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H806CCPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DCCPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DCSPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
Voice board
H801ASRB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H801ASPB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H808ASPB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H809ASPB Yes No No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BASPB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H80CASPB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802DSRD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802DSRE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802EDTB Yes No No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80AATRB Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H808ADIF Yes Yes No Yes No No
H808ADLE Yes Yes No Yes No No
H805ADLF l MA5600T No No l MA5600T: Yes No No

: Yes l MA5603T: No
l MA5603T
: No
H808ADLF Yes Yes No Yes No No
H802ADPD Yes Yes No Yes No No
H805ADPD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H807ADPD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802ADQD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802ADKM Yes No No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BADPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H807ADPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H808ADPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H807ADPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H805VDSA Yes Yes No Yes No No
H805VDSF Yes Yes No Yes No No
H805VDTF Yes Yes No Yes No No

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H805VDRD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H805VDMF Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BVDMF Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802VDNF Yes Yes No Yes No No
H802VDJM Yes No No Yes No No
H80AVDPD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BVDPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BVDPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80BVDQM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H80BVCMM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80AVCPD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DVCPD Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80AVCPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DVCPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H806VCPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DVCPE Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H80DSDMM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H80DSDPM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H806VPEA l MA5600T No No l MA5600T: No l MA5600 No

: No l MA5603T: Yes T: No
l MA5603T l MA5603
: Yes T: Yes
H806VPEF l MA5600T No No l MA5600T: No l MA5600 No

: No l MA5603T: Yes T: No
l MA5603T l MA5603
: Yes T: Yes
H806VPGA l MA5600T No No l MA5600T: Yes l MA5600 No

: Yes l MA5603T: No T: Yes
l MA5603T l MA5603
: No T: No
H803SHDA l MA5600T No No l MA5600T: Yes No No

: Yes l MA5603T: No
l MA5603T
: No
H802SHLB Yes Yes No Yes No No
H80ASHLM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
H802SHGM Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

(V800R016
C00 and
later
versions)
ADSL SPL board
H801SPLF l ADSL SPL boards are installed in the MA5600T ETSI service subrack or MA5603T
chassis, generally in slots adjacent to corresponding ADSL2+ service access boards. In the
H801SPLH

Access Module
Board Board Mapping

Name
H801SCUK
H801SPLL MA5600T ETSI service subrack, slots available for ADSL SPL boards are slots 1-8 and
11-18. In the MA5603T chassis, slots available for ADSL SPL boards are slots 0-5. ADSL
H801SPPLA SPL boards and corresponding ADSL2+ service access boards are connected using intra-
H801SPPLB subrack interconnection cables.
l When in the ETSI SPL subrack, ADSL SPL boards are generally installed in slots directly
H801SPPLC under corresponding ADSL service boards. In the ETSI SPL subrack, slots available for
ADSL SPL boards are slots 1-8 and 11-18. ADSL SPL boards and corresponding ADSL2+
H801SPPHA
service access boards are connected using inter-subrack interconnection cables.
H801SPPF1 NOTE
For details about mapping between ADSL SPL boards and ADSL2+ service access boards, see 3.25.1
H801SPPF Differences Between ADSL SPL Boards.
VDSL SPL board
H801VSTH l VDSL SPL boards are installed in the MA5600T ETSI service subrack or MA5603T
chassis, generally in slots adjacent to corresponding VDSL2 service access boards. In the
H801VSTL MA5600T ETSI service subrack, slots available for VDSL SPL boards are slots 1-8 and
H801VSNF 11-18. In the MA5603T chassis, slots available for VDSL SPL boards are slots 0-5. VDSL
SPL boards and corresponding VDSL2 service access boards are connected using intra-
H801VSNLA subrack interconnection cables.
l When in the ETSI SPL subrack, VDSL SPL boards are generally installed in slots directly
H801VSPHA
under corresponding VDSL service boards. In the ETSI SPL subrack, slots available for
H801VSPLA VDSL SPL boards are slots 1-8 and 11-18. VDSL SPL boards and corresponding VDSL2
H801VSPLC NOTE
For details about mapping between VDSL SPL boards and VDSL2 service access boards, see 3.26.1
Differences Between VDSL SPL Boards.
SHDSL Extension board
H801SHET l SHDSL extension boards are installed in the MA5600T ETSI service subrack or MA5603T
chassis, generally in slots adjacent to SHDSL service access boards. In the MA5600T ETSI
service subrack, slots available for SHDSL extension boards are slots 1-8 and 11-18. In the
MA5603T chassis, slots available for SHDSL extension boards are slots 0-5. SHDSL
extension boards and SHDSL service access boards are connected using intra-subrack
interconnection cables.
l When in the ETSI SPL subrack, SHDSL extension boards are generally installed in slots
directly under SHDSL service access boards. In the ETSI SPL subrack, slots available for
SHDSL extension boards are slots 1-8 and 11-18. SHDSL extension boards and SHDSL
3.5 Board Configuration(MA5608T)

MA5608T.

Access Module
NOTE
l This manual describes the supply of boards supported by the product. However, the availability of
the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact product mangers at
Huawei representative offices.
l In the table, "Yes" indicates "supported" and "No" indicates "not supported".
Table 3-6 Boards supported by the MA5608T

Board Name Board Mapping
H801MCUD H801MCUD1 H801MCUE
Control board
H801MCUD - - -
H801MCUD1 - - -
H801MCUE - - -
Power interface board
H801MPWC Yes Yes Yes
H801MPWD Yes Yes Yes
H801MPWE Yes Yes Yes
H808ADPM Yes Yes No
H807ADPM Yes Yes No
H805ADPD Yes Yes No
H807ADPD Yes Yes No
H80BADPE Yes Yes No
H807ADPE Yes Yes No
Combo board
H80BCAME Yes Yes No
H806CAME Yes Yes No
H80BCVME Yes Yes No
H806CCPE Yes Yes No
H80DCCPE Yes Yes No
H80DCSPE Yes Yes No
Voice board
H802DSRD Yes Yes No

Access Module
H802DSRE Yes Yes No
H808ASPB Yes Yes No
H809ASPB Yes Yes No
H80BASPB Yes Yes No
H80CASPB Yes Yes No
H802EDTB Yes Yes No
H80AATRB Yes Yes No
H80AVDPD Yes Yes No
H80BVDQM Yes Yes No
H80BVDPM Yes Yes No
H80BVDPE Yes Yes No
H805VDRD Yes Yes No

(V800R012C00,
V800R013C10 and
later versions)
H806VCPE Yes Yes No
H80DVCPE Yes Yes No
H80AVCPD Yes Yes No
H80DVCPD Yes Yes No
H80AVCPM Yes Yes No
H80DVCPM Yes Yes No
H80DSDMM Yes Yes No
H80BVDMF Yes Yes No
H80DSDPM Yes Yes No
H80ASHLM Yes Yes No
H802SHGM Yes Yes No
GPON service access board

Access Module
H802GPBD Yes Yes No

(V800R013C10 and
later versions)
H805GPBD Yes Yes No
H802GPFD Yes Yes Yes
H805GPFD Yes Yes Yes
H806GPBH Yes Yes Yes
H807GPBH Yes Yes Yes
H801GPMD No No Yes
10G GPON service access board
H802XGBC Yes Yes No
H801XGBD Yes Yes Yes
H801ETHB Yes Yes Yes
SPU board
H801SPUB Yes Yes Yes
H801SPUF Yes Yes Yes
H801TOPA Yes Yes Yes
P2P interface board
H802OPGD Yes Yes Yes
H802OPGE Yes Yes Yes
3.6 Control Board (SCU)

controls the device and also implements simple routing protocol functions.
3.6.1 SCU Boards Comparison

All SCU boards support the functions as below:
l System control and management unit

Access Module
l Active/standby switchover
l Local and remote maintenance through maintenance serial port CON or maintenance
Ethernet port ETH
l Environmental monitoring through environment monitoring serial port ESC
In the table, "Yes" indicates "supported" and "No" indicates "not supported".
Table 3-7 Major differences between SCU boards

Boa Access Daugh Load Ether Temperat Built Centric D-
rd Service ter shari net ure -in Managem CC
Board ng synch querying 2GB ent for GE AP
roniza and high CF Remote
tion temperat card Extended
ure Subracks
alarming
H80 Copper H801F No No Yes No No No

1SC LBA
UB/ H801C
H80 KMC
2SC
UB H801C
KMD
H80 Optical H801F No No Yes No No No

1SC and LBA
UF copper H801C
KMC
H801C
KMD
H80 Optical H801C No No Yes No No No

1SC KMC
UL H801C
KMD
H80 Optical H801F Yes No Yes No Yes No

1SC and LBA (suppo
UN copper H801C rted in
KMC V800
R011C
H801C 00 and
KMD later
H801M versio
2XA ns)

Access Module
Boa Access Daugh Load Ether Temperat Built Centric D-

rd Service ter shari net ure -in Managem CC
Board ng synch querying 2GB ent for GE AP
roniza and high CF Remote
tion temperat card Extended
ure Subracks
alarming

2SC and LBA (suppo
UN copper H801C rted in
KMC V800
R011C
H801C 00 and
KMD later
H801M versio
2XA ns)
(versio
n B)

1SC and LBA (suppo
UK copper H801C rted in
KMC V800
R011C
H801C 00 and
KMD later
H801M versio
2XA ns)
(versio
n B)
H80 Optical No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

1SC and
UH copper
H80 Optical No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

1SC
UV
NOTE
H801SCUN and H802SCUN are slot compatible.

Access Module
Table 3-8 Ports of SCU boards

Board Panel Internal interfaces
ports
Channel Channel to the GIU Channel to the Note
to the board standby
service control board
board
H801S 4 GE 16 GE l Providing four GE - -

CUB/ ports channels ports for upstream
H802S transmission using
CUB the control board or
upstream board,
which is controlled
by the electronic
switch.
l Providing four GE
ports for upstream
transmission using
the upstream board.
Either the last GE
port or VoIP daughter
board can be used for
upstream
transmission, which
is controlled by the
electronic switch.
H801S 4 GE 16 GE Provides four GE - Reserves

CUF ports channels channels and one 10GE two
channel for each 10GE
upstream slot channels
(not
available
currently
) for the
MPLS
daughter
board.

Access Module

ports
board
H801S None 16 GE/ l Providing two GE/ - -

CUL 10GE 10GE ports for
channels upstream
transmission using
the upstream board.
l Providing two GE/
10GE ports for
upstream
transmission using
the upstream board.
Either the last GE/
10GE port or
daughter board can
be used for upstream
transmission, which
is controlled by the
electronic switch.
H801S 4 GE 16 GE/ Providing two GE/10GE Providing two -

CUN ports 10GE channels for each 10GE channels
channels upstream boards for load sharing
with the standby
H801SCUN
board (supported
in
V800R011C00
and later
versions)

CUN ports 10GE channels for each 10GE channels
with the standby
H802SCUN
board (supported
in
V800R011C00
and later
versions)

Access Module

ports
board

CUK ports 10GE channels for each 10GE channels
with the standby
H801SCUK
board (supported
in
V800R011C00
and later
versions)
H801S 4 GE/ 16 10GE/ Providing two 10GE Providing two -

CUH 10GE 20GE channels for each 20GE channels
ports, channels upstream boards for load sharing
Support with the standby
ing H801SCUH
automat board
ic
switchi
ng for
remote
softwar
e
commis
sioning
using
GE
upstrea
m
transmi
ssion.

Access Module

ports
board
H801S 4 GE/ 16 10GE/ Providing two 10GE Providing two -

CUV 10GE 20GE channels for each 20GE channels
ports, channels upstream boards for load sharing
Support with the standby
ing H801SCUV
automat board
ic
switchi
ng for
remote
softwar
e
commis
sioning
using
GE
upstrea
m
transmi
ssion.
3.6.2 H801SCUB Board Description

The H801SCUB board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. It can also function as the management and control core of
the network management system (NMS). The H801SCUB board communicates with service
boards about the key management and control information through the master/slave serial port
and inband GE channel. In this way, the H801SCUB configures, manages, and controls the
device. The H801SCUB also implements the simple route protocol function.
Feature and Specifications

Please refer to "SCU boards Comparison".
Parameters
Please refer to "Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of Boards".

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-5 Working principle of the H801SCUB board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUB board is as follows:

l The control module manages the H801SCUB board and service boards, and
communicates with the fan tray through the extended serial port.
l The power module supplies power to other functional modules of the board.
l The clock module provides clock signals for other functional modules of the board.
l The switching module provides the GE port to switch and aggregate services at Layer 2
or Layer 3.
– Providing 16 GE ports to implement GE switching on each service board
– Providing four GE ports for upstream transmission using the control board or
upstream board (in the first of the two slots for the upstream board), which is
controlled by the electronic switch.
– Providing four GE ports for upstream transmission using the upstream board (in the
second of the two slots for the upstream board). Either the last GE port or VoIP

Access Module
daughter board can be used for upstream transmission, which is controlled by the
electronic switch.
Front Panel Port
This button is used to reset the

board manually. Resetting the
board interrupts the services.
Hence, exercise caution when
using the reset button.
Connect to the serial

RS-232 serial port port of the maintenance
terminal
10/100/1000M Base-T Connect to the Ethernet

maintenance network port port of the maintenance
terminal
RS-485 monitoring Connect to the serial
serial port port of the monitored
device
Connected to the GE
Upstream transmission
port of the upper-layer
or cascading ports
device or the cascaded
(GE)
device
For details about supported optical module or electrical module, see 4.3 GE Optical/
Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
Indicato Name Color Status Meaning
r
RUN Running Green Blinking The board functions

ALM status properly
indicator
Red Blinking The board is starting up
Orange Blinking A high-temperature alarm

(supported in is generated
V800R009C00 and
later versions)
Red On The board is faulty
ACT Active Green On In active/standby mode,

indicator the board is active
- Off In active/standby mode,

the board is standby
LINK Link status Green On A connection is set up on

indicator the port
- Off No connection is set up

on the port
ACT Data status Yellow Blinking Data is being transmitted

indicator
- Off No data is being
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801SCUB board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-6 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H801SCUB board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H801SCUB board, see
3.6.11 Daughter Board.

Access Module
Figure 3-6 Position of the daughter board on the H801SCUB board
3.6.3 H802SCUB Board Description

The H802SCUB board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. It can also function as the management and control core of
the network management system (NMS). The H802SCUB board communicates with service
boards about the key management and control information through the master/slave serial port
and inband GE channel. In this way, the H802SCUB configures, manages, and controls the
device. The H802SCUB also implements the simple route protocol function.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-7 Working principle of the H802SCUB board
Backplane
H802SCUB
Uplink
board
(slot 1)
3*GE
Upper-layer
Uplink
cascading
TX0/RX0
device or
Electronic Electronic
device
board GE 4*GE
(slot 2)
Switch Switch
Switching module
Module Module
Backplane Connector
TX3/RX3
Maintenance
Maintenance
terminal
Daughter serial port
board Maintenance
Control network port
16*GE module
Service Monitoring
board serial port
Environment
monitor
-48V DC Power Clock
power module module
Voltage required Clock required

by the board by the board
Service Control Monitoring Power Clock

signal signal signal signal signal
The basic working principle of the H802SCUB board is as follows:

l The control module manages the H802SCUB board and service boards, and
l The switching module provides the GE port to switch and aggregate services at Layer 2
or Layer 3.
– Providing four GE ports for upstream transmission using the control board or
upstream board (in the first of the two slots for the upstream board), which is
controlled by the electronic switch.
– Providing four GE ports for upstream transmission using the upstream board (in the
second of the two slots for the upstream board). Either the last GE port or VoIP

Access Module
daughter board can be used for upstream transmission, which is controlled by the
electronic switch.
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connected to the GE
or cascading ports
(GE)
device

Access Module
Electrical Module.
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)



indicator the port

on the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H802SCUB board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-8 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H802SCUB board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H802SCUB board, see

Access Module
Figure 3-8 Position of the daughter board on the H802SCUB board
3.6.4 H801SCUF Board Description

The H801SCUF is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control, service
switching, and aggregation. The H801SCUF can also function as the management and control
core of the integrated network management system (NMS). The H801SCUF communicates
with service boards about the key management and control information through the master/
slave serial port and inband GE/10GE channel. In this manner, the H801SCUF configures,
manages, and controls the device, and also implements the simple route protocol function.
NOTE
The H801SCUF board has the following changes after an upgrade from Ver.A to Ver.B:
l H801SCUF Ver.B reads the power board information directly through the backplane.
l H801SCUF Ver.A needs to work with the universal interface board in slot 0 to obtain the power
board information.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-9 Working principle of the H801SCUF board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUF board is as follows:

l The control module manages the entire board and the service boards, and communicates
with the fan tray through the extended serial port.
l The switching module provides the GE port and the 10GE port to switch and aggregate
services at Layer 2 or Layer 3.
– The switching module provides four GE channels and one 10GE channel for each
upstream slot, generally corresponding to an upstream board with four GE ports
(GICD, GICE, or GSCA) or an upstream board with a 10GE port besides the
following situations:

Access Module
n The H801SCUF control board supports the GICK board (an upstream board
with two GE ports), but only the first GE port on the GICK board is available.
In addition, the GICK board must be a version released later than April 2010.
n The H801SCUF control board does not support the X2CA board.
– Either the four GE ports in the first upstream slot or the GE ports on the H801SCUF
control board can be selected through the electronic switch for upstream
transmission.
n On the MA5600T, when the GICD/GICE/GSCA/GICK board is configured in
slot 19, the GE ports on these boards cannot be used together with GE Front
Panel Port of the H801SCUF control board. For the 10GE upstream board
such as X1CA, there is no such restriction. That is, the 10GE ports on these
boards can be used together with the GE Front Panel Port of the H801SCUF
control board.
n On the MA5603T, when the GICD/GICE/GSCA/GICK board is configured in
slot 8, the GE ports on these boards cannot be used together with the GE Front
Panel Port of the SCUF control board. For the 10GE upstream board such as
X1CA, there is no such restriction. That is, the 10GE ports on these boards can
be used together with the GE Front Panel Port of the SCUF control board.
– Either the last of the four GE ports in the second upstream slot or the daughter
board attached to the SCUF control board can be selected through the electronic
switch.
n On the MA5600T, when the GICD/GICE/GSCA board is configured in slot
20, the fourth GE port on these boards cannot be used together with the
daughter board attached to the SCUF control board. When the GICK board is
configured in slot 20, only the first GE port on the GICK board is available.
For the 10GE upstream board such as X1CA there is no such restriction. That
is, the 10GE ports on these boards can be used together with the daughter
board attached to the SCUF control board.
n On the MA5603T, when the GICD/GICE/GSCA board is configured in slot 9,
the fourth GE port on these boards cannot be used together with the daughter
board attached to the SCUF control board. When the GICK board is
configured in slot 20, only the first GE port on the GICK board is available.
For the 10GE upstream board such as X1CA, there is no such restriction. That
is, the 10GE ports on these boards can be used together with the daughter
board attached to the SCUF control board.
– Reserves two 10GE channels (not available currently) for the MPLS daughter
board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connected to the GE
or cascading ports
(GE)
device
Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)



indicator the port

on the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801SCUF board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-10 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H801SCUF board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H801SCUF board, see

Access Module
Figure 3-10 Position of the daughter board on the H801SCUF board
3.6.5 H801SCUH Board Description

The H801SCUH board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801SCUH board can also function as the
management and control core of the integrated network management system (NMS). It
communicates with service boards about the key management and control information
through the master/slave serial port and inband 10GE/20GE channel. In this manner, the
H801SCUH board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the
simple route protocol functions.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-11 Working principle of the H801SCUH board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUH board is as follows:

with the fan tray through the extended serial port. In addition, the control module can be
configured with a built-in CF card to expand its storage space.
l The logic module implements the logic control and stratum-3 clock functions.
l The switching module provides the 10GE port and the 20GE port to switch and
aggregate services at Layer 2 or Layer 3.
– Providing four 10GE ports for upstream transmission using ports on the front panel
– Providing two 10GE ports for each upstream boards in upstream transmission
– Providing 16 10GE/20GE ports for implementing 10GE/20GE switching on each
service board
– Providing two 20GE ports for load sharing with the standby control board

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connect to the 10GE

or GE port of the
or cascading ports
upper-layer device or
(10GE/GE)
the cascaded device
For details about supported optical module, see 4.4 10GE Optical Module and 4.3 GE
Optical/Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

is generated
ACT Active Green On In active/standby mode or

indicator load-sharing mode, the
board is active

Green Blinking In load-sharing mode, the

board is standby

indicator the port
- Off No connection is set up on

the port

indicator
transmitted
3.6.6 H801SCUK Board Description

The H801SCUK board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801SCUK board can also function as the
through the master/slave serial port and inband GE/10GE channel. In this manner, the
H801SCUK board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-12 Working principle of the H801SCUK board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUK board is as follows:

– Providing four GE ports for upstream transmission using ports on the front panel
– Providing two GE/10GE ports for each upstream boards in upstream transmission
– Providing 16 GE/10GE ports for implementing GE/10GE switching on each service
board
– Providing two 10GE ports for load sharing with the standby control
board(supported in V800R011C00 and later versions)

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Upstream transmission Connected to the GE

or cascading ports port of the upper-layer
(GE) device or the cascaded
device
For details about supported optical module, see 4.3 GE Optical/Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)
Red/Green Blinking between red The data recovery

and green completes
(supported in NOTE
V800R012C00 and It is used for the scenario in
which this board replaces the
later versions)
H801SCUL control board
and then both of them are
installed in the same
subrack.



board is standby

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801SCUK board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-13 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H801SCUK board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H801SCUK board, see

Access Module
Figure 3-13 Position of the daughter board on the H801SCUK board
3.6.7 H801SCUL Board Description

The H801SCUL board is a super control unit board. It mainly controls the system and
processes broadband services. The H801SCUL board communicates with the service boards
through the GE channel or the 10GE channel to configure, manage, and control the device. It
also implements the simple route protocol functions. The H801SCUL board processes the
alarms through the inband NMS. Based on the upper-layer protocol between the H801SCUL
board and the service boards, the software of the H801SCUL separates the management
information such as alarms from the information reported by the service boards. Then, the
H801SCUL board identifies and processes the information.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-14 Working principle of the H801SCUL board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUL board is as follows:

l The control module manages the H801SCUL board and service boards, and
l The switching module provides the GE/10GE port to switch and aggregate services at
Layer 2 or Layer 3.
– Providing 16 GE/10GE ports to implement GE/10GE switching on each service
board
– Providing two GE/10GE ports for upstream transmission using the upstream board.
– Providing two GE/10GE ports for upstream transmission using the upstream board
(in the second of the two slots for the upstream board). Either the last GE/10GE
port or daughter board can be used for upstream transmission, which is controlled
by the electronic switch.

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)


Daughter Board
The H801SCUL board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-15 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H801SCUL board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H801SCUL board, see
3.6.11 Daughter Board..

Access Module
Figure 3-15 Position of the daughter board on the H801SCUL board
3.6.8 H801SCUN Board Description

The H801SCUN board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801SCUN board can also function as the
H801SCUN board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-16 Working principle of the H801SCUN board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUN board is as follows:

board

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connected to the GE
or cascading ports
(GE)
device
Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)

and green completes
(supported in NOTE
later versions)
subrack.



board is standby

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801SCUN board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-17 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H801SCUN board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H801SCUN board, see
3.6.11 Daughter Board..

Access Module
Figure 3-17 Position of the daughter board on the H801SCUN board
3.6.9 H802SCUN Board Description

The H802SCUN board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H802SCUN board can also function as the
H802SCUN board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-18 Working principle of the H802SCUN board
The basic working principle of the H802SCUN board is as follows:

board

Access Module
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connected to the GE
or cascading ports
(GE)
device

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

V800R009C00 and
later versions)

and green completes
(supported in NOTE
later versions)
subrack.



board is standby

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H802SCUN board can be configured with a matching daughter board. Figure 3-19 shows
the position of the daughter board on the H802SCUN board.
For details about the daughter board and functions supports by the H802SCUN board, see

Access Module
Figure 3-19 Position of the daughter board on the H802SCUN board
3.6.10 H801SCUV Board Description

The H801SCUV board is a super control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801SCUV board can also function as the
through the master/slave serial port and inband 10GE/20GE channel. In this manner, the
H801SCUV board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-20 Working principle of the H801SCUV board
The basic working principle of the H801SCUV board is as follows:

with the fan tray through the extended serial port. In addition, the control module can be
configured with a built-in CF card to expand its storage space.
l The logic module implements the logic control and stratum-3 clock functions.
l The switching module provides the 10GE port and the 20GE port to switch and
aggregate services at Layer 2 or Layer 3.
– Providing four 10GE ports for upstream transmission using ports on the front panel
– Providing two 10GE ports for each upstream boards in upstream transmission
– Providing 16 10GE/20GE ports for implementing 10GE/20GE switching on each
service board

Access Module
– Providing two 20GE ports for load sharing with the standby control board
Front Panel Port


terminal

terminal
device
Connect to the 10GE

or GE port of the
or cascading ports
upper-layer device or
(10GE/GE)
the cascaded device

Access Module
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

is generated

board is active


board is standby

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted

Access Module
3.6.11 Daughter Board

Table 3-9 Daughter board list
Daughter Corresponding Function
Board SCU Board
H801CK H801SCUB l Implements the VoIP logic forwarding function,

MC H802SCUB which is not supported by H801SCUL.
H801SCUF l Implements clock processing and provides the
stratum-3 clock for the system.
H801SCUN
l Implements the 1588v2 clock processing function,
H802SCUN which is not supported by H801SCUL, H801SCUB,
H801SCUL H802SCUB and H801SCUF.
H801SCUK l Supports BFD.
H801CK H801SCUB l Implements the VoIP logic forwarding function,

MD H802SCUB which is not supported by H801SCUL.
H801SCUF l Implements clock processing and provides the
stratum-3 clock for the system.
H801SCUN
l Implements the 1588v2 clock processing function,
H802SCUN which is not supported by H801SCUL, H801SCUB,
H801SCUL H802SCUB and H801SCUF.
H801SCUK l Implements the 1588ACR clock processing function,
which is not supported by H801SCUL and
H801SCUF.
l Supports BFD.
H801FLB H801SCUB l Supports the VoIP logic forwarding function.

A H802SCUB l Supports BFD.
H801SCUF
H801SCUN
H802SCUN
H801SCUK
H801M2X H801SCUN l Implements the VoIP logic forwarding function.

A H802SCUN l Implements the MAC address extension function.
H801SCUK l Implements clock processing and provides the
NOTE stratum-3 clock for the system.
H802SCUN and l Supports BFD.
H801SCUK work
together with only
H801M2XA
version B.

Access Module

controls the device and also implements simple routing protocol functions. The MCU control
board is used on the MA5608T.
3.7.1 MCU Boards Comparison

All MCU boards support the functions as below:
l System control and management unit
l Active/standby switchover and load sharing
l Local and remote maintenance through maintenance serial port CON or maintenance
Ethernet port ETH
l Environmental monitoring
l Synchronization with the Ethernet clock
l Temperature querying and high temperature alarming
l Monitoring and management of the fan tray
l Seven alarm digital inputs (DIs) and one alarm digital output (DO)
l Copper and optical access
Table 3-10 Major differences between MCU boards

Board One input of One input of Stratum-3 D-CCAP
BITS clock 1PPS+TOD clock
signals and time signals
one output of and one
BITS clock output of
signals 1PPS+TOD
time signals
H801MCUD No No No No
H801MCUD1 Yes Yes Yes No
H801MCUE No No No Yes

Access Module
Table 3-11 Ports of MCU boards

Board Panel ports Internal interfaces
Channel to the GIU Channel to the standby

board control board
H801M 4 GE ports 2 GE/10GE ports Providing one 10GE port for

CUD load sharing with the
standby H801MCUD board
H801M 2 GE ports and 2 2 GE/10GE ports Providing one 10GE port for
CUD1 GE/10 GE ports load sharing with the
standby H801MCUD1 board
H801M 4 GE ports 2 GE/10GE ports Providing one 10GE port for

CUE load sharing with the
standby H801MCUE board
3.7.2 H801MCUD Board Description

The H801MCUD board is a mini control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801MCUD board can also function as the
H801MCUD board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Please refer to "MCU boards Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-21 Working principle of the H801MCUD board
The basic working principle of the H801MCUD board is as follows:
l The control module manages the entire board and the service boards.
l The logic module implements logic control.
– Providing four GE ports for transmitting traffic upstream
board
– Providing one 10GE port for load sharing with the standby control board

Access Module
Front Panel Port

10/100/1000M Base-T
maintenance network port
Connected to the Ethernet
port of the maintenance
terminal
GE upstream transmission
or cascading ports
Connected to the GE port
of the upper-layer device
or the cascaded device
Maintenance serial port

Connected to the serial port
of the maintenance terminal
Environment
RS-485 monitoring serial port monitoring port
Connected to the serial port Connected to
of the monitored device digital sensors
Not used
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

is generated

board is active

Access Module

r

board is standby

GE0- Link and Green On A link is set up on the port

GE3 Data status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
on the port
- Off No link is set up on the

port, or no data is being
transmitted on the port
Meaning of Port Signals
Table 3-12 Meaning of ALARM IN Port Signals

Port Pin Signal Meaning
1 ALM_RTN Alarm digital parameter RTN

8
7
6 2 ALM_IN0 Signal of channel 0 alarm digital
5 parameter
4
3
2 3 ALM_RTN Alarm digital parameter RTN
1
4 ALM_IN1 Signal of channel 1 alarm digital
parameter

parameter

parameter

Access Module
Table 3-13 Meaning of ALARM IN/OUT Port Signals


8
7
5 parameter
4
3
1
parameter

parameter
8 ALM_OU Alarm DO
T
3.7.3 H801MCUD1 Board Description

The H801MCUD1 board is a mini control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801MCUD1 board can also function as the
H801MCUD1 board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-22 Working principle of the H801MCUD1 board
The basic working principles of the H801MCUD1 board are as follows:
l The logical module achieves the logical control and stratum-3 clock functions.
– Providing two GE/10GE ports or two GE ports for upstream transmission of the
upstream port on the front panel
– Providing two GE/10GE ports for implementing GE/10GE switching on each
service board

Access Module
Front Panel Port

10/100/1000M Base-T
terminal
GE upstream transmission 10GE or GEupstream

or cascading ports transmission or
Connected to the GE port cascading ports
of the upper-layer device Connected to 10GE Or
or the cascaded device GE port of the upper-
layer device or the
cascaded device
Environment
RS-485 monitoring serial port
monitoring port
Connected to the
of the monitored device
digital sensors
BITS/TOD port
connected to the clock device
using the clock transfer cable
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

is generated

Access Module

r

and green completes
NOTE
It is used for the scenario in
H801MCUD control board
subrack.

board is active

board is standby

GE0, Link and Green On A link is set up on the port

GE1, Data status
10GE0/ indicator Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
GE2, on the port
10GE1/G - Off No link is set up on the
E3 port, or no data is being
Pin Assignment
Table 3-14 Pin assignment of the ALARM IN port

Port Pin Signal Remarks

8
7
6 2 ALM_IN0 Channel 0 alarm digital parameter
5 signals
4
3
1
4 ALM_IN1 Channel 1 alarm digital parameter
signals

signals

Access Module

signals
Table 3-15 Pin assignment of the ALARM IN/OUT port


8
7
6 2 ALM_IN4 Channel 4 alarm digital parameter
5 signals
4
3
1
signals

signals
8 ALM_OU Alarm signal control output

T
Table 3-16 Pin assignment of the BITS/TOD

1 BITS_IN_ Input B of channel BITS clock

8
7 B signals
6
5 2 BITS_IN_ Input A of channel BITS clock
4
3 A signals
2
1 3 PPS_IN/ Input or output negative polarity
OUT- of PPS time signals
4 BITS_OU Output B of the BITS clock

T_B signals
5 BITS_OU Output A of the BITS clock

T_A signals
6 PPS_IN/O Input or output positive polarity

UT+ of PPS time signals
7 TOD_IN/ Input or output negative polarity

OUT- of TOD time signals

Access Module
8 TOD_IN/O Input or output positive polarity

UT+ of TOD time signals
NOTE
Input and output of PPS and TOD time signals use the same pin. These signals can only be input or
output at a time.
3.7.4 H801MCUE Board Description

The H801MCUE board is a mini control unit board. It is the core of the system control and
service switching and aggregation. The H801MCUE board can also function as the
H801MCUE board configures, manages, and controls the device, and also implements the

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-23 Working principle of the H801MCUE board
The basic working principle of the H801MCUE board is as follows:
l The logic module implements logic control.
– Providing four GE ports for transmitting traffic upstream
board
– Providing one 10GE port for load sharing with the standby control board

Access Module
Front Panel Port

10/100/1000M Base-T
terminal
GE upstream transmission
or cascading ports

Environment
RS-485 monitoring serial port monitoring port
Connected to the serial port Connected to the
of the monitored device digital sensors
Not used
Indicator
r

ALM status properly
indicator

is generated

board is active

Access Module

r

board is standby

GE0- Link and Green On A link is set up on the port

GE3 Data status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
on the port
- Off No link is set up on the

port, or no data is being
Meaning of Port Signals
Table 3-17 Meaning of ALARM IN Port Signals


8
7
5 parameter
4
3
1
parameter

parameter

parameter

Access Module
Table 3-18 Meaning of ALARM IN/OUT Port Signals

8
7
5 parameter
4
3
1
parameter

parameter
8 ALM_OU Alarm DO
T
3.8 Upstream Interface Board (GIU)

Upstream interface boards provide upstream or cascading ports for the system. GIU is short
for general interface unit.
NOTE
Regardless of which running mode is switched to, once changing the running mode, you need to reset the
system and replace the related GIU board.
3.8.1 Upstream Interface Boards Comparison

The device supports GE and 10GE upstream interface boards.
Table 3-19 Specifications lists of upstream interface boards
Board Upstr Casca Intra- Clock Port Pluggab Pluggabl

eam ding board Feature le e
Trans (*) aggregat Optical Electrica
missi ion and Module l
on (*) Inter- Module
board
aggregat
ion
H801GI Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR Four GE SFP SFP

CD (with ports
CKMD)

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H801GI Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR Four GE No No

CE (with electrical
CKMD) ports
H801GI Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR Two GE SFP SFP

CF (with ports
CKMD)
H801GI Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR Two GE No No

CG (with electrical
CKMD) ports

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H801GI Yes Yes Yes l GE Two GE SFP SFP

CK synchr ports
onous
Ethern
et
(V800
R013
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588v
2
(with
CKM
C or
CKM
D,
V800
R013
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D,
V800
R013
C10
and
later
versio
ns)

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H802GI Yes Yes Yes l GE Two GE SFP SFP

CK synchr ports
onous
Ethern
et
(V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588v
2
(with
CKM
C or
CKM
D,
V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D,
V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H801GS Yes Yes Yes l GE Four GE SFP No

CA synchr ports
onous
Ethern
et
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D)
H801X1 Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR One XFP No

CA (with 10GE
CKMD) port
H801X2 Yes Yes Yes 1588ACR Two XFP No

CA (with 10GE
CKMD) ports
H801X2 Yes Yes Yes l 10GE Two SFP+ No

CS synchr 10GE
onous ports
Ethern
et
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D)
H802X2 Yes Yes Yes l 10GE/ Two SFP/SFP SFP

CS GE 10GE/GE +
synchr ports
onous
Ethern
et
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D)

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H801X2 Yes Yes Yes l 10GE/ Two SFP/SFP SFP

CK GE 10GE/GE +
synchr ports
onous
Ethern
et
(V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588v
2
(with
CKM
C or
CKM
D,
V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)
l 1588A
CR
(with
CKM
D,
V800
R017
C10
and
later
versio
ns)

Access Module

board
aggregat
ion
H802P2 Yes No No No Two SFP No

CA GPON
port (only
TX0/RX0
available)
Note: You can run the network-role command in the GIU mode to switch the role of a port.
Default role is uplink.
3.8.2 H801GICD Board Description

The H801GICD board is a 4-port GE optical interface card, providing upstream or cascading
optical ports.

Please refer to "Upstream Interface Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-24 Working principle of the H801GICD board
The basic working principle of the H801GICD board is as follows:

l The control module is the control core of the entire board.
l The conversion module supports transparent transmission of the information.
l The clock module provides clock signals for each functional module of the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE upstream or Connected to the GE port

cascaded port of the upper-layer device
（SFP） or the cascaded device
Indicator
r
RUN Running Green Blinking slowly (on The board functions

status for 1 s and off for 1 s properly
indicator repeatedly)
Green Blinking quickly (on The board starts up and is

for 0.25 s and off for being loaded with software
0.25 s repeatedly)
- Off The board is faulty
ALM Alarm Red On The board is faulty or its

indicator CPLD software is being
updated
- Off The board functions

properly
LINK Link status Green On The link is normal

indicator
- Off The link is abnormal

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.3 H801GICE Board Description

The H801GICE board is a 4-port GE electrical interface card, providing upstream or
cascading electrical ports.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 3-25, the H801GICE board has the following changes after an upgrade from Ver.B
to Ver.C:
l The GE port indicators are changed.
Figure 3-25 Differences in appearance between Ver.B and Ver.C

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-26 Working principle of the H801GICE board
The basic working principle of the H801GICE board is as follows:


Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE Electrical Connected to the GE port

upstream or of the upper-layer device
cascaded port or the cascaded device
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly
3.8.4 H801GICF Board Description

The H801GICF board is a 2-port GE optical interface card, providing upstream or cascading
optical ports.

Access Module

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-27 Working principle of the H801GICF board
The basic working principle of the H801GICF board is as follows:
l The control module loads the board software, controls the running of the software, and
manages the entire board.

Access Module
l The conversion module supports transparent transmission of the data.

Front Panel Port
GE upstream or Connected to the GE port

cascaded port of the upper-layer device
（SFP） or the cascaded device
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

Access Module

r

indicator

indicator
transmitted
3.8.5 H801GICG Board Description

The H801GICG board is a 2-port GE electrical interface card, providing upstream or
cascading electrical ports.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-28 Working principle of the H801GICG board
The basic working principle of the H801GICG board is as follows:


Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE Electrical Connected to the GE port

upstream or of the upper-layer device
cascaded port or the cascaded device
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly
3.8.6 H801GICK Board Description

The H801GICK board is a 2-port GE optical interface card, providing two upstream or
cascading GE optical ports, and it supports the 1588V2 clock signal.

Access Module

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-29 Working principle of the H801GICK board
The basic working principle of the H801GICK board is as follows:

l The electronic switch module switches the service signals during the active/standby
switchover.

Access Module
l The Ethernet network physical layer module provides the GE port for extracting the
physical layer packets.
Front Panel Port

GE upstream or
cascaded port
（SFP）
NOTE
If ports on the H801GICK board is used with the electrical module, the restrictions are as follows:
l In forced mode, only 1000 Mbit/s and full-duplex are supported, and other rates and duplex modes
are not supported.
l In autonegotiation mode, only 1000 Mbit/s and full-duplex are supported, and other rates and
duplex modes are not supported.
Indicator
r


Access Module

r

0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

indicator
transmitted
3.8.7 H802GICK Board Description

The H802GICK board is a 2-port GE uplink interface card that provides two GE upstream or
cascading optical ports.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-30 Working principle of the H802GICK board
The basic working principle of the H802GICK board is as follows:
l The control module reports the status of and manufacturing information about the board,
and provides the interface information. The control module also manages the modules on
the board, and processes alarms.
l The interface module provides two GE ports.
l The synchronization Ethernet clock module extracts clock signals from the GE signals,
and synchronizes the 8 kHz clock of the control board with the clock signals.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.8 H801GSCA Board Description

The H801GSCA board is a GE synchronous ethernet interface card. It extracts the clock
signals of the line and transmits the synchronized clock signals.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-31 Working principle of the H801GSCA board
The basic working principle of the H801GSCA board is as follows:

l The link management module manages the GE links.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE upstream or Connected the GE port to

cascaded port the upper-layer device or
（SFP） the cascaded device
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.9 H801X1CA Board Description

The H801X1CA board is a 1-port 10GE XFP optical interface unit board that provides one
10GE upstream or cascading optical port.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-32 Working principle of the H801X1CA board
Backplane User side
H801X1CA
Upper-layer
cascading
10GE
device or
10GE
device
Control Switching
board module
Backplane Connector
Control
module
-48V
Power Clock
DC
module module
power

Service Control Power Clock

signal signal signal signal
The basic working principle of the H801X1CA board is as follows:

and provides the interface information. In addition, the control module also manages the
modules on the board, and processes alarms.
l The interface module provides the 10GE port.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
10GE upstream Connected the 10GE port

or cascaded port to the upper-layer device
（XFP） or the cascaded device
For details about supported optical module or electrical module, see 4.4 10GE Optical
Module.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.10 H801X2CA Board Description

The H801X2CA board is a 2-port 10GE XFP optical interface unit board that provides two
10GE upstream or cascading optical ports.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-33 Working principle of the H801X2CA board
Backplane User side
H801X2CA
Upper-layer
cascading
2*10GE
device or
2*10GE
device
Control Switching
board module
Backplane Connector
Control
module
-48V
Power Clock
DC
module module
power


The basic working principle of the H801X2CA board is as follows:

and provides the interface information. In addition, the control module also manages the
modules on the board, and processes alarms.
l The interface module provides two 10GE ports.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

（XFP） or the cascaded device
Module.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.11 H801X2CS Board Description

The H801X2CS board is a 2-port 10GE uplink interface card that provides two 10GE
upstream or cascading optical ports.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-34 Working principle of the H801X2CS board
Backplane User side
H801X2CS
2*10GE Upper-layer
Switching 2*10GE device or
Control
board module cascading
device
Backplane Connector
Control
module
Clock signal Synchronization

Ethernet clock
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H801X2CS board is as follows:
l The interface module provides two 10GE ports.
l The synchronization Ethernet clock module extracts clock signals from the 10GE
signals, and synchronizes the 8 kHz clock of the control board with the clock signals.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

（SFP+） or the cascaded device
Module.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.8.12 H802X2CS Board Description

The H802X2CS board is a 2-port 10GE/GE uplink interface card that provides two 10GE/GE

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-35 Working principle of the H802X2CS board
The basic working principle of the H802X2CS board is as follows:
l The interface module provides two 10GE/GE ports.
l The synchronization Ethernet clock module extracts clock signals from the 10GE/GE

Access Module
Front Panel Port
NOTE
Default transmission rate of the upstream port is 10000 Mbit/s (10GE), which can be set to 1000 Mbit/s
(GE) by running the speed command.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

Access Module

r

properly

indicator

indicator
transmitted
3.8.13 H801X2CK Board Description

The H801X2CK board is a 2-port 10GE/GE uplink interface card that provides two 10GE/GE

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-36 Working principle of the H801X2CK board
The basic working principle of the H801X2CK board is as follows:
l The interface module provides two 10GE/GE ports.
l The synchronization Ethernet clock module extracts clock signals from the 10GE/GE

Access Module
Front Panel Port
NOTE
Default transmission rate of the upstream port is 10000 Mbit/s (10GE), which can be set to 1000 Mbit/s
(GE) by running the speed command.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

Access Module

r

properly

indicator

indicator
transmitted
3.8.14 H802P2CA Board Description

The H802P2CA board is 2-port GPON optical interface board. It provides one SFP GPON
upstream port (TX0/RX0).

Board Specifications

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-37 Working principle of the H802P2CA board
Backplane User side
H802P2CA
Electronic
processing
Upper-layer
interface
Service
module
PON
PON
Control
device
board Switch
Module
Backplane Connector
Master/
slave
serial
Control port
Control module
board
-48V
Power Clock
DC
module module
power


The basic working principle of the H802P2CA board is as follows:

l The control module controls the board software loading and board running, and manages
the board.
l The electronic switch module implements switching of service signals during the active/
standby switchover.
l The PON interface module provides SFP GPON port.
l The service process module implements GPON upstream transmission and provides time
synchronization, and supports line clock as the system clock.
l The power module supplies power to each functional module of the board.
l The clock module provides the working clock for each functional module of the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
For details about supported optical module, see 4.2 PON Optical Module.
Indicator
r


0.25 s repeatedly)

updated

properly

indicator

Access Module

r

indicator
transmitted
3.9 Universal Interface Board (GPIO)

Universal interface boards (installed in the GPIO slot) receive the clock signals and ESC
parameters. GPIO is short for general purpose input/output.
3.9.1 GPIO Boards Comparison

Table 3-20 Major differences between universal interface boards
Board BITS Clock ESC
H801BIUA l Supports two inputs of 2 Mbit/s No

or 2 MHz BITS clock signals.
l Supports one output of 2 Mbit/s
or 2 MHz clock signals.
l Provides E1 clock ports.
H801CITA No Provides an ESC port for receiving

and reporting the ESC alarm
information to the control board.
H801CITD l Supports two inputs of 2 Mbit/s Provides seven inputs of alarm

or 2 MHz BITS clock signals. digital parameters and one output of
l Supports two inputs of 1 PPS alarm digital parameters.
+TOD time signals.
l Supports one output of 2 Mbit/s
or 2 MHz clock signals.
l Supports one output of 1 PPS
+TOD time signals.
l Provides RJ45 clock ports.
3.9.2 H801BIUA Board Description

The H801BIUA board is a BITS interface Unit board, providing BITS input and output
functions.

Access Module

The H801BIUA board supports the following functions:
l Two standard BITS clock inputs and one standard BITS clock output
l Input and output of 2 MHz and E1 signals
l Tracing the input clock source of the two channels of BITS clock or tracing the output
clock source of the control board
l Multiple working modes, such as tracing, holdover, and free-run
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-38 Working principle of the H801BIUA board

Access Module
The basic working principle of the H801BIUA board is as follows:
l The BITS clock processing module selects the mode and separates the two channels of
input BITS clock signals, restores the clock for 2 Mbit/s signals, shapes the 2 MHz
signals, and outputs one channel of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz clock signals.
l The stratum-3 clock daughter board module provides the stratum-3 system clock with the
accuracy of ±4.6 ppm.
Front Panel Port
Reserved
2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s
Connected to
BITS signals
the clock source
input port
2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s Connected to
BITS signals the lower clock
output port
Indicator
r
RUN Running Green Blinking slowly (on The board works in the
status for 1 s and off for 1 s normal state
Green Blinking quickly (on The board is starting up

for 0.25 s and off for
0.25 s repeatedly)

Access Module

r
- Off The board is faulty or

power off

updated

properly
IN0,IN1 Clock Green On Clock signals are input

input
status - Off No clock signal is input
indicator
Daughter Board
The H801BIUA board can be installed with one clock daughter board.
Figure 3-39 Position of the daughter board on the H801BIUA board
Daughter board

Access Module
Table 3-21 Daughter board supported by the H801BIUA board

Daughter Function Remarks
Board
CKMA Provides 32.768 MHz clock signals. This daughter board

Traces the external reference source (8K supports three working
signals), and outputs the synchronized modes: free-run, tracing,
32.768 MHz clock signals. and holdover.
3.9.3 H801CITA Board Description

H801CITA is a combo interface Transfer board that provides an ESC port.

The H801CITA board supports the following functions:
l Provides an ESC port for reporting various monitored information to the control board.
l Provides indicators for system alarms.
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-40 Working principle the H801CITA board
The H801CITA board consists of the control module, interface module, and power module.
The basic working principle of the H801CITA is as follows:
l The control module controls the collecting and reporting of signals.
l The interface module provides an ESC port.
l The power module supplies power to other function modules of the H801CITA board
and also provides +5 V DC to the backplane and power board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to the
Monitored
serial port of the
serial port
monitored device
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Indicator
r

ALM status for 1 s and off for 1 s properly

0.25 s repeatedly)
Red On The board is faulty or its

CPLD software is being
updated
MAJ Alarm Red On The system has a major

indicators alarm
MIN Alarm Red On The system has a minor

indicators alarm
Temp Temperatu Red On The system temperature

re alarm exceeds the preset
indicator threshold

Access Module

r
- Off The system temperature is

within the normal range
3.9.4 H801CITD Board Description

The H801CITD board is a combo interface transfer board. It provides the input and output
clock source for the system and supports functions such as input and output of alarm digital
parameters.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 3-41, the H801CITD board has the following changes after an upgrade from Ver.A
to Ver.B:
l Ports are adjusted by 180 degrees.
l An ejector lever is added, facilitating board insertion and removal.
Figure 3-41 Differences in appearance between Ver.A and Ver.B

The H801CITD board supports the following functions:
l Seven inputs of alarm digital parameters and one output of digital controlling parameters
l External monitoring Ethernet port to transparently transmit monitored data
l When configured with the BITSB clock daughter board, the CITD board also provides
the following functions:
– Two inputs of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz BITS clock signals
– Two inputs of 1 PPS+TOD time signals(supported in V800R013C10 and later
versions)
– One output of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz clock signals
– One output of 1PPS time signals (supported in V800R013C10 and later versions)
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-42 Working principle of the H801CITD board
The H801CITD board consists of the control module, interface module, power module, and
clock module. The basic working principle of the H801CITD board is as follows:
l The control module controls each functional module of the board and reads the vendor
information about the power board, service board, and BITS daughter board.
l The interface module provides the BITS clock port, time port, GE transparent
transmission port, and alarm port.
l The BITS clock daughter board recovers the 2 Mbit/s clock signals or shapes the 2 MHz
clock signals, which can function as the system clock source.
l The power module supplies power to each functional module of the board and +5 V DC
power to the backplane and the power board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to the
BITS/TOD port BITS clock source,
time source, or lower
stratum clock
Monitoring
Ethernet port
(unavailable Connected to the
for MA5600T) Ethernet port of
the peer device
Reserved Connected to the
DIgital alarm external digital
interface parameters
detecting port or
output controlling
port
Indicator
r
Green Blinking quickly (on The board is being

for 0.25 s and off for registered
0.25 s repeatedly)
Red On The board is faulty or its

CPLD software is being
updated
MAJ Alarm Red On The system has generated a

indicators major alarm
MIN Alarm Red On The system has generated a

indicators minor alarm
IN0,IN1 Signal Green On The signals are correct

indicator
- Off There are no signals or the
signals are incorrect

Access Module

r
ETH ETH Green On The link is normal

indicator
- Off The link is abnormal or no
data is being transmitted
over the link
Pin Assignments
Table 3-22 Pin assignments of the BITS/TOD IN0 port

1 BITS0_IN_B Input B of channel 0 BITS clock signals

8
7
6 2 BITS0_IN_A Input A of channel 0 BITS clock signals
5
4 3 PPS0_IN- Negative polarity of channel 0 PPS time
3
2 signals
1
4 TOD0_IN- Negative polarity of channel 0 TOD time
signals
5 TOD0_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 0 TOD time

signals
6 PPS0_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 0 PPS time

signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding


8
7
5
3
2 signals
1
signals

signals

Access Module

signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding
Table 3-24 Pin assignments of the BITS OUT port

1 - -
8
7
6 2 - -
5
4 3 1PPS_N(supp Output of the 1PPS time signals
3
2 orted in
1 V800R013C1
0 and later
versions)
4 BITS_OUT_ Output B of the BITS clock signals

B
5 BITS_OUT_ Output A of the BITS clock signals

A
6 1PPS_P(supp Output of the 1PPS time signals

orted in
V800R013C1
0 and later
versions)
7 GND Grounding
8 - -
Table 3-25 Pin assignments of the ETH port

1 GE1_MDI_T GE electrical port

8
7 0+
6
5 2 GE1_MDI_T
4
3 0-
2
1 3 GE1_MDI_T
1+

Access Module
4 GE1_MDI_T
2+
5 GE1_MDI_T
2–
6 GE1_MDI_T
1-
7 GE1_MDI_T
3+
8 GE1_MDI_T
3-
Table 3-26 Pin assignments of the COM port

1 B_SPM_485_ 485 serial port of the control board

8
7 TX+
6
5 2 B_SPM_485_ 485 serial port of the control board
4
3 TX-
2
1 3 B_SPM_485_ 485 serial port of the control board
RX+
4 - -
5 - -
6 B_SPM_485_ 485 serial port of the control board

RX-
7 - -
8 - -
Table 3-27 Pin assignments of the ALM port (upper)

1 ALM_IN0_+ Signal + of channel 0 alarm digital

8
7 parameter
6
5 2 ALM_IN0_- Signal - of channel 0 alarm digital
4
3 parameter
2
1 3 ALM_IN1_+ Signal + of channel 1 alarm digital
parameter

Access Module

parameter
5 ALM_IN2_- Signal - of channel 2 alarm digital

parameter

parameter

parameter

parameter
Table 3-28 Pin assignments of the ALM port (lower)


8
7 parameter
6
5 2 ALM_IN4_- Signal - of channel 4 alarm digital
4
3 parameter
2
1 3 ALM_IN5_+ Signal + of channel 5 alarm digital
parameter

parameter

parameter

parameter
7 ALM_OUT_+ Output + of the alarm control signals
8 ALM_OUT_- Output - of the alarm control signals
Daughter Board
The H801CITD board provides a daughter board port and can be configured with the BITSB
clock daughter board.
Figure 3-43 shows the position of the clock daughter board on the H801CITD board.

Access Module
Figure 3-43 Position of the daughter board on the H801CITD board
Daughter board
The BITSB daughter board supported by the H801CITD board provides the following
functions:
l Two inputs of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz BITS clock signals

l Recovers the 2 Mbit/s clock signals or shapes the 2 MHz clock signals, which can be
used as the system clock source.
l One output of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz clock signals
3.10 Power Board (PRT)

Power boards (PRT) lead in DC power for supplying power to the device MA5600T or
MA5603T.
3.10.1 Power Boards (PRT) Comparison

Table 3-29 Differences between power boards (PRT)
Board Alarm E-label Indicator

Monitorin
g
H801PR Yes Yes ALARM

TE
H801PR No No No
TG
H801PR Yes Yes PWR48 (power status indicator) and FUSE_48

TA (fuse status indicator)

Access Module
3.10.2 H801PRTA Board Description

The H801PRTA board is a power transfer board. It leads in -48 V DC power for supplying
power to the device.

The H801PRTA board supports the following functions:
l One -48 V power input
l Input undervoltage alarming using the indicator and related information reporting
l Fuse blow alarming using the indicator and related information reporting
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-44 Working principle of the H801PRTA board

Access Module
The H801PRTA board leads in -48 V power supply through the 3V3 power port on its front
panel. Using its filter and detection circuit, the H801PRTA board detects various errors of the
power supply and reports related information. In addition, the H801PRTA board transmits -48
V power supply to the backplane for supplying power to other boards in the service subrack.
Front Panel Port
3V3 DC Connected to
power port the DC PDU
Indicator
r
PWR48 Power Green On The input voltage is within

status the normal range
indicator
Red On The input voltage is
abnormal
- Off There is no power input
FUSE_4 Fuse status Red On The fuse blows

8 indicator
- Off The fuse functions
properly
3.10.3 H801PRTE Board Description

The H801PRTE is a connect power board. It leads in the -48 V DC power supply for the
device.

The H801PRTE board supports the following functions:

Access Module
l Filtering and current-limiting for the power input port

l Under-voltage detection, detection of whether the input power exists, and fault detection
l Combined reporting of the protection alarm and board online signal
l ALARM indicator
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-45 Working principle of the H801PRTE board
The basic working principle of the H801PRTE board is as follows:

l The H801PRTE board has a 3V3 power connector to lead a channel of -48 V power
supply. After passing the protection circuit and the filtering circuit, the power supply is
output to the backplane and supplies power for other boards in the subrack.

Access Module
l The detection and report circuit detects fault of the protection fuse. The detected signals
and the presence signals of the board are reported to the control board through the same
channel. The LED displays the status.
l The detection and report circuit detects under-voltage of the input power and whether
there is input power.
l The E2PROM circuit stores the vendor information of the board.
l The 5 V power led from the backplane is used to supply some chips of the board.
Front Panel Port
3V3 DC Connected to
Indicator
r
ALARM Indicator Green On The protection circuit is

of the normal
protection
circuit - Off The protection circuit is
faulty
3.10.4 H801PRTG Board Description

The H801PRTG is a connect power board. It leads in the -48 V DC power supply for the
device.

The H801PRTG board supports the following functions:
l Filtering for the power input port
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-46 Working principle of the H801PRTG board
The PRTA board leads in -48 V power supply through the 3V3 power port on its front panel,
and then transmits the -48 V power supply through its filter circuit to the backplane for
supplying power to other boards in the service subrack.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
3V3 DC Connected to
3.11 Power Board (MPW)

Power boards (MPW) lead in DC or AC power for supplying power to the device MA5608T.
3.11.1 H801MPWC Board Description

The H801MPWC board is a power board with dual DC power inputs. The H801MPWC board
leads in the -48 V DC power to the device.

The H801MPWC board supports the following functions:
l Two -48 V DC inputs
l Detection of power supply availability, and power supply faults
l Reporting of the protection alarm
l Indication of power status
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-47 Working principle of the H801MPWC board
The basic working principle of the H801MPWC board is as follows:
l The H801MPWC board leads in the -48 V power input through the 3V3 power
connector, and transfers the power to the current limit protection circuit, then to the filter
circuit, and finally to the backplane, supplying power to the subrack and other boards.
l The detection and reporting circuit checks the protection fuse for any faults, and reports
the detection signals to the control board. The control board indicates these detection
signals through indicators.
l The detection and reporting circuit checks for availability of power supply.
l The E2PROM circuit stores the board manufacture information.
l The H801MPWC board leads in the 3.3 V power from the backplane to power certain
internal chips of the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
3V3 DC Connected to
input port the DC PDU
Indicator
r
PWR0/ The power Green On The power board works

PWR1 board properly
indicator
- Off The power board is faulty
3.11.2 H801MPWD Board Description

The H801MPWD board is an AC power board, consisting of an AC power unit and a
monitoring unit. The board supplies power to the device and supports the lead-acid battery for
power backup. The AC power unit provides overcurrent protection, output overvoltage
protection, short circuit protection, and over-temperature protection. The monitoring unit
provides comprehensive management for the power system and storage battery, and also
provides certain environment monitoring functions.

Access Module

The H801MPWD board supports the following functions and specifications:
l Input AC voltage: -100 V to -240 V

l Input AC frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz
l Single-phase three-wire AC power input
l Connection to battery backup power (-48V DC)
l Rated output power: 400 W
l Alarm monitoring
l Battery low voltage disconnection; charge and discharge management of storage
batteries
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-48 Working principle of the H801MPWD board
Backplane User side
H801MPWD
AC input terminal
Control (-100 V to -240 V)
board/ -48V DC AC power and
Service battery input
B
board a board
c
k Battery input
p terminal
la
n (-48V DC)
e
C
o
n
n
e
c
to
r
Control Port for battery

Monitoring
board temperature sensor
unit
Service Power
signal signal

Access Module
The basic working principle of the H801MPWD board is as follows:
l AC input power is supplied to the board. After AC/DC conversion, the power is supplied
to the system backplane at -48 V (adjustable).
l The board supports battery input. The monitoring unit manages the charging and
discharging of batteries.
l The board communicates with the system through the backplane, reporting board
hardware and electronic label information to the backplane.
l The board supports communication with the monitoring unit through the 485 protocol to
adjust voltage and current and report alarm information.
l The monitoring unit manages lead-acid batteries.
l The optical coupler implements the battery low voltage disconnection function.
l The board provides power distribution checking and alarm reporting functions.
Front Panel Ports
Connected to
AC input the AC power
port system
Connected to the
battery input battery(supports
port batteries only)
Sensor port
Connected to the
battery temperature
sensor
Indicator
r
AC IN AC input Green On Indicates that the AC input

indicator power is normal

Access Module

r
- Off Indicates that the AC input

power is abnormal
DC OUT DC output Green On Indicates that the DC

indicator output power is normal
- Off Indicates that the DC

output power is abnormal
BAT Power Green On Indicates that battery

board connection is normal
battery
connection - Off Indicates that battery
indicator connection is abnormal
PMU Monitorin Green Blinking quickly (on Indicates that program

g board for 0.25 s and off for loading is in progress
running 0.25 s repeatedly)
status
indicator Green Blinking slowly (on Indicates that the board
for 1 s and off for 1 s runs normally
repeatedly)
Red Blinking Indicating that the board is

starting up
Red On Indicates that a critical

alarm is reported
Orange Blinking Indicates that a minor

alarm (such as the high
temperature alarm) is
reported
3.11.3 H801MPWE Board Description

The H801MPWE board is a power board with single DC power inputs. The H801MPWE
board leads in the -48 V DC power to the device.

The H801MPWE board supports the following functions:
l One -48 V DC inputs
l Detection of power supply availability, and power supply faults
l Reporting of the protection alarm
l Indication of power status
l Backup for the other board

Access Module
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-49 Working principle of the H801MPWE board
The basic working principle of the H801MPWE board is as follows:
l The H801MPWE board leads in one -48 V power input through one 3V3 power
connector, and transfers the power to the current limit protection circuit, then to the filter
circuit, and finally to the backplane, supplying power to the subrack and other boards.
l The detection and reporting circuit checks the protection fuse for any faults, and reports
the detection signals to the control board. The control board indicates these detection
signals through indicators.
l The detection and reporting circuit checks for availability of power supply.
l The E2PROM circuit stores the board manufacture information.

Access Module
l The H801MPWE board leads in the 3.3 V power from the backplane to power certain
internal chips of the board.
Front Panel Port
3V3 DC Connected to
input port the DC PDU
Indicator
r
PWR0 The power Green On The power board works

board properly
indicator
- Off The power board is faulty
3.12 SPU Board

SPU is a service processing board.
3.12.1 Comparison Between SPU Service Processing Boards

For the functions and specifications supported by the H801SPUB board, see "H801SPUB-
MPLS service processing unit board". The following table lists the functions and
specifications supported by other SPU service processing boards.
In the following table, "Yes" indicates "supported" and "No" indicates "not supported".

Access Module
Table 3-30 Functions and specifications of SPU service processing boards

Function/ H801SPUA H801SPUC H801SPUF
Specificatio
n
Application Used for multi-RSP Used for multi-RSP access Supports both Layer 2 and Layer 3
scenario access in the Open in the Open Access forwarding modes. You can run the
Access scenario and scenario and serves as an router mode command to configure the
serves as an upstream upstream interface board at Layer 3 forwarding mode of the system.
interface board at the the point of interconnection l When the basic Layer 3 forwarding
point of (POI). mode is used, the H801SPUF board
interconnection works in Layer 2 forwarding mode.
(POI). The control board is used as a Layer
3 forwarding board. The H801SPUF
board supports 10 GE upstream
transmission, 1588v2, and Y.1731.
l When the enhanced Layer 3
forwarding mode is used, the
H801SPUF board works in Layer 3
forwarding mode. The H801SPUF
board serves as a Layer 3 forwarding
board, and it is used to expand the
specifications of the ARP/ND entries
and routing entries and to enhance
Layer 3 forwarding capability.
Interfaces l Eight SFP l 20 SFP interfaces (GE); Eight SFP interfaces (GE) or SFP+
and optical interfaces (GE) works with the CSFP interfaces (10 GE)
module l Two SFP+ optical module to The board port rate supports the
interfaces (10 GE) provide 40 GE preceding three working modes. When
interfaces switching a mode, modify
Do not support the
electrical module. l Four SPF+ interfaces configurations first. Run the interface
(10 GE) eth frameid/slotid command to enter the
ETH mode and then run the board
speed-mode speed-mode command to
set the port rate mode.
l If speed-mode is 0, the working rates
of ports 0–7 are 1 Gbit/s.
of ports 0–7 are 10 Gbit/s.
of ports 0–3 are 1 Gbit/s and
working rates of ports 4–7 are 10
Gbit/s.

Access Module

Specificatio
n
Switching 20 Gbit/s 40 Gbit/s l When serving as a Layer 2

capability forwarding board, the H801SPUF
board supports 40Gbit/s Layer 2
switching capability.
l When serving as a Layer 3
forwarding board, the H801SPUF
board supports bidirectional 40Gbit/s
Layer 3 switching capability.
MPLS No No Working with the control board, the

SPUF board supports MPLS.
When services are sent from the control
board to SPUF and then back to the
control board for upstream transmission
through the control board or GUI:
l When SCUH works in active/
standby mode, the SPUF switching
capacity is 10 Gbit/s; When SCUH
works in load sharing mode, the
SPUF switching capacity is 20
Gbit/s.
l When SCUN or SCUK works in
active/standby mode, the SPUF
switching capacity is 5 Gbit/s; When
SCUN or SCUK works in load
sharing mode, the SPUF switching
capacity is 10 Gbit/s.
When services are sent from the control
board to SPUF and then directly for
upstream transmission:
l When SCUH works in active/
standby mode, the SPUF switching
capacity is 20 Gbit/s; When SCUH
works in load sharing mode, the
SPUF switching capacity is 40
Gbit/s.
l When SCUN or SCUK works in
active/standby mode, the SPUF
switching capacity is 10 Gbit/s;
When SCUN or SCUK works in
load sharing mode, SPUF the
switching capacity is 20 Gbit/s.
VLAN l VLAN + MAC l VLAN + MAC VLAN + MAC

forwarding l S+C l S+C
mode

Access Module

Specificatio
n
Ethernet Supports upstream Supports upstream Supports upstream transmission and

upstream transmission and transmission and cascading. The network role can only be
transmission cascading. The cascading. The network configured based on board.
and network role can only role can only be configured l The Layer 3 forwarding mode
cascading be configured based based on board. supports only the upstream role.
on board. You need to run the l The Layer 2 forwarding mode
You need to run the service-port command to supports both the upstream and
service-port create an Ethernet service cascade roles.
command to create flow to add the upstream or
an Ethernet service cascading port into a You need to run the port vlan command
flow to add the VLAN. The port vlan to add the upstream or cascading port
upstream or command is not supported into the VLAN.
cascading port into a in the H801SPUC board.
VLAN. The port If multiple upstream ports
vlan command is not are added into a protection
supported in the group, these ports must be
H801SPUA board. added into an aggregation
If multiple upstream group. In this way, you
ports are added into a only need to create a
protection group, service flow to add the
these ports must be master port of the
added into an protection group into the
aggregation group. In VLAN so that all the
this way, you only member ports of the
need to create a protection group will be
service flow to add added into the VLAN.
the master port of the
protection group into
the VLAN so that all
the member ports of
the protection group
will be added into the
VLAN.
Ethernet link Support intra-board Support intra-board link Support intra-board link aggregation and
aggregation link aggregation and aggregation and inter-board inter-board link aggregation
inter-board link link aggregation
aggregation
Packet Identifying and Identifying and capturing Identifying and capturing DHCP and
capture capturing DHCP and DHCP and PPPoE packets PPPoE packets with 3 tags
PPPoE packets with with 3 tags
3 tags
(V800R013C00 and
later versions)

Access Module

Specificatio
n
Load sharing Yes Yes Yes

A maximum of 2 H801SPUF boards can
be configured as Layer 3 forwarding
boards and work in load-sharing mode.
Automatic Yes Yes Yes

power
shutdown in
case of a high
temperature
Temperature Yes Yes Yes

query and
high-
temperature
alarm
HQoS Yes Yes No
IEEE1588 No No Yes
V2 time
synchronizati
on
1588 ACR Yes Yes Yes
Synchronous Yes Yes Yes

Ethernet
clock
Y.1731 No Yes Yes
TPID Yes Yes No

configuration
based on port

Access Module

Specificatio
n
Limitation None None Does not support the MSAN VoIP

service.
When the system works in enhanced
Layer 3 forwarding mode:
l The H801SPUF and H801SPUB
boards cannot be configured
concurrently.
l Does not support BFD
configurations. The BFD
configurations will be lost after the
basic Layer 3 forwarding mode is
switched to the enhanced Layer 3
forwarding mode.
l Cannot be deleted if it is specified as
a Layer 3 forwarding board.
l If the H801SPUF board working as a
Layer 3 forwarding board is
modified using CLI, the original and
new H801SPUF boards need to be
reset.
l If the specified H801SPUF board is
bound to another H801SPUF board,
these two boards are used as Layer 3
forwarding boards. Each subrack
supports a maximum of 2
H801SPUF boards working in Layer
3 forwarding mode and these two
boards must be installed in the
specified slots. Otherwise, the
second SPUF board cannot be
switched to the Layer 3 forwarding
mode.
3.12.2 H801SPUA Board Description

The H801SPUA board is a service processing board, it supports upstream transmission and
cascading.

Please refer to "SPU Service Process Boards Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-50 Working principle of the H801SPUA board
Backplane User side
H801SPUA
Upper-
10GE 10GE
Adjacent layer
slot Service processing module device or
Control GE GE cascading
board device
Backplane Connector
TCAM
10GE
interface
Control
board
Control Daughter
module board
-48V DC Power Clock

power module module


The basic working principle of the H801SPUA board is as follows:

l The control module loads the board software, controls the running of the board, and
l The service processing module processes the upstream services and data packets of the
services.
l The daughter board module supports the route table query, multi-level traffic
management, and hierarchical scheduling.
l The power module draws -48 V power from the backplane and converts the power into
working power for each functional module of the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
10GE upstream or Connected the port to the

cascaded port 10GE port of the upper-layer
device or the cascaded device
Connected the port to the GE

GE upstream or
port of the upper-layer device
cascaded port

Access Module
Indicator
r
RUN Running Red Blinking The board enters the APP

ALM status start phase during the
indicator board startup
Green Blinking quickly (on The board enters the phase

for 0.25 s and off for of communication with the
0.25 s repeatedly) control board during its
startup
Green Blinking slowly (on The board works in the

for 1 s and off for 1 s normal state
repeatedly)

is generated
ACT Active Green On This board is active

indicator
Yellow On This board works in the
load-balancing mode
- Off This board is standby

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
3.12.3 H801SPUB Board Description

The H801SPUB board is a MPLS service processing unit board.

l 10 Gbit/s MPLS switching capability
– Unidirectional 10 Gbit/s, bidirectional 5 Gbit/s when only one control board
(SCUx) is working
– Bidirectional 10 Gbit/s when two control boards (SCUx) are working in load
sharing mode (V800R011C00 and later versions)
l Active/standby switchover of the control boards

Access Module
l Board power-off in case of a high temperature

l Temperature query and high-temperature alarm
NOTE
Only two SPUB boards can be installed in the system at the same time. And if two SPUB boards are in
use, both of them must be located side by side in the shelf.
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-51 Working principle of the H801SPUB board
Backplane
H801SPUB
Adjacent 10GE
slot Service
processing
Control GE/10GE module
board
Backplane Connector
Control
module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module



Access Module
The basic working principle of the H801SPUB board is as follows:

l The service processing module processes the MPLS packets and the service data packets,
and forwards the service data packets.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
load-balancing mode
3.12.4 H801SPUC Board Description

The H801SPUC board is a service processing board, and it implements extended functions of
the OLT upstream interface. This board is mainly used in the Open Access scenario and is
used as an upstream interface board.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-52 Working principle of the H801SPUC board
Backplane User side
H801SPUC
10GE/ 4*10GE
Control 20GE Optical port
Upper-
board Service
Interface 40*GE layer or
Adjacent 20GE processing module Optical port cascading
slot module
device
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H801SPUC board is as follows:

l The interface module receives signals and then transmits the signals.
l The service processing module processes Ethernet packets, processes and forwards
service data packets, and implements service flow management.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected the port to the

10GE upstream or
10GE port of the upper-layer
cascaded port
device or the cascaded device

GE upstream or cascaded port
(one-channel or bi-channel port)

Access Module
Cable
The LC optical connector used in H801SPUC is shorter than the average LC optical
connector.
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

Access Module

r
10GE(0- Link status Green On A connection is set up on

3),GE(4- indicator the port
43)
Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
on the port

the port
3.12.5 H801SPUF Board Description

The H801SPUF board is a multifunctional service processing board, expanding ARP and ND
entries and route entries and enhancing Layer 3 forwarding capabilities.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-53 Working principle of the H801SPUF board
Backplane User side
H801SPUF
10GE/
8*10GE
20GE
Upper-layer
Control
cascading
device or
device
board 8*GE
20GE Service processing module
Adjacent
4*GE+4*10GE
slot
Backplane Connector
Control Control
board
module
-48V DC Power Clock

power module module


The basic working principle of the H801SPUF board is as follows:

l The service processing module processes the upstream services and data packets of the
services.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

10GE/GE upstream
or cascaded port

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)
Orange Blinking The board generates a

recoverable alarms, for
example, a high-
temperature alarm

indicator
Green Blinking This board works in the
load-balancing mode
LINK/A Optical Green On A connection is set up on

CT port the port
indicator

the port
MODE Optical Green On Port is working in the

port mode appropriate mode
indicator
- Off Port is not working in the
appropriate mode
3.13 Ethernet Service Access Board (ETH)

Ethernet service access boards provide Ethernet service cascading or upstream transmission,
which does not support user access and user management.
3.13.1 Ethernet Service Access Boards Comparison

Ethernet service access boards include H801ETHA and H801ETHB.

Access Module
Table 3-31 Specifications of Ethernet service access boards
Specification H801ETHA H801ETHB
Number of interfaces 8 8
Optical module SFP GE optical module SFP GE optical module or

electrical module
Ethernet cascading Yes Yes
Ethernet upstream No Yes

transmission
Within-board self No Yes

switching (the board
serving as an upstream
board to support
interworking between
upstream ports)
GE remote extended No Yes (supported in V800R01200

subrack cascading and later versions)
1588ACR Yes Yes
Intra-board aggregation No Yes
Inter-board aggregation No Yes
User access and No No

management
3.13.2 H801ETHA Board Description

This topic covers the working principle, front panel, port, daughter board, and specifications
of the H801ETHA board.

Please refer to "Ethernet Service Access Boards Comparison".
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-54 illustrates the working principle of the H801ETHA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-54 Working principle of the H801ETHA board
Backplane User side
H801ETHA
10GE/GE
Switching Interface
8*GE
Control Cascading
board module module device
Backplane Connector
Control module
-48V DC Power Clock

power module module
Voltage Clock
required by required by
the board the board

The basic working principle of the H801ETHA board is as follows:

l The control module loads board software, manages and controls board running, and
reads information such as slot ID, version number, and board type.
l The interface module includes the daughter board connector and provides eight GE
ports.
l The switching module completes line rate switching for Ethernet packets.
l The clock module provides working clock for functional modules on the board.
The service processing is as follows:
l In the downstream direction, the control board sends service data through the backplane
connector to the switching module for line-rate switching of the Ethernet packets. The
daughter board then implements service cascading.
l In the upstream direction, service data is sent to the switching module through the
daughter board, and then to the control board through the backplane.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected the port to a

GE cascaded port
port of another device

Access Module
Indicator
r

Green Blinking slowly (on The board functions

for 1 s and off for 1 s properly
repeatedly)

0.25 s repeatedly)
ACT Active/ Green On The ACT indicator has no

standby significant indication until
status it is assigned
indicator

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801ETHA board provides two slots for daughter boards. Figure 3-55 shows the
positions of daughter boards on the H801ETHA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-55 Positions of daughter boards on the H801ETHA board
Daughter board 1
Daughter board 2
Table 3-32 describes the daughter board supported by the H801ETHA board.
Table 3-32 Daughter board supported by the H801ETHA board
Daughter Board Port Position
O4GS Four GE optical ports Position for daughter board 1

or position for daughter board
2
3.13.3 H801ETHB Board Description

This topic covers the working principle, application, front panel, port, and specifications of
the H801ETHB board.

Please refer to "Ethernet Service Access Boards Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Application
The H801ETHB board supports Ethernet cascading, Ethernet upstream transmission, and
aggregation management for remote GE extended subracks.
l The H801ETHB board is mainly used for Ethernet cascading, which saves the upstream
fiber resources of access nodes.
Figure 3-56 H801ETHB used for Ethernet cascading

Cascading node
CPE
G Access node
I GE
U
E G
T I
CPE H U
B
G
I GE
U
Cascading node
l When the upstream ports on the control board and GIU board are insufficient, the
H801ETHB board can be used for Ethernet upstream transmission.
Figure 3-57 H801ETHB used for Ethernet upstream transmission

Access node
CPE
G GE
E
I
T
U
H
B
GE
l The H801ETHB board can be cascaded to remote GE extended subracks (for example,
MA5623AR), achieving aggregation management for remote GE extended subracks.

Access Module
Figure 3-58 H801ETHB managing remote GE extended subracks

OSS/U2000
Standalone NE
Modem Remote extended
subrack
Master
GE subrack
E
G
T
I
H
Modem U
Remote extended B
subrack
GE
Managemant relationship
Working Principle
Figure 3-59 illustrates the working principle of the H801ETHB board.
Figure 3-59 Working principle of the H801ETHB board
Backplane User side
H801ETHB
Tx0 Rx0 Upper-

10GE/GE layer
Control Forwarding Interface
device or
board module module
cascading
device
Tx7 Rx7
Backplane Connector
Control module
-48V Power Clock

DC power module module
Voltage Clock
required by required by
the board the board


Access Module
The basic working principle of the H801ETHB board is as follows:

l The control module loads the board software, manages and controls the running of the
board, and reads the slot ID, version and type of the board.
l The interface module provides eight GE ports.
l The switching module implements the load sharing and the redundancy protection
through the inter-board aggregation.
The service process is as follows:
l In the upstream direction, service data is transmitted from the control board to the
switching module through the backplane connector. The switching module performs the
line rate switching of the Ethernet packets and supports service cascading and upstream
transmission.
l In the downstream direction, service data is transmitted to the switching module through
the daughter board and then to the control board through the backplane.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected the port to another

HiGig port
H801ETHB board
GE upstream Connected the port to a

or cascading port of another device
Electrical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r


repeatedly)

0.25 s repeatedly)
ACT Active/ Green On The ACT indicator has no

standby significant indication until
status it is assigned
indicator

indicator the port

the port

indicator
transmitted
3.14 TDM Service Processing Board

TDM service processing boards include H801TOPA, H801TOPB and H801CSPA.
3.14.1 H801TOPA Board Description

The H801TOPA is a TDM traffic over PSN board. It uses the daughter board to transmit
services upstream.
Overview
The H801TOPA board supports the following functions:
l Native TDM function (when the NH1A/O2CE daughter board is configured)

l CESoP function (when the EH1A/CSSA daughter board is configured)
l TDM signal upstream transmission through the 16 channels of E1 port (when the NH1A/
EH1A daughter board is configured)

Access Module
l TDM signal upstream transmission through the 2 channels of STM-1 optical port (when
the O2CE/CSSA daughter board is configured, )
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-60 Working principle of the H801TOPA board
Backplane User side
H801TOPA
E1/STM-1
Upper-layer
cascading
device or
GE Service interface
device
Control Interface
processing
board module
module
Backplane Connector
Control
module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H801TOPA board is as follows:

l The control module loads the board software, controls, and manages the entire board.
l The service processing module allocates the GE bus of the backplane and processes
signals.
l The interface module converts signals.

Access Module
l In the upstream direction, after passing the interface module, the GE signals from the
backplane are converted into the TDM frames. Then, the TDM frames are transmitted
upstream.
l In the downstream direction, the interface module receives the signals from the TDM
line, and converts and encapsulates the signals into GE packets. After being transmitted
to the backplane bus through the service processing module, the GE packets are
transmitted to the control board. Then, the control board forwards the GE packets to the
related service boards.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Configured with Configured with

the EH1A the NH1A
daughter board daughter board
Connect Connect
E1 port E1 port
the port to the port to
the DDF the DDF

Access Module
Configured with Configured with

the O2CE the CSSA
daughter board daughter board
STM-1 Connect the Connect the

STM-1
port port to the port to the
port
SDH device SDH device
For details about supported optical module, see 4.7 STM-1 Optical Module.
Indicator
r
RUN Running Red Blinking The board enters the phase

ALM status of communication with the
indicator control board during its
startup

Access Module

r
Green Blinking quickly (on The board enters the APP

for 0.25 s and off for start phase during the
0.25 s repeatedly) board startup

repeatedly)

is generated
BSY Port status Green On At least one service port is

indicator (supported in activated
V800R012C00 and
earlier versions)
Green Blinking At least one service port is

(supported in activated
V800R013C00 and
earlier versions)
- Off No service port is activated
Pin Assignments of the NH1A Daughter Board

Table 3-33 describes the pin assignments of the E1 port on the front panel of the H801TOPA
board.

Access Module
Table 3-33 Pin assignments of the E1 port

Pin Signal Port Pin Signal
30 TT0 8 TR7
1 16
15 TR0 37 RR1
31
44 PGND 2 22 RT1
29 TT1 7 TT7
14 TR1 36 RR2
43 PGND 21 RT2
28 TT2 6 PGND
13 TR2 14 44 35 RR3
42 PGND 30 20 RT3
15
27 TT3 5 PGND
12 TR3 34 RR4
41 PGND 19 RT4
26 TT4 4 PGND
11 TR4 33 RR5
40 PGND 18 RT5
25 TT5 3 PGND
10 TR5 32 RR6
39 PGND 17 RT6
24 TT6 2 PGND
9 TR6 31 RR7
38 RR0 16 RT7
23 RT0 1 PGND
NOTE
l In Table 3-33, the first letter "R" or "T" in each cell of the signal column refers to "Receive" or
"Transmit" of E1 signals.
l In Table 3-33, the second letter "R" or "T" in each cell of the signal column refers to "ring" or "tip"
of the 75-ohm E1 signal cable, or refers to sign + or – of the 120-ohm E1 signal cable.
Jumper Settings for the NH1A Daughter Board

Whether the cable is grounded on the NH1A daughter board can be set through the jumpers.
The NH1A daughter board has four sets of jumpers: J7, J8, J9, and J10. The four sets of

Access Module
jumpers should be set to function at the same time. Table 3-34 describes the settings of J7, J8,
J9, and J10.
Table 3-34 Jumper settings for the NH1A daughter board

Status Description
ON (jumper The jumper caps should be installed (which means grounded) if the
caps are transmit and receive resistance is 75 ohms.
installed)
OFF (jumper The jumper caps should be removed (which means ungrounded) if the
caps are transmit and receive resistance is 120 ohms.
removed)
NOTE
Generally, the coaxial cables connected to the E1 port are unbalanced cables with the resistance of 75
ohms; the twisted pairs connected to the E1 port are balanced cables with the resistance of 120 ohms.
The interference source can affect the transmission of analog signals to a great extent. Therefore, the
connection mode and grounding mode must be correct and reliable; otherwise, bit error or error message
about signal loss may occur.
Daughter Board
To provide the related functions, the H801TOPA board must be configured with a matching
daughter board. Figure 3-61 shows the position of the daughter board (NH1A and EH1A) on
the H801TOPA board. Figure 3-62 shows the position of the daughter board (O2CE and
CSSA) on the H801TOPA board.
Figure 3-61 Position of the daughter board (NH1A and EH1A) on the H801TOPA board
Daughter board

Access Module
Figure 3-62 Position of the daughter board (O2CE and CSSA) on the H801TOPA board
Daughter board
Table 3-35 describes the daughter board supported by the H801TOPA board.
Table 3-35 Daughter board supported by the H801TOPA board
Daughter board Function
NH1A l Transmits TDM signals upstream through

the E1 port.
l Implements the Native TDM function
EH1A l Transmits TDM signals upstream through

the E1 port.
l Implements the CESoP function.
O2CE l Transmits TDM signals upstream through

the STM-1 port.
l Implements the Native TDM function
CSSA l Transmits TDM signals upstream through

the STM-1 port.
l Implements the CESoP function.

Access Module
3.14.2 H801TOPB Board Description

The H801TOPB is a TDM traffic over PSN board. It provides two STM-1 ports for
transmitting TDM services to the upstream.
Overview
The H801TOPB board supports the following functions:
l Native TDM function
l CESoP function
l TDM signal upstream transmission through two STM-1 optical ports
l Intra-board and inter-board 1+1 port protection
l Automatic shutdown in times of high temperatures
Specifications
For details, see Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of Boards.

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-63 Working principle of the H801TOPB board
Backplane User side
H801TOPB
STM-1
Upper-layer
cascading
device or
GE Service interface
device
Control Interface
processing
board module
module
Backplane Connector
Control
module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principles of the H801TOPB board are as follows:
l The control module loads the board software, and controls and manages the entire board.
l The service processing module allocates the GE bus of the backplane and processes
signals.
l The interface module converts signals.
l The power module supplies power to other function modules of the board.
l The clock module provides the working clock signals for other function modules of the
board.
The service processing procedure of the H801TOPB board is as follows:

Access Module
l In the upstream direction, GE signals from the backplane travel trough the interface
module and are converted into the TDM frames. Then the TDM frames are transmitted
upstream.
l In the downstream direction, the interface module receives signals from the TDM line
and converts the signals into the GE packets. Then the service processing module
processes the GE packets and forwards them to the backplane bus. The backplane bus
transmits the GE packets to the control board and then the control board allocates the GE
packets to respective service boards.
Ports on the Front Panel
STM-1 Connect the

port port to the
SDH device

Access Module
Indicators
r
RUN Running Red Blinking The board enters the phase

ALM status of communication with the
indicator control board during its
startup
Green Blinking quickly (on The board enters the APP

for 0.25 s and off for start phase during the
0.25 s repeatedly) board startup

repeatedly)

is generated
BSY Port status Green Blinking At least one service port is

indicator activated
3.14.3 H801CSPA Board Description

The H801CSPA is a CESoP service processing board. It supports the structure-agnostic TDM
over packet (SAToP) processing of 64 channels of E1 signals.
Overview
The H801CSPA board supports the following functions:
l SAToP processing of 64 channels of E1 signals
l 8 kHz clock channel from the H801CSPA board to the backplane, which is used to
transmit the clock signals recovered from the service to the control board
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-64 Working principle of the H801CSPA board
The basic working principle of the H801CSPA board is as follows:
l The service processing module implements the switching of the services.
l The DSP module implements the SAToP algorithm function.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
Indicator
r
RUN Running Green Blinking quickly (on The board starts up and is
ALM status for 0.25 s and off for being loaded with software
indicator 0.25 s repeatedly)
Orange Blinking The board starts up and is

being loaded with software

repeatedly)
Yellow Blinking The board generates an

alarm, but the services are
not affected

indicator
load-balancing mode
3.15 GPON Service Board

GPON service boards work with ONUs to provide GPON access service.
3.15.1 GPON Service Board Comparison

Table 3-36 Specifications lists of GPON service board
Specifica H801GP H802GP H805GP H802GPF H806GP H801GP

tion BC BD BD D/ BH/ MD
H805GPF H807GP
D BH
Port 4 8 8 16 8 8
quantity
MAX 1: 64 1: 64 1: 64 1: 64 1: 64 1: 64
Split ratio
(Class B
+)

Access Module

H805GPF H807GP
D BH
MAX Not 1: 128 1: 128 1: 128 1: 128 1: 128

Split ratio support
(Class C
+/Class C
++)
D-CMTS No No No No No Yes
ONU- No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

based
shaping
Optical Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

performa (querying
nce Rx optical
monitor power is
not
supported)
Controlle No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

d optical
signal
transmiss
ion of the
optical
module
ONU- × √ √ √ √ √
based
rate
limitation
CAR × √ √ √ √ √
group
Temperat Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ure query
and high
temperat
ure alarm
Automati No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

c power
shutdown
in case of
a high
temperat
ure

Access Module

H805GPF H807GP
D BH
Maximu 20 20 20 40 40 40
m
differenti
al fiber
distance
(km)
Maximu 8184 8184 8184 16368 8184 6144

m
Number
of Service
Flows
Supporte
d by the
Board
Maximu 4096 8192 8192 16384 16384 16384

m
Number
of MAC
address
Supporte
d by the
Board
Available 1238400 1238784 1238784 1238784 1238784 1238784

DBA
bandwidt
h (based
on single
port)
(kbit/s)
Number 256 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024

of T-
CONT
supporte
d by each
GPON
port
Board Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

supportin
g
downstre
am FEC

Access Module

H805GPF H807GP
D BH
Board No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

supportin
g
upstream
FEC
Rogue No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ONT
detection
Number 64 128 128 128 128 128

of ONUs
supporte
d by a
GPON
port
Number 8192 8192 8192 16384 8192 8192

of GEM
ports
supporte
d by each
board
Number 3872 3872 3872 3872 3872 3872

of GEM
ports
supporte
d by each
GPON
port
Number 8 8 8184 8184 8184 7168

of service
ports
supporte
d by each
GEM
port
HQoS × × × l H802G l H806G ×

(four PFD: × PBH:
levels) l H805G ×
PFD: √ l H807G
PBH: √

Access Module

H805GPF H807GP
D BH
9216-byte × × × l H802G l H806G ×

Jumbo PFD: × PBH:
frames l H805G ×
PFD: √ l H807G
PBH: √
1588v2 × × √ √ √ ×
Power Class B l Class B+ (28.5 dB, mostly used),

budget + (28.5 l Class C+ (32 dB long reach transmission)
supporte dB,
d by a mostly l Class C++: 35 dB
GPON used)
port
Minimum 512kbps l 1 Mbit/s (in the minimum delay mode)

bandwidt l 128 kbit/s (in the maximum bandwidth usage mode)
h
supporte
d by a T-
CONT
3.15.2 H801GPBC Board Description

The H801GPBC is a 4-port GPON OLT interface board. It works together with the optical
network unit (ONU) to provide GPON access services.

Please refer to "GPON Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-65 Working principle of the H801GPBC board
The basic working principle of the H801GPBC board is as follows:

l The switching module aggregates the signals from four GPON ports.
l The interface module performs conversion between GPON optical signals and Ethernet
packets.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GPON port Connected to the

ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated
BSY Port status Green Blinking The board carries services

indicator
- Off The board carries no
service
0,1,2,3 PON port Green On The ONT of the related

indicator PON port is online
- Off The ONT of the related

PON port is offline
3.15.3 H802GPBD Board Description

The H802GPBD is an 8-port GPON OLT interface board. It works together with the optical
network unit (ONU) to provide GPON access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-66 Working principle of the H802GPBD board
Backplane User side
H802GPBD
20GE Switching Interface 8*GPON

Control ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H802GPBD board is as follows:

l The switching module aggregates the signals from eight GPON ports.
l The interface module performs conversion between GPON optical signals and Ethernet
packets.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to
GPON port
the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service
0, 1, 2 ... PON port Green On The ONT of the related

Green Blinking The optical module does

not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.4 H805GPBD Board Description

The H805GPBD is an 8-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network
unit (ONU) to provide GPON access service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-67 Working principle of the H805GPBD board
Backplane User side
H805GPBD
Control 20GE Switching Interface 8*GPON

ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Clock
Power
DC module
module
power


The basic working principle of the H805GPBD board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The interface module converts between GPON signals and Ethernet packets.
l The clock module provides the working clock for other functional modules of the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to
GPON port
the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.5 H806GPBH Board Description

H806GPBH is a 8-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network unit
(ONU) to provide GPON access service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-68 Working principle of the H806GPBH board
Backplane User side
H806GPBH

ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Clock
Power
DC module
module
power


The basic working principle of the H806GPBH board is as follows:

manages the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to
GPON port
the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.6 H807GPBH Board Description

H807GPBH is a 8-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network unit

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-69 Working principle of the H807GPBH board
Backplane User side
H807GPBH

ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Clock
Power
DC module
module
power


The basic working principle of the H807GPBH board is as follows:

manages the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to
GPON port
the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.7 H802GPFD Board Description

H802GPFD is a 16-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network unit

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-70 illustrates the working principle of the H802GPFD board.

Access Module
Figure 3-70 Working principle of the H802GPFD board
Backplane User side
H802GPFD
40GE 16*GPON
Control Switching Interface
ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H802GPFD board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The switching module aggregates the signals from sixteen GPON ports.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GPON port Connected to

the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.8 H805GPFD Board Description

H805GPFD is a 16-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network unit

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-71 illustrates the working principle of the H805GPFD board.

Access Module
Figure 3-71 Working principle of the H805GPFD board
Backplane User side
H805GPFD
40GE 16*GPON
ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H805GPFD board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The switching module aggregates the signals from sixteen GPON ports.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GPON port Connected to

the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.15.9 H801GPMD Board Description

H801GPMD is a 8-port GPON OLT interface board. It works with the optical network unit

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-72 Working principle of the H801GPMD board
The basic working principle of the H801GPMD board is as follows:

manages the board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to
GPON port
the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.16 10G GPON Service Board

10G GPON service boards work with ONUs to provide 10G GPON access service.
3.16.1 10G GPON Service Board Comparison

Service Board H802XGBC H801XGBD
Number of 10G GPON ports 4 8

supported by each board
Port mode XFP SFP+
Optical module One-fiber bi-directional One-fiber bi-directional

optical module. optical module.

Access Module
Number of GEM Port 3872 3872

supported by each port
Number of T-CONT 2048 2048

supported by each port
Split ratio Supports a maximum of Supports a maximum of

1:128 split ratio. 1:256 split ratio.
NOTE NOTE
The actual split ratio is The actual split ratio is
determined according to the determined according to the
model of optical modules model of optical modules
and the distance of optical and the distance of optical
fibers. fibers.
Outputs 1588V2 time to the Not support Support (supported in 1G

downstream device mode, not supported in
10G mode)
Controlled optical signal Support Support

transmission of the optical
module
Temperature query and alarm Support Support

in case of a high temperature
Board power-off in case of a Support Support

high temperature
3.16.2 H802XGBC Board Description

H802XGBC is a 4-port 10G GPON OLT interface board. It works with the 10G GPON
optical network unit (ONU) to provide 10G GPON access service.

Please refer to "10G GPON Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-73 Working principle of the H802XGBC board
Backplane User side
H802XGBC
10GE/ 4*10G
20GE GPON
ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Clock
Power
DC module
module
power


The basic working principle of the H802XGBC board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The switching module aggregates the signals from four 10G GPON ports.
l The interface module converts between 10G GPON signals and Ethernet packets.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
RUN
ALM
BSY
Connected to
10G GPON port the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.16.3 H801XGBD Board Description

H801XGBD is a 8-port 10G GPON OLT interface board. It works with the 10G GPON
optical network unit (ONU) to provide 10G GPON access service.

Please refer to "10G GPON Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-74 Working principle of the H801XGBD board
Backplane User side
H801XGBD
10GE/ 8*10G
20GE GPON
ONU
board module module
10GE/
20GE
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Clock
Power
DC module
module
power


The basic working principle of the H801XGBD board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The switching module aggregates the signals from eight 10G GPON ports.
l The interface module converts between 10G GPON signals and Ethernet packets.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected
10G GPON port
to the ONU

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

indicator
service


not take effect

PON port is offline
3.17 P2P Interface Board

Point-to-point (P2P) interface boards work with Ethernet optical network terminals (for
example the ONT supporting GE upstream, MxU and lanswitch) to provide P2P optical
access services for users.
3.17.1 P2P Interface Board Comparison
Table 3-37 Specifications lists of P2P interface boards

Specification H801OPFA H802OPGD H802OPGE
Port Quantity 16 24/48 24/48

Access Module
Specification H801OPFA H802OPGD H802OPGE
Optical Module eSFF FE CSFP (48-channel) or CSFP (48-channel) or

SFP (24-channel) GE/FE SFP (24-channel) GE/FE
Limit on the N/A l The user VLAN ID l The user VLAN ID

Traffic ranges from 1 to ranges from 1 to
Classification 4093, but cannot be 4093, but cannot be
Parameters set to 4094 or 4095. set to 4094 or 4095.
l The user VLAN l The user VLAN
packets cannot be packets cannot be
priority-tagged. priority-tagged.
Cascading and No Yes Yes

aggregation of NOTE NOTE
DSLAMs or You can run the network- You can run the network-
MDUs role command in the opg role command in the opg
mode to switch the board mode to switch the board
role. Default board role is role. Default board role is
user. user.
Synchronous Yes Yes Yes

Ethernet clock NOTE
issuing The
H801OPFA
board only
issues
synchronous
Ethernet clock
signals (line
recovered
clock signals
using the
interface
board), which
cannot be used
as the system
clock source.
1588v2 clock No No Yes

issuing
Inter-board No Yes Yes

aggregation and
load sharing
9216-byte jumbo No No Yes

frames
Temperature Yes Yes Yes

query
Automatic No Yes Yes

power shutdown
in case of a high
temperature

Access Module
3.17.2 H801OPFA Board Description

The H801OPFA board is a FE P2P optical interface board, providing 16 channels of FE
optical signals.
NOTE
The H801OPFA board is upgraded from VER.B to VER.C, wherein the function of synchronous
Ethernet clocks issuing is added.

Please refer to "P2P Interface Board Comparison".
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-75 Working principle of the H801OPFA board
The basic working principle of the H801OPFA board is as follows:

l The interface module receives signals and then transmits the signals.

Access Module
l The switching module aggregates and forwards signals, and transmits the signals to the
control board through the GE bus of the backplane.
l The clock module provides clock signals for each functional module of the board,
supports the base station backhaul, and transmits the synchronous Ethernet clock signals.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
FE optical port Connected to the ONU
For details about supported optical module, see 4.5 FE Optical Module.

Access Module
Indicator
r
ALM status for 1 s and off for 1 s normal state

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated
LINK Link status Green On The connection is

indicator successful
- Off The connection fails

indicator
transmitted
Daughter Board
The H801OPFA board is installed with one LEDA daughter board to control the LEDs on the
front panel. Figure 3-76 shows the position of the daughter board on the H801OPFA board.
Figure 3-76 Position of the daughter board on the H801OPFA board

Daughter board

Access Module
3.17.3 H802OPGD Board Description

The H802OPGD board is a 48-port GE/FE Optical interface board, providing Ethernet optical
access and cascading. It supports up to 48 channels of GE/FE P2P access services.

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-77 Working principle of the H802OPGD board
Backplane User side
H802OPGD
48*GE/FE
10GE Switching Interface Optical port
Control ONU
board module module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power



Access Module
The basic working principle of the H802OPGD board is as follows:

the board.
l The interface module transmits and receives signals.
l The switching module aggregates and forwards signals, and then transmits the signals to
the control board through the XAUI bus of the backplane.
l The clock module provides the working clock for each functional module of the board,
and supports synchronous clock issuing.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE/FE optical port Connected to the ONU

(one-channel or bi-channel port)
Electrical Module, 4.5 FE Optical Module, and 4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module.

Access Module
NOTE
l When working with the one-channel modules, it provides 24-channel GE/FE optical access.
l When working with the bi-channel optical modules, it provides 48-channel GE/FE optical access.
Cable
The LC optical connector used in H802OPGE is shorter than the average LC optical
connector.
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

Access Module

r
0-47 Link status Green On The connection is

NOTE indicator successful
Only
LEDs - Off The connection fails
with the
even Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
IDs are
valid
when
the port
is
connect
ed to a
one-
channel
optical
module.
3.17.4 H802OPGE Board Description

The H802OPGE board is a 48-port GE/FE Optical interface board, providing Ethernet optical
access and cascading. It supports up to 48 channels of GE/FE P2P access services.
Specifications
When you use H802OPGE boards to replace H802OPGD boards that are bound together, pay
attention to the following items:
l For V800R013C00 or earlier versions, you need to remove the 2 H802OPGD boards that
are bound together and then replace them with H802OPGE boards. Note that the
H802OPGD board and the H802OPGE board cannot be installed in the 2 slots (that are
bound together) at the same time.
l For V800R013C10 or later versions, you need to remove one of the 2 H802OPGD
boards (that are bound together) and then install 1 H802OPGE board. After the
H802OPGE board starts up and functions normally, replace another H802OPGD board.
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-78 Working principle of the H802OPGE board
Backplane User side
H802OPGE
10GE/
Control 20GE 48*GE/FE
board Service Optical port
Interface ONU
20GE processing
module
module
Backplane Connector
Control board
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H802OPGE board is as follows:

the board.
l The interface module transmits and receives signals.
l The service processing module processes Ethernet packets, processes and forwards
service data packets, and implements service flow management.
l The clock module provides the working clock for each functional module of the board,
and supports synchronous clock issuing.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
GE/FE optical port

(one-channel or bi-channel port) Connected to the ONU
Electrical Module, 4.5 FE Optical Module, and 4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module.
Cable
The LC optical connector used in H802OPGE is shorter than the average LC optical
connector.

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated
0-47 Link status Green On The connection is

indicator successful
- Off The connection fails

Access Module

r
NOTE Green Blinking Data is being transmitted
Only
LEDs
with the
even
IDs are
valid
when
the port
is
connect
ed to a
one-
channel
optical
module.
3.18 ATM Interface Board

The ATM interface board includes H801AIUG.
3.18.1 H801AIUG Board Description

The H801AIUG board is an ATM interface init board. The board connects to the ATM-
DSLAM devices in the downstream direction, and also provides the ATM private services.
Overview
The H801AIUG board supports the following functions:
l Four ATM optical ports (STM-1)
l ATM cascading upstream transmission (ATM PWE3) through a private line
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-79 Working principle of the H801AIUG board
The basic working principle of the H801AIUG board is as follows:

l The processing module controls the interconnection between the high speed backplane
bus and the interface module.
l The interface module manages the connections, resources, and ATM switching of the
ATM layer. The interface module also provides external ports.
l In the upstream direction, the daughter board transmits the service data from the ATM
network to the interface module. The interface module performs ATM switching, that is,
VPI/VCI conversion, and then transmits the service data to the processing module. The

Access Module
processing module performs conversion from ATM to IP, that is, encapsulates ATM
packets into MAC frames. Then, the backplane connector transmits the MAC frames to
the control board. After the control board processes the MAC frames, the frames are
transmitted to the upper level device through the optical or electrical port.
l In the downstream direction, the processing module converts the IP packets from the
backplane into ATM cells and then transmits the ATM cells to the interface module. The
interface module performs ATM switching and then transmits the ATM cells to the ATM
network through the daughter board.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Connected to the
ATM optical port
ATM-DSLAM device

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)
ACT Active Green On This has no indication

indicator
LOS Current Red On The connection fails or is

connection not activated. The board
status generates an alarm
indicator
- Off The connection is
successful. No alarm is
generated on the board
Daughter Board
The H801AIUG board provides two daughter board ports to hold two daughter boards.
Figure 3-80 shows the positions of the daughter boards on the H801AIUG board.

Access Module
Figure 3-80 Positions of the daughter boards on the H801AIUG board
Daughter board 1
Daughter board 2
Table 3-38 describes the daughter board supported by the H801AIUG board.
Table 3-38 Daughter board supported by the H801AIUG board
Daughter Port Connection

Board
O2CS Two ATM optical ports When only one daughter board is installed,
install the daughter board in the upper position
daughter board 1.
3.19 Combo Board

The combo board is a broadband and narrowband combo service board and provides three
application modes: combo mode, broadband mode, and narrowband mode. In combo mode,
the combo board supports both broadband and voice services.
3.19.1 ADSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison


Access Module
ADSL2+ Specifications Comparison
Table 3-39 Specifications lists of 48-channel ADSL2+ service boards

Specifications H80BCAME H806CAME
Applicable Line ADSL2+ over POTS ADSL2+ over POTS
Physical Layer Yes (Supported by V800R009C00 and No

Retransmission later)
(G.INP)
ADSL2+ Bonding Yes No
INM Yes No
SELT Yes Yes
xDSL MELT No No
Annex Type l G.992.1 Annex A l G.992.1 Annex A

l G.992.3 Annex A/L/M (EU32-EU64) l G.992.3 Annex A/L/M (EU32-EU64)
l G.992.5 Annex A/M (EU32-EU64) l G.992.5 Annex A/M (EU32-EU64)
Flexible Supports RFC2662, RFC4706, and Supports RFC2662, RFC4706, and

Configuration Modes TR165. (Users with a super user account TR165. (Users with a super user account
can log in to the system and run the can log in to the system and run the
switch adsl mode to command in switch adsl mode to command in
diagnose mode to switch between the diagnose mode to switch between the
configuration modes. The default configuration modes. The default
configuration mode is RFC2662. configuration mode is RFC2662.
Considering the current development Considering the current development
trend, it is recommended that you use trend, it is recommended that you use
TR165, which is more flexible than the TR165, which is more flexible than the
others) others)
Connector Delander 64-pin Delander 64-pin
Built-in Splitter Yes Yes
Temperature Query Yes Yes

and High-
temperature Alarm
Automatic Power Yes Yes

Shutdown in Case of
a High Temperature

Access Module
POTS Specifications Comparison
Table 3-40 POTS Specifications lists of Combo boards

Specification H80BCAME/H806CAME
Connector Delander 64-pin
DSP channel (G.711) 48
Codec G.711A
G.711U
G.729
G.723
G.726
POTS MELT Yes
MELT precision High
High temperature automatic shutdown Yes
Short loop Yes
Polarity of wires a and b a+

b-
16/12 KC No
Powering on/off by command Yes
Polarity reversal Yes
Power supply at high voltage (for a long distance) Yes
Port current 20 mA/25 mA/30 mA
3.19.2 VDSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison

VDSL2 Specifications Comparison
Table 3-41 VDSL2 Specifications lists of Combo boards

Specificati H80BCVME H806CCPE H80DCCPE H80DCSPE
on
Applicable VDSL2 and VDSL2 and VDSL2 and VDSL2 and

Lines POTS POTS POTS POTS
Number of 48 64 64 64
ports

Access Module

on
G.INP Yes Yes Yes Yes
VDSL2 Yes (two-pair, Yes (Supports a Yes (Supports a Yes (Supports a

PTM only the port maximum of 4- maximum of 4- maximum of 8-
Bonding with an even pair bonding of pair bonding of pair bonding of
number can be any ports on the any ports on the any ports on the
specified as the same board) same board, same board)
master port. n supports 8-pair
and m are bonding when
integers, such as being connected
0, 1, and 2.) to the MA5694)
INM Yes Yes Yes Yes
SELT Yes Yes Yes Yes
VDSL No No No No
MELT
Spectrum Supports 8a, 8b, Supports 8a, 8b, Supports 8a, 8b, Supports 8a, 8b,
Parameter 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b,
Profile and 17a and 17a and 17a 17a,and 35b
Annex Type l G.992.1 l G.992.1 l G.992.1 l G.992.1

Annex A Annex A Annex A Annex A
l G.992.3 l G.992.3 l G.992.3 l G.992.3
Annex Annex Annex Annex
A/L/M A/L/M A/L/M A/L/M
l G.992.5 l G.992.5 l G.992.5 l G.992.5
Annex A/M Annex A/M Annex A/M Annex A/M
l G.993.2 l G.993.2 l G.993.2 l G.993.2
Annex A/B Annex A/B Annex A/B Annex A/B
Flexible Supports TR129 Supports TR129 Supports TR129 Supports TR129

Configurati and TR165. and TR165. and TR165. and TR165.
on Modes
Built-in Yes Yes Yes Yes

Splitter
Temperatur Yes Yes Yes Yes

e Query
and High-
temperatur
e Alarm

Access Module

on
Automatic Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power
Shutdown
in the Event
of a High
Temperatur
e
Connector Delander 64-pin Delander 64-pin Delander 64-pin Delander 64-pin
POTS Specifications Comparison
Table 3-42 POTS Specifications lists of Combo boards

Specification H80BCVME H806CCPE H80DCCPE H80DCSPE
Connector Delander 64- Delander 64- Delander 64- Delander 64-

pin pin pin pin
DSP channel (G. 48 64 64 64

711)
Codec G.711A G.711A G.711A G.711A

G.711U G.711U G.711U G.711U
G.729 G.729 G.729 G.729
G.723 G.723 G.723 G.723
G.726 G.726 G.726 G.726
POTS MELT Yes Yes Yes Yes
MELT precision High High High High
High temperature Yes Yes Yes Yes

automatic
shutdown
Short loop √ Yes Yes Yes
Polarity of wires a a+ a+ a+ a+
and b b- b- b- b-
16/12 KC No No No No
Powering on/off Yes Yes Yes Yes

by command
Polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes

Access Module
Specification H80BCVME H806CCPE H80DCCPE H80DCSPE
Power supply at Yes Yes Yes Yes

high voltage (for a
long distance)
Port current 20 mA/25 20 mA/25 20 mA/25 20 mA/25

mA/30 mA mA/30 mA mA/30 mA/35 mA/30 mA/35
mA/40 mA mA/40 mA
3.19.3 H80BCAME Board Description

H80BCAME is a 48-port ADSL2+&POTS combo board with built-in splitter, providing 48
channels of ADSL2+ and POTS access services.

Please refer to "ADSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison".
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-81 Working principle of the H80BCAME board

Access Module
NOTE
l UTOPIA is a universal test and operations PHY interface for asynchronous transfer mode (ATM).
l S3MII is a source synchronous serial media independent interface.
The basic working principle of the H80BCAME board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The protection module protects and isolates the board from lightning strikes.
l The splitter module separates POTS signals from ADSL2+ signals over the subscriber
line.
l The broadband interface module converts the ADSL2+ line signals into cell flows.
l The broadband service processing module implements functions such as encoding/
decoding, analog-to-digital conversion, and line drive for ADSL2+ services. It then
sends ADSL2+ services to the forwarding module through the UTOPIA interface.
l The narrowband interface module provides access to 48-channel narrowband service.
l The narrowband service processing module encodes and decodes narrowband voice
services and converts analog signals into digital signals. It then sends narrowband voice
services to the forwarding module through the S3MII interface.
l The forwarding module converts broadband signals and narrowband signals into GE
signals for upstream transmission through the backplane.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
ADSL2+&POTS port Connected

to the MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
l When cables from the LINE ports are routed to an outdoor environment or the user side,
the MDF must be installed with a protective unit.
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)
Orange Blinking (on for 1 s A high-temperature alarm

and off for 1 s is generated
repeatedly)
BSY Service Green On At least one subscriber port

online is activated
status
indicator - Off None of the subscriber
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-43 describes the pin assignments of the LINE0 port on the front panel of the
H80BCAME board, and Table 3-44 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H80BCAME board.

Access Module
Table 3-43 Pin assignments of the LINE0 port
Pin Signal Pin Signal Port Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A -
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A -
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A -
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A -
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A -
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A -
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A -
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A -
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
1 A 3 17 A 39 33 33 A 47 49 A -
1 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 38 1 35 A 46 51 A -
0
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 2 21 A 37 37 A 45 53 A -
64
9 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 2 23 A 36 32 39 A 44 55 A -
8
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 2 25 A 35 41 A 43 57 A -
7
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B

Access Module
11 A 2 27 A 34 43 A 42 59 A -
6
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 2 29 A 33 45 A 41 61 A -
5
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 2 31 A 32 47 A 40 63 A -
4
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
3.19.4 H806CAME Board Description

H806CAME is a 48-port ADSL2+&POTS combo board with built-in splitter, providing 48
channels of ADSL2+ and POTS access services.

Please refer to "ADSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-82 Working principle of the H806CAME board
Backplane User side

H806CAME
UTO
Broadband
Broadband
processing
interface
module
module
DSL
service
PIA
Forwarding module
Protection module
LINE1
GE
Control Control SPL ATU-R
LINE0
Backplane Connector
board module module
Narrowban
processing
d service
S3MII HW Narrowband
module
interface
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


NOTE
l UTOPIA is a universal test and operations PHY interface for asynchronous transfer mode (ATM).
The basic working principle of the H806CAME board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.
l The broadband interface module converts the ADSL2+ line signals into cell flows.
decoding, analog-to-digital conversion, and line drive for ADSL2+ services. It then
sends ADSL2+ services to the forwarding module through the UTOPIA interface.

Access Module

l The forwarding module converts broadband signals and narrowband signals into GE
signals for upstream transmission through the backplane.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
ADSL2+&POTS port Connected

to the MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

repeatedly)

online is activated
status
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
H806CAME board, and Table 3-46 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H806CAME board.

Access Module
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A -
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A -
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A -
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A -
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A -
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A -
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A -
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A -
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
1 A 3 17 A 39 33 33 A 47 49 A -
1 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 38 1 35 A 46 51 A -
0
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 2 21 A 37 37 A 45 53 A -
64
9 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 2 23 A 36 32 39 A 44 55 A -
8
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 2 25 A 35 41 A 43 57 A -
7
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B

Access Module
11 A 2 27 A 34 43 A 42 59 A -
6
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 2 29 A 33 45 A 41 61 A -
5
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 2 31 A 32 47 A 40 63 A -
4
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
3.19.5 H80BCVME Board Description

H80BCVME is a 48-port VDSL2&POTS combo board with built-in splitter, providing 48
channels of VDSL2 and POTS access services.

Please refer to "VDSL2&POTS Combo Board Comparison".
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-83 Working principle of the H80BCVME board

Access Module
NOTE
l GMII is a gigabit media independent interface.

The basic working principle of the H80BCVME board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The splitter module separates POTS signals from VDSL2 signals over the subscriber
line.
l The broadband interface module converts the VDSL2 line signals into cell flows.
decoding, analog-to-digital conversion, and line drive for VDSL2 services. It then sends
VDSL2 services to the forwarding module through the GMII interface.
l The forwarding module converts broadband signals and narrowband signals into
10GE/GE signals for upstream transmission through the backplane.
l In the upstream direction, the splitter module separates signals over the subscriber line
into POTS signals and VDSL2 signals. The broadband interface module then sends
VDSL2 signals to the broadband service processing module, and the narrowband
interface module sends POTS signals to the narrowband service processing module.
After that, signals from the broadband and narrowband service processing modules are
aggregated to the forwarding module. The forwarding module reassembles the cell flow
into PTM packets, encapsulates the PTM packets into IP packets, and performs CAR on
the IP packets. Controlled by the logic switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the
backplane bus through the backplane GE or 10GE interface.
l In the downstream direction, the forwarding module decapsulates the IP packets sent
from the backplane bus, performs CAR on the packets, reassembles the packets into
PTM packets, and then transmits them to the broadband and narrowband service
processing modules. The interface module then converts the PTM packets into analog
signals, and transmits the analog signals over the subscriber line through the splitter
module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
VDSL2&POTS port Connected to

the MDF
NOTICE

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

repeatedly)

online is activated
status
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
H80BCVME board, and Table 3-48 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H80BCVME board.
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A -
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A -
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A -
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A -
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B

Access Module
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A -
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A -
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A -
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A -
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B

1 A 3 17 A 39 33 33 A 47 49 A -
1 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 38 1 35 A 46 51 A -
0
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 2 21 A 37 37 A 45 53 A -
64
9 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 2 23 A 36 32 39 A 44 55 A -
8
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 2 25 A 35 41 A 43 57 A -
7
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 34 43 A 42 59 A -
6
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 2 29 A 33 45 A 41 61 A -
5
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 2 31 A 32 47 A 40 63 A -
4
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B

Access Module
3.19.6 H806CCPE Board Description

H806CCPE is a 64-port VDSL2&POTS combo board with built-in splitter, providing 64
channels of VDSL2 and POTS access services.

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-84 Working principle of the H806CCPE board

Backplane
User side
H806CCPE
GE/
Broadband
Broadband
processing
10GE RGMII interface

module
module
DSL
service
Control
board
Forwarding module
Protection module
LINE1
Control SPL VTU-R
LINE0
Backplane Connector
module module
Vectoring
board
Narrowban
processing
d service
S3MII HW Narrowband
module
interface
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


NOTE
l RGMII is a gigabit media independent interface.

The basic working principle of the H806CCPE board is as follows:

Access Module
manages the board.
line.
VDSL2 services to the forwarding module through the RGMII interface.
module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

the MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

repeatedly)

online is activated
status
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
H806CCPE board, and Table 3-50 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H806CCPE board.

Access Module
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A 31
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A 30
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A 29
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A 28
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A 27
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A 26
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A 25
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A 24
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
1 A 3 17 A 47 33 33 A 47 49 A 63
9 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 46 1 35 A 46 51 A 62
8
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 3 21 A 45 37 A 45 53 A 61
64
7 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 3 23 A 44 32 39 A 44 55 A 60
6
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 43 41 A 43 57 A 59
5
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B

Access Module
11 A 3 27 A 42 43 A 42 59 A 58
4
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 3 29 A 41 45 A 41 61 A 57
3
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 3 31 A 40 47 A 40 63 A 56
2
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
3.19.7 H80DCCPE Board Description

H80DCCPE is a 64-port VDSL2&POTS Combo Board with built-in splitter, providing 64
channels of VDSL2 and POTS access services and supporting Vectoring.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-85 Working principle of the H80DCCPE board
Backplane
User side
H80DCCPE
Broadband
Broadband
processing
RGMII
interface
module
module
DSL
service
Control
board Forwarding module
Protection module
GE/
10GE LINE1
Control SPL VTU-R
LINE0
Backplane Connector
module module
Vectoring
Narrowban
processing
board
d service
S3MII HW Narrowband
module
interface
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


NOTE

The basic working principle of the H80DCCPE board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.

Access Module
module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

the MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

repeatedly)

online is activated
status
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
H80DCCPE board, and Table 3-52 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H80DCCPE board.

Access Module
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A 31
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A 30
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A 29
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A 28
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A 27
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A 26
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A 25
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A 24
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
1 A 3 17 A 47 33 33 A 47 49 A 63
9 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 46 1 35 A 46 51 A 62
8
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 3 21 A 45 37 A 45 53 A 61
64
7 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 3 23 A 44 32 39 A 44 55 A 60
6
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 43 41 A 43 57 A 59
5
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B

Access Module
11 A 3 27 A 42 43 A 42 59 A 58
4
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 3 29 A 41 45 A 41 61 A 57
3
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 3 31 A 40 47 A 40 63 A 56
2
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
3.19.8 H80DCSPE Board Description

H80DCSPE is a 64-port VDSL2&POTS Combo Board with built-in splitter, providing 64
channels of VDSL2 and POTS access services and supporting SuperVector.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-86 Working principle of the H80DCSPE board
Backplane
User side
H80DCCPE
Broadband
Broadband
processing
RGMII
interface
module
module
DSL
service
Control
board Forwarding module
Protection module
GE/
10GE LINE1
Control SPL VTU-R
LINE0
Backplane Connector
module module
Vectoring
Narrowban
processing
board
d service
S3MII HW Narrowband
module
interface
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


NOTE

The basic working principle of the H80DCSPE board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.

Access Module
module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

repeatedly)

online is activated
status
ports are activated
Pin Assignments
H80DCSPE board, and Table 3-54 describes the pin assignments of the LINE1 port on the
front panel of the H80DCSPE board.

Access Module
1 A 7 17 A 15 33 33 A 23 49 A 31
17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 6 19 A 14 1 35 A 22 51 A 30
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 5 21 A 13 37 A 21 53 A 29
64
16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 4 23 A 12 32 39 A 20 55 A 28
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 11 41 A 19 57 A 27
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B
11 A 2 27 A 10 43 A 18 59 A 26
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 1 29 A 9 45 A 17 61 A 25
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 0 31 A 8 47 A 16 63 A 24
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
1 A 3 17 A 47 33 33 A 47 49 A 63
9 17
2 B 18 B 49 34 B 50 B
3 A 3 19 A 46 1 35 A 46 51 A 62
8
4 B 20 B 36 B 52 B
5 A 3 21 A 45 37 A 45 53 A 61
64
7 16
6 B 22 B 38 B 54 B
48
7 A 3 23 A 44 32 39 A 44 55 A 60
6
8 B 24 B 40 B 56 B
9 A 3 25 A 43 41 A 43 57 A 59
5
10 B 26 B 42 B 58 B

Access Module
11 A 3 27 A 42 43 A 42 59 A 58
4
12 B 28 B 44 B 60 B
13 A 3 29 A 41 45 A 41 61 A 57
3
14 B 30 B 46 B 62 B
15 A 3 31 A 40 47 A 40 63 A 56
2
16 B 32 B 48 B 64 B
3.20 Voice Board

Voice boards support VoIP POTS, ISDN BRA, and ISDN PRA services.
NOTE
When voice boards are used, the control board must be configured with a daughter board that supports
VoIP logic forwarding.
3.20.1 Voice Boards Comparison

Voice boards support three types of services: POTS , BRA , and PRA .
Table 3-55 Specifications of POTS Voice Service Boards
Specification H801AS H801AS H808AS H809AS H80BA H80CA

RB PB PB PB SPB SPB
Connector Champ Champ Champ Delander Champ Delander

64-pin 64-pin 64-pin 64-pin 64-pin 64-pin
DSP channel (G. 32 64 64 64 64 64

711)
Codec G.711A G.711A G.711A G.711A G.711A G.711A

G.711U G.711U G.711U G.711U G.711U G.711U
G.729 G.729 G.729 G.729 G.729 G.729
G.723 G.723 G.723 G.723 G.723 G.723
G.726 G.726 G.726 G.726 G.726 G.726
POTS MELT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MELT precision Low Low High High High High
Automatic No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

shutdown at high
temperature

Access Module
Specification H801AS H801AS H808AS H809AS H80BA H80CA

RB PB PB PB SPB SPB
Short loop No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Polarity of wires a a+ a- a- a+ a- a+
and b b- b+ b+ b- b+ b-
16/12 KC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Powering on/off by Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CLI
Polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

function
Power supply at Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

high voltage (for a
long distance)
Port current 20mA/ 20mA/ 20mA/ 20mA/ 20mA/ 20mA/

25mA/ 25mA/ 25mA/ 25mA/ 25mA/ 25mA/
30mA 30mA 30mA 30mA 30mA 30mA
Table 3-56 Specifications of ISDN Voice Service Boards
Specification H802DSRD H802DSRE H802EDTB
Types of services BRA BRA PRA
Connector Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin
DSP channel (G.711) 64 64 420 (packetization

interval: 20 ms)
Coding mode 2B1Q 4B3T E1 mode:

HDB3/AMI
T1 mode:
B8ZS/AMI
Automatic shutdown at Yes Yes Yes

high temperature
3.20.2 H801ASRB Board Description

The H801ASRB board is a 32-port analog subscriber board, providing 32 channels of VoIP
POTS services.

Please refer to "Voice Board Comparison".

Access Module
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-87 illustrates the working principle of the H801ASRB board.
Figure 3-87 Working principle of the H801ASRB board
The basic working principle of the H801ASRB board is as follows:

l The control module processes the high-level protocol between the H801ASRB board and
the control board, manages the service ports of the H801ASRB board, controls the DSP
module, and controls the GE interface module.
l The subscriber line interface module provides 32 channels of the POTS service.
l The processing module converts the pulse code modulation (PCM) data into IP voice
packets, and supports the decoding/encoding and the echo suppression functions.
l The GE interface module supports the GE communication between the H801ASRB
board and the control board.

l In the upstream direction, service data is transmitted to the H801ASRB board through
the POTS port. After being processed by the processing module, the service data is

Access Module
transmitted to the backplane bus through the interface module, and then transmitted
upstream through the optical or electrical port of the control board.
l In the downstream direction, the service data is transmitted to the control board through
the optical or electrical port. The service data is transmitted to the processing module
through the backplane bus and the interface module. After being processed by the
processing module, the service data is transmitted to the subscriber through the POTS
port.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN
(0-31) Connected the port to the MDF

Access Module
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-57 describes the pin assignments of the PSTN port on the front panel of the
H801ASRB board.
Table 3-57 Pin assignments of the LINE port

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24
63 RING 47 RING 31 RING 15 RING

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1

Access Module

l l l l
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
Daughter Board
The H801ASRB board supports a daughter board port, which can be installed with the
H806ASDA daughter board.
Figure 3-88 shows the position of the daughter board on the H801ASRB board.
Figure 3-88 Position of the daughter board on the H801ASRB board
Daughter
board

Access Module
Table 3-58 describes the daughter board supported by the H801ASRB board.
Table 3-58 Daughter board supported by the H801ASRB board

Daughter Board Function Remarks
H806ASDA Supports the VoIP function. Mandatory
3.20.3 H801ASPB Board Description

The H801ASPB board is a 64-port VOIP subscriber board, providing 64 channels of VoIP
POTS access services.

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-89 illustrates the working principle of the H801ASPB board.
Figure 3-89 Working principle of the H801ASPB board

Access Module
The basic working principle of the H801ASPB board is as follows:

l The control module processes the high-level protocol between the H801ASPB board and
the control board, manages the service ports of the H801ASPB board, controls the DSP
l The GE interface module supports the GE communication between the H801ASPB
l In the upstream direction, the service data is transmitted to the H801ASPB board through
the POTS port. After being processed by the TDM processing module and the VoIP
service processing module, the service data is transmitted to the control board through
the backplane and then to the upstream direction.
l In the downstream direction, the service data is transmitted from the control board to the
TDM processing module and the VoIP service processing module through the backplane
bus and the interface module. After being processed by the TDM processing module and
the VoIP service processing module, the service data is transmitted to the subscriber
through the POTS port.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN1
(32-63)
Connected the port to the MDF
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r
Green Blinking quickly (on The board is

for 0.25 s and off for communicating with the
0.25 s repeatedly) control board
Red Blinking The board is in the APP

startup phase

is generated

indicator activated
- Off No service port is

activated
Daughter Board
The H801ASPB board supports a daughter board port, which can be installed with the
H806ASDB daughter board.
Figure 3-90 shows the position of the daughter board on the H801ASPB board.

Access Module
Figure 3-90 Position of the daughter board on the H801ASPB board
Daughter
board
Table 3-59 describes the daughter board supported by the H801ASPB board.
Table 3-59 Daughter board supported by the H801ASPB board

Daughter Board Function Remarks
H806ASDB Supports the VoIP function. Mandatory
Pin Assignments
For pin assignment of the LINE0 port, see Table 3-60; For pin assignment of the LINE1 port,
see Table 3-61;

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP47 48 TIP39 64 32 32 TIP48 16 TIP56

47 39 48 56
62 TIP46 46 TIP38 30 TIP49 14 TIP57

46 38 49 57
60 TIP45 44 TIP37 28 TIP50 12 TIP58

45 37 50 58
58 TIP44 42 TIP36 26 TIP51 10 TIP59

44 36 51 59
56 TIP43 40 TIP35 24 TIP52 8 TIP60

43 35 52 60
33 1
54 TIP42 38 TIP34 22 TIP53 6 TIP61

42 34 53 61
52 TIP41 36 TIP33 20 TIP54 4 TIP62

41 33 54 62
50 TIP40 34 TIP32 18 TIP55 2 TIP63

40 32 55 63


Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Backplane User side
H808ASPB
64*POTS
Control GE GE
Processing Interface
board Interface PSTN
module module
module
Backplane Connector
MELT
Control module Test
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power

Service Control Power Clock Test



Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN1
(32-63)
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
For pin assignment of the PSTN0 port, see Table 3-62; For pin assignment of the PSTN1 port,
see Table 3-63;

Access Module
Table 3-62 Pin assignments of the PSTN0 port

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP47 48 TIP39 64 32 32 TIP48 16 TIP56

47 39 48 56
62 TIP46 46 TIP38 30 TIP49 14 TIP57

46 38 49 57
60 TIP45 44 TIP37 28 TIP50 12 TIP58

45 37 50 58
58 TIP44 42 TIP36 26 TIP51 10 TIP59

44 36 51 59
56 TIP43 40 TIP35 24 TIP52 8 TIP60

43 35 52 60
33 1
54 TIP42 38 TIP34 22 TIP53 6 TIP61

42 34 53 61
52 TIP41 36 TIP33 20 TIP54 4 TIP62

41 33 54 62
50 TIP40 34 TIP32 18 TIP55 2 TIP63

40 32 55 63


Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Backplane User side
H809ASPB
64*POTS
Control GE GE
Processing Interface
board Interface PSTN
module module
module
Backplane Connector
MELT
Control module Test
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power




Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN1
(32-63)
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-65;

l l l l
1 TIP7 17 TIP15 33 33 TIP23 49 TIP31

17
2 RING 18 RING 49 34 RING 50 RING
7 15 23 31
1
3 TIP6 19 TIP14 35 TIP22 51 TIP30

6 14 64 22 30
16
5 TIP5 21 TIP13 37 TIP21 53 TIP29
48

5 13 21 29
7 TIP4 23 TIP12 39 TIP20 55 TIP28

Access Module

l l l l

4 12 20 28
9 TIP3 25 TIP11 41 TIP19 57 TIP27

3 11 19 27
11 TIP2 27 TIP10 43 TIP18 59 TIP26

2 10 18 26
13 TIP1 29 TIP9 45 TIP17 61 TIP25

1 9 17 25
15 TIP0 31 TIP8 47 TIP16 63 TIP24

0 8 16 24

l l l l
1 TIP39 17 TIP47 33 33 TIP55 49 TIP63

17
39 47 55 63
1
3 TIP38 19 TIP46 35 TIP54 51 TIP62

38 46 64 54 62
16
5 TIP37 21 TIP45 37 TIP53 53 TIP61
48

37 45 53 61
7 TIP36 23 TIP44 39 TIP52 55 TIP60

36 44 52 60
9 TIP35 25 TIP43 41 TIP51 57 TIP59

35 43 51 59

Access Module

l l l l
11 TIP34 27 TIP42 43 TIP50 59 TIP58

34 42 50 58
13 TIP33 29 TIP41 45 TIP49 61 TIP57

33 41 49 57
15 TIP32 31 TIP40 47 TIP48 63 TIP56

32 40 48 56
3.20.6 H80BASPB Board Description

The H80BASPB board is a 64-port VOIP subscriber board, providing 64 channels of VoIP

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-93 illustrates the working principle of the H80BASPB board.

Access Module
Figure 3-93 Working principle of the H80BASPB board
The basic working principle of the H80BASPB board is as follows:

l The control module processes the high-level protocol between the H80BASPB board and
the control board, manages the service ports of the H80BASPB board, controls the DSP
l The GE interface module supports the GE communication between the H80BASPB

l In the upstream direction, the service data is transmitted to the H80BASPB board
through the POTS port. After being processed by the TDM processing module and the
VoIP service processing module, the service data is transmitted to the control board
through the backplane and then to the upstream direction.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN1
(32-63)
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-67;

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP47 48 TIP39 64 32 32 TIP48 16 TIP56

47 39 48 56
62 TIP46 46 TIP38 30 TIP49 14 TIP57

46 38 49 57
60 TIP45 44 TIP37 28 TIP50 12 TIP58

45 37 50 58
58 TIP44 42 TIP36 26 TIP51 10 TIP59

44 36 51 59
56 TIP43 40 TIP35 24 TIP52 8 TIP60

43 35 52 60
33 1
54 TIP42 38 TIP34 22 TIP53 6 TIP61

42 34 53 61
52 TIP41 36 TIP33 20 TIP54 4 TIP62

41 33 54 62
50 TIP40 34 TIP32 18 TIP55 2 TIP63

40 32 55 63
3.20.7 H80CASPB Board Description

The H80CASPB board is a 64-port VOIP subscriber board, providing 64 channels of VoIP

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-94 illustrates the working principle of the H80CASPB board.
Figure 3-94 Working principle of the H80CASPB board
The basic working principle of the H80CASPB board is as follows:

l The control module processes the high-level protocol between the H80CASPB board and
the control board, manages the service ports of the H80CASPB board, controls the DSP
l The GE interface module supports the GE communication between the H80CASPB
l In the upstream direction, the service data is transmitted to the H80CASPB board
through the POTS port. After being processed by the TDM processing module and the
VoIP service processing module, the service data is transmitted to the control board
through the backplane and then to the upstream direction.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN1
(32-63)
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-69;

l l l l
1 TIP7 17 TIP15 33 33 TIP23 49 TIP31

17
7 15 23 31
1
3 TIP6 19 TIP14 35 TIP22 51 TIP30

6 14 64 22 30
16
5 TIP5 21 TIP13 37 TIP21 53 TIP29
48

5 13 21 29
7 TIP4 23 TIP12 39 TIP20 55 TIP28

Access Module

l l l l

4 12 20 28
9 TIP3 25 TIP11 41 TIP19 57 TIP27

3 11 19 27
11 TIP2 27 TIP10 43 TIP18 59 TIP26

2 10 18 26
13 TIP1 29 TIP9 45 TIP17 61 TIP25

1 9 17 25
15 TIP0 31 TIP8 47 TIP16 63 TIP24

0 8 16 24

l l l l
1 TIP39 17 TIP47 33 33 TIP55 49 TIP63

17
39 47 55 63
1
3 TIP38 19 TIP46 35 TIP54 51 TIP62

38 46 64 54 62
16
5 TIP37 21 TIP45 37 TIP53 53 TIP61
48

37 45 53 61
7 TIP36 23 TIP44 39 TIP52 55 TIP60

36 44 52 60
9 TIP35 25 TIP43 41 TIP51 57 TIP59

35 43 51 59

Access Module

l l l l
11 TIP34 27 TIP42 43 TIP50 59 TIP58

34 42 50 58
13 TIP33 29 TIP41 45 TIP49 61 TIP57

33 41 49 57
15 TIP32 31 TIP40 47 TIP48 63 TIP56

32 40 48 56
3.20.8 H802DSRD Board Description

The H802DSRD board is a 32-port ISDN digital subscriber board, providing 32 channels of
ISDN access services.

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-95 illustrates the working principle of the H802DSRD board.

Access Module
Figure 3-95 Working principle of the H802DSRD board
Backplane User side
H802DSRD
processing
GE 32*(ISDN)
module
Interface
Control
ISDN
module
module
CPU
board NT1
Backplane Connector
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power

Service Power Clock

signal signal signal
The basic working principle of the H802DSRD board is as follows:

l The CPU module controls calls, processes call protocols, and packages voice data.
l The ISDN service processing module processes the ISDN service of the board, including
extracting signaling and switching data.
l The interface module converts between the media independent interface (MII) interface
and the GE interface.

l In the upstream direction, service data is transmitted to the board through the ISDN
service processing module and is packaged by the CPU module. The interface module
converts the packaged data into GE packets and transmits the packets to the control
board through the GE bus of the board. Then, the packets are transmitted upstream.

Access Module
l In the downstream direction, GE packets are transmitted from the control board to the
interface module of the H802DSRD board through the backplane bus. The GE packets
are decapsulated by the CPU module, processed by the ISDN service processing module,
and then converted into service data. The service data is transmitted to the subscriber
through the interface module.
Front Panel Port
LINE
(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Daughter Board
The H802DSRD board supports a daughter board port, which can be installed with the
H806DSDB daughter board.
Figure 3-96 shows the position of the daughter board on the H802DSRD board.

Access Module
Figure 3-96 Position of the daughter board on the H802DSRD board
DSDB
Table 3-70 describes the daughter board supported by the H802DSRD board.
Table 3-70 Daughter board supported by the H802DSRD board

Daughter board Function Remarks
H806DSDB Supports the VoIP function. Mandatory
Pin Assignments
Table 3-71 describes the pin assignments of the LINE port on the front panel of the
H802DSRD board.

Access Module
Table 3-71 Pin assignments of the LINE port

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.20.9 H802DSRE Board Description

The H802DSRE board is a 32-channel ISDN service board, providing 32 channels of ISDN
access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-97 illustrates the working principle of the H802DSRE board.
Figure 3-97 Working principle of the H802DSRE board
Backplane User side
H802DSRE
processing
GE 32*(ISDN)
module
Interface
Control
ISDN
module
module
CPU
board NT1
Backplane Connector
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power

Service Power Clock

signal signal signal
The basic working principle of the H802DSRE board is as follows:

l The CPU module controls calls, processes call protocols, and packages voice data.
l The ISDN service processing module processes the ISDN service of the board, including
extracting signaling and switching data.
l The interface module converts between the media independent interface (MII) interface
and the GE interface.
l In the upstream direction, service data is transmitted to the board through the ISDN
service processing module and is packaged by the CPU module. The interface module

Access Module
converts the packaged data into GE packets and transmits the packets to the control
board through the GE bus of the board. Then, the packets are transmitted upstream.
l In the downstream direction, GE packets are transmitted from the control board to the
interface module of the H802DSRE board through the backplane bus. The GE packets
are decapsulated by the CPU module, processed by the ISDN service processing module,
and then converted into service data. The service data is transmitted to the subscriber
through the interface module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE Connected the port to the MDF

(0-31)

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Daughter Board
The H802DSRE board supports a daughter board port, which can be installed with the
H806DSDB daughter board.
Figure 3-98 shows the position of the daughter board on the H802DSRE board.

Access Module
Figure 3-98 Position of the daughter board on the H802DSRE board
subboard
Table 3-72 describes the daughter board supported by the H802DSRE board.
Table 3-72 Daughter board supported by the H802DSRE board

Daughter board Function Remarks
H806DSDB Supports the VoIP function. Mandatory
Pin Assignments
Table 3-73 describes the pin assignments of the LINE port on the front panel of the
H802DSRE board.

Access Module
Table 3-73 Pin assignments of the LINE port of the H802DSRE board
Pi Signal Pi Signal Port Pi Signal P Signal
n n n i
n
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 1 TIP24

6
63 RING15 47 RING7 31 RING16 1 RING24

5
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 1 TIP25

4

3
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 1 TIP26

2

1
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 1 TIP27

0
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31
3.20.10 H802EDTB Board Description

The H802EDTB board is a 16 port SHDSL and 16 port E1 service board. It provides 16
channels of TDM SHDSL access services and 16 channels of E1 and V.35 access services.
The H802EDTB board supports E1 services over SHDSL lines and achieves transparent
transmission and convergence for services from E1 ports to SHDSL ports.
NOTE
After the H802EDTB board is upgraded from VER.B to VER.C, all functions remain unchanged.

Access Module

Parameters
Working Principle
Backplane User side
H802EDTB
E1 16*E1 PBX/
Control interface DDN
board module
Service
processing DSP
module module
Backplane Connector
Control module
16*SHDSL TDM
SDHSL
SHDSL
interface
modem
module
-48V Power Clock

DC module module
power


The H802EDTB board provides two 8-channel E1 ports and one 16-channel SHDSL port and
its basic working principle is as follows:
l The control module controls the board, and loads and configures the service processing
logic. The LocalBus and MII interfaces are for the service processing module.
l The service processing module implements switching of the time division multiplexing
(TDM) timeslots and IP packets distribution inside the board, configures and controls the
E1 ports, and provides the HDLC channel for its communication with the control board.
In addition, the service processing module supports packet filtering, traffic control, and
encryption.
l The E1 interface module provides 16 channels of E1 access services and signal
conversion.

Access Module
l The DSP module supports processing of 420-channel DSP packet voice services to
implement the connection of VoIP service to the broadband IP network, and also
supports the processing of the IP voice protocols such as H.248 and MGCP.
l The SHDSL module provides 16 channels of TDM SHDSL services to extend the
transmission distance of 16 channels of E1 services. In addition, the SHDSL module can
be connected to the PRA PBX.
l The clock module extracts the clock signals and generates the clock signals required by
the system.
l The clock module provides working clock for the board chip.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
E1ports Connected DDF
SHDSL port Connected DDF

Access Module
Indicator
r

startup phase


is generated

indicator activated

activated
Daughter Board
To provide relevant functions, the H802EDTB board must be configured with a matched
daughter board. Figure 3-99 shows the position of the daughter board on the H802EDTB
board.

Access Module
Figure 3-99 Position of the daughter board on the H802EDTB board
ELCA
ETCB
Table 3-74 lists the daughter boards that are supported by the H802EDTB board.
Table 3-74 Daughter boards supported by the H802EDTB board

Daughter board Port Function
H602ETCB HW port and MII port Processes the algorithm of VoIP

compression and decompression.
H802ELCA E1 port Supports the E1 port.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-75 describes the pin assignments of the E1 port on the front panel of the H802EDTB
board.

Access Module
Table 3-75 Pin assignments of the E1 port

Pin Signal Port Pin Signal
30 TT0 8 TR7
1 16
15 TR0 37 RR1
31
44 PGND 2 22 RT1
29 TT1 7 TT7
14 TR1 36 RR2
43 PGND 21 RT2
28 TT2 6 PGND
13 TR2 14 44 35 RR3
42 PGND 30 20 RT3
15
27 TT3 5 PGND
12 TR3 34 RR4
41 PGND 19 RT4
26 TT4 4 PGND
11 TR4 33 RR5
40 PGND 18 RT5
25 TT5 3 PGND
10 TR5 32 RR6
39 PGND 17 RT6
24 TT6 2 PGND
9 TR6 31 RR7
38 RR0 16 RT7
23 RT0 1 PGND
NOTE
l In Table 3-75, the first letter "R" or "T" in each cell of the signal column refer to "Receive" or "Transmit"
of E1 signals.
l In Table 3-75, the second letter "R" or "T" in each cell of the signal column refers to "ring" or "tip" of the
75-ohm E1 signal cable, or refers to sign + or – of the 120-ohm E1 signal cable.
Table 3-76 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL port on the front panel of the
H802EDTB board.

Access Module
Table 3-76 Pin assignments of the xDSL port

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 - 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 - 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 - 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 - 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 - 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 - 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 - 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 - 2 -
49 33 17 1
Jumper Settings
The H802EDTB board provides five sets of jumpers, as shown in Figure 3-100.

Access Module
Figure 3-100 Layout of the jumpers on the H802EDTB board
J15
J16
J17 J18 J21
J11
The jumpers support the following functions:
l Jumpers J15, J16, J17, and J18 are used to set whether to ground the shield layer of the
E1 port.
– The jumper caps should be removed (which means ungrounded) if the transmit and
receive resistance is 120 ohms.
– The jumper caps should be installed (which means grounded) if the transmit and
receive resistance is 75 ohms.
l Jumpers J11 and J21 are used to query through software whether the shield layer of the
E1 port is grounded. The setting of jumper J11 must be the same as that of jumper J21.
l It is recommended that the settings of jumpers J15, J16, J17, and J18 be the same as
those of jumpers J11 and J21.
Table 3-77 describes the jumper settings for the H802EDTB board.
Table 3-77 Jumper settings of the H802EDTB board

Jumper Setting Indication Default
Setting
J15, J16, J17, Connected The shield layer of the E1 port is Connected
and J18 grounded.
Disconnected The shield layer of the E1 port is not

grounded.

Access Module
Jumper Setting Indication Default

Setting
J11 and J21 Connected The shield layer of the E1 cable is Connected
grounded.
Disconnected The shield layer of the E1 cable is not

grounded.
Table 3-78 describes the mapping between jumpers J15, J16, J17, J18, and the E1 port.
Table 3-78 Mapping between jumpers J15, J16, J17, J18, and the E1 port
Jump Pin End of E1 Channel Jump Pin End of E1 Channel
er er
J15 1-2 Tx end of the first E1 J17 1-2 Tx end of the 9th E1
channel channel
3-4 Rx end of the first E1 3-4 Rx end of the 9th E1

channel channel
5-6 Tx end of the 2nd E1 5-6 Tx end of the 10th E1

channel channel
7-8 Rx end of the 2nd E1 7-8 Rx end of the 10th E1

channel channel
9-10 Tx end of the 3rd E1 9-10 Tx end of the 11th E1

channel channel
11-12 Rx end of the 3rd E1 11-12 Rx end of the 11th E1

channel channel
13-14 Tx end of the 4th E1 13-14 Tx end of the 12th E1

channel channel
15-16 Rx end of the 4th E1 15-16 Rx end of the 12th E1

channel channel
J16 1-2 Tx end of the 5th E1 J18 1-2 Tx end of the 13th E1
channel channel

channel channel

channel channel

channel channel

channel channel

Access Module
Jump Pin End of E1 Channel Jump Pin End of E1 Channel

er er

channel channel

channel channel

channel channel
Table 3-79 describes the software query (a reserved function) supported by jumper J11 and
J21.
Table 3-79 Software query (a reserved function) supported through jumpers J11 and J21
Jumper Contents Queried Through the
Software
J11 Whether the shield layer of the E1 transmit

end is grounded
J21 Whether the shield layer of the E1 receive

end is grounded
3.20.11 H80AATRB Board Description

H80AATRB is a 32-channel foreign exchange office (FXO) service board, providing direct
access services.

Specification Supported or Not
Ringing detection Yes
Overcurrent protection Yes
CID Yes
G.711A/u Yes
Pulse dialing Yes
DTMF dialing Yes
Configurable port impedance Yes
Hookflash function Yes
ITU K.20; K.45 Yes

Access Module
Specification Supported or Not
EMC complying with Class A Yes
Temperature query and high- Yes

temperature alarm
Automatic shutdown at high Yes

temperature
Polarity reversal detection Yes
Parameters
See "Power Consumption and Maximum Frame Size of Boards".
Working Principle
The working principle of the H80AATRB board is shown in Figure 3-101.
Figure 3-101 Working principle of the H80AATRB board
The functions of all modules of the H80AATRB board are as follows:

l The digital signal processing (DSP) module performs the functions of voice compression
and decompression, IP packet packing and unpacking.

Access Module
l The integrated CPU performs the functions of software loading, running control, and
management.
l DSP manages the voice chipset through the SPI interface, and transmits the voice media
stream through the HW interface.
l The voice chipset codec performs the functions of the data access arrangement (DAA)
chip control, power supply, and HW interface conversion.
l The DAA chip performs the functions of ringing current detection, line polarity
detection, onhook, offhook, and conversion between analog voice signals and digital
signals.
l The protection module provides a protection capacity of 1.5 kV in differential mode.
The service process of the H80AATRB board is as follows:
l In the upstream direction, the service data is transmitted to the H80AATRB board
through the FXO interface. After being processed by the DAA module, the codec
module, and the DSP module, the service data is transmitted to the control board through
the backplane and then to the upstream device.
DSP module, the codec module, and the DAA module through the backplane bus and the
interface module. After being processed, the service data is transmitted to the subscriber
through the FXO interface.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
Pin Assignments
For pin assignments of the FXO interface on the H80AATRB board, see Table 3-80.

Access Module
Table 3-80 Pin assignments of the FXO port

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.21 ADSL2+ Service Board

ADSL2+ service boards provide ADSL2+ access services using their broadband ports.
3.21.1 32-Channel ADSL2+ Service Board Comparison

The 32-channel ADSL2+ service boards support ADSL2+ over POTS, ADSL2+ over ISDN,
or ADSL2+ access services.

Access Module

Specifications H808ADIF H808ADLE H805ADLF H808ADLF
Applicable Line ADSL2+ over ADSL2+ over ADSL2+ over POTS ADSL2+ over POTS
ISDN POTS
Physical Layer No No No No
Retransmission
(G.INP)
ADSL2+ No No No No
Bonding
INM No No No No
SELT Yes Yes Yes Yes
MELT No No No No
Annex Type l G.992.1 Annex l G.992.1 Annex l G.992.1 Annex l G.992.1 Annex A
B/J A A l G.992.3 Annex
l G.992.3 Annex l G.992.3 Annex l G.992.3 Annex A/L/M (EU32-
B/J A/L/M (EU32- A/L/M (EU32- EU64)
l G.992.5 Annex EU64) EU64) l G.992.5 Annex
B/J l G.992.5 Annex l G.992.5 Annex A/M (EU32-EU64)
A/M (EU32- A/M (EU32-
EU64) EU64)
Flexible Supports RFC2662 and RFC4706. (Users with a super user account can log in to the
Configuration system and run the switch adsl mode to command in diagnose mode to switch between the
Modes configuration modes. The default configuration mode is RFC2662)
Connector Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin
Built-in Splitter No Yes (600-ohm No No

pure impedance
splitter)
Temperature Yes Yes Yes Yes

Query and
High-
temperature
Alarm
Automatic No Yes (Supported by No Yes (Supported by

Power V800R009C00 V800R009C00 and
Shutdown in and later) later)
Case of a High
Temperature
3.21.2 64-Channel ADSL2+ Service Board Comparison

The 64-channel ADSL2+ service boards support ADSL2+ over POTS, ADSL2+ over ISDN,
or ADSL2+ access services.

Access Module

Specificat H802ADP H805ADP H802ADQ H802ADKM H80BADPE/ H808ADPM/
ions D D/ D H807ADPE H807ADPM
H807ADP
D
Applicabl ADSL2+ ADSL2+ ADSL2+ ADSL2+ ADSL2+ over ADSL2+ over

e Line over POTS over POTS over ISDN POTS POTS
Physical Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Layer
Retransmi
ssion
(G.INP)
ADSL2+ Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Bonding (Supported (Supported (Supported by (Supported by (Supported by
by by V800R011C00 V800R010C00 V800R010C00
V800R011C V800R009 and later) and later) and later)
00 and later) C00 and
later)
INM Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
SELT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MELT No No No Yes No Yes
Annex l G.992.1 l G.992.1 l G.992.3 l G.992.3 l G.992.1 l G.992.1

Type Annex A Annex Annex B Annex B/J Annex A Annex A
l G.992.3 A l G.992.5 l G.992.5 l G.992.3 l G.992.3
Annex l G.992.3 Annex B Annex B/J Annex Annex
A/L/M Annex A/L/M A/L/M/J
(EU32- A/L/M (EU32- (EU32-
EU64) (EU32- EU64) EU64)
l G.992.5 EU64) l G.992.5 l G.992.5
Annex l G.992.5 Annex Annex
A/M Annex A/M A/M/J
(EU32- A/M (EU32- (EU32-
EU64) (EU32- EU64) EU64)
EU64)
Flexible Supports RFC2662, RFC4706, and TR165. (Users with a super user account can log in to the
Configura system and run the switch adsl mode to command in diagnose mode to switch between the
tion configuration modes. The default configuration mode is RFC2662. Considering the current
Modes development trend, it is recommended that you use TR165, which is more flexible than the
others)
Connector Champ 64- Champ 64- Champ 64- Champ 64-pin Delander 64- Champ 64-pin
pin pin pin pin

Access Module
Specificat H802ADP H805ADP H802ADQ H802ADKM H80BADPE/ H808ADPM/

ions D D/ D H807ADPE H807ADPM
H807ADP
D
Built-in No No No No Yes (600-ohm No

Splitter pure
impedance
splitter)
Temperat Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ure Query
and High-
temperatu
re Alarm
Automatic Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power
Shutdown
in Case of
a High
Temperat
ure
3.21.3 H805ADIF Board Description

The H805ADIF board is a 32-port ADSL2+ over ISDN service board. It works with the
ADSL terminal unit-remote end (ATU-R) through the ADSL2+ port to provide 32 channels of
ADSL2+ signals.

Please refer to "32-Channel ADSL2+ Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-102 Working principle of the H805ADIF board
Front panel
Backplane
H808ADIF
GE
Control Forwarding module
board ADSL2+
over
Protection module ISDN
ATU-R
Interface DC ADSL2+
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control
module
ISDN
-48V Power Clock
DC module module PSTN
power


The basic working principle of the H805ADIF board is as follows:

l The protection module protects and isolates the board from lightning strikes. The DC
block isolates the direct current. The protector protects the high voltage.
l The interface module supports two functions:
– In the upstream direction, the interface module converts line signals into a cell flow,
aggregates the flow to the forwarding module, and then reorganizes the flow into
ATM packets.
– In the downstream direction, the forwarding module transmits the ATM cell flow to
the interface module. Then, the interface module converts the flow into downstream
line signals.
l The forwarding module processes services. The detailed process is described later.

Access Module
l In the upstream direction, the interface module transmits subscriber line signals to the
forwarding module. The forwarding module reorganizes the cell flow into ATM packets,
encapsulates the ATM packets into IP packets, and performs CAR on the IP packets.
Controlled by the logical switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the backplane bus
through the backplane interface.
l In the downstream direction, the forwarding module decapsulates the IP packets from the
backplane bus, performs CAR on the IP packets, reorganizes the IP packets into ATM
packets, and transmits the ATM packets to the interface module. The interface module
converts the packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL Connected the port to the

(0-31) MDF or xDSL port of the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
l When cables from the xDSL ports are routed to an outdoor environment or the user side,
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H805ADIF board.

Access Module
Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the xDSL port on the front panel of the H805ADIF board
Pin Sig Pin Sign Port Pin Sig Pin Signa
nal al nal l
48 15 40 7 49 16 57 24
64 32
16 8 17 25
47 14 39 6 50 17 58 25
15 7 18 26
46 13 38 5 51 18 59 26
14 6 19 27
45 12 37 4 52 19 60 27
13 5 20 28
44 11 36 3 53 20 61 28
12 4 21 29
43 10 35 2 54 21 62 29
11 3 22 30
42 9 34 1 55 22 63 30
10 2 23 31
33 1
41 8 33 0 56 23 64 31
9 1 24 32
3.21.4 H808ADIF Board Description

The H808ADIF board is a 32-port ADSL2+ over ISDN service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ signals.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-103 Working principle of the H808ADIF board
Front panel
Backplane
H808ADIF
GE
board ADSL2+
over
ATU-R
Interface DC ADSL2+
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control
module
ISDN
-48V Power Clock
power


The basic working principle of the H808ADIF board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL Connected the port to the MDF

(0~31) or xDSL port of the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H808ADIF board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1
3.21.5 H808ADLE Board Description

H808ADLE is a 32-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. Using its ADSL2+ port, the
H808ADLE board works with the ADSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (ATU-R) to
provide 32 channels of ADSL2+ access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-104 Working principle of the H808ADLE board
Backplane Front panel
H808ADLE
GE
board
Protection module
Interface DC
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
LINE
ATU-R
Control SPL
module module PSTN
PSTN
-48V Power Clock
DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H808ADLE board is as follows:

manages the board.
l The splitter in the interface module separates ADSL2+ signals and POTS signals from
ADSL2+ over POTS signals sent by the ATU-R. The interface module converts
ADSL2+ signals into cell flows, aggregates the cell flows to the forwarding module, and
then reassembles the cell flows into ATM packets. The POTS signals are transmitted to
the PSTN device through the PSTN port. In the opposite direction, the splitter in the
interface module combines the ADSL2+ signals from the forwarding module and the
POTS signals from the PSTN device into ADSL2+ over POTS signals. Such signals are
transmitted to the ATU-R through the LINE port.

Access Module
l The forwarding module processes and sends the input information to the backplane bus
l In the upstream direction, the interface module transmits line signals to the forwarding
module. The forwarding module reassembles the cell flows into ATM packets, converts
the ATM packets into Ethernet packets, and performs CAR on the Ethernet packets. The
Ethernet packets are transmitted to the control switch and then to the backplane bus
l In the downstream, the forwarding module reassembles the Ethernet packets from the
backplane bus into ATM packets, and then transmits the ATM packets to the interface
module. The interface module then converts the ATM packets into analog signals, and
transmits the analog signals over the subscriber line.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
PSTN
(0-31)
MDF
LINE Connected the port to the

(0-31) MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
l When cables from the PSTN and LINE ports are routed to an outdoor environment, the
MDF must be installed with a protective unit.
l When cables from the LINE port are routed to the user side, the MDF must be installed
with a protective unit.
l The PSTN port must be connected to an MDF with a protective unit or a POTS device.
Otherwise, when the LINE port is struck by lightning, energy inside the SPL board or unit
fluctuates and overlaps, which may damage the LINE port.
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-85 describes the pin assignments of the LINE/PSTN port on the front panel of the
H808ADLE board.

Access Module
Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the LINE/PSTN port on the front panel of the H808ADLE
board
Pin Sign Pin Sign Port Pin Sign Pin Sign
al al al al
64 15 48 7 32 16 16 24
64 32
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 33 1 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1
3.21.6 H805ADLF Board Description

The H805ADLF board is a 32-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ signals.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-105 Working principle of the H805ADLF board
Front panel
Backplane
H808ADLF
GE
board ADSL2+
over
Protection module POTS
ATU-R
Interface DC ADSL2+
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control
module
POTS
-48V Power Clock
power


The basic working principle of the H805ADLF board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port


Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H805ADLF board.

Access Module
Table 3-86 Pin assignments of the xDSL port on the front panel of the H805ADLF board
Pin Sig Pin Sign Port Pin Sig Pin Signa
nal al nal l
48 15 40 7 49 16 57 24
64 32
16 8 17 25
47 14 39 6 50 17 58 25
15 7 18 26
46 13 38 5 51 18 59 26
14 6 19 27
45 12 37 4 52 19 60 27
13 5 20 28
44 11 36 3 53 20 61 28
12 4 21 29
43 10 35 2 54 21 62 29
11 3 22 30
42 9 34 1 55 22 63 30
10 2 23 31
33 1
41 8 33 0 56 23 64 31
9 1 24 32
3.21.7 H808ADLF Board Description

The H808ADLF board is a 32-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ signals.

Parameters
Figure 3-106 shows the working principle of the H808ADLF board.

Access Module
Figure 3-106 Working principle of the H808ADLF board
Front panel
Backplane
H808ADLF
GE
board ADSL2+
over
ATU-R
Interface DC ADSL2+
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control
module
POTS
-48V Power Clock
power


The basic working principle of the H808ADLF board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL Connected the port to

(0~31) the MDF or xDSL port of
the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H808ADLF board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1
3.21.8 H802ADPD Board Description

The H802ADPD board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL terminal unit-remote end (ATU-R) through the ADSL2+ port to access 64 channels of
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-107 Working principle of the H802ADPD board
Front panel
Backplane
H802ADPD
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Interface DC
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control
module
POTS
-48V Power Clock
power


The basic working principle of the H802ADPD board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
converts the ATM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to subscriber
lines.
Front Panel Port

xDSL1
(32-63)
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
For pin assignment of the xDSL0 port, see Table 3-88; For pin assignment of the xDSL1 port,
see Table 3-89;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1

The H805ADPD board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Front panel
Backplane
H805ADPD
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Interface DC
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control
module
POTS
-48V Power Clock
power



ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1 Connected the port to

(32-63) the MDF or xDSL port of
the SPL

the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-91;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.21.10 H80BADPE Board Description

The H80BADPE board is an 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-109 Working principle of the H80BADPE board
The basic working principle of the H80BADPE board is as follows:

line.
ATM packets.
line signals.
l In the upstream direction, the splitter module separates POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals over the subscriber cable, and then the interface module transmits such signals to
the forwarding module. The forwarding module reorganizes the cell flow into ATM
packets, encapsulates the ATM packets into IP packets, and then performs CAR on the IP

Access Module
packets. Controlled by the logical switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the backplane
bus through the backplane interface.
packets, and then transmits the ATM packets to the interface module. The interface
module converts the ATM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to the
subscriber line through the splitter module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE1
(32~63)
Connected the port
to the MDF
LINE0
(0~31)
PSTN1
(32~63)
Connected the port
to the MDF
PSTN0
(0~31)

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the LINE port and that of the PSTN port on the H80BADPE board are
the same. For pin assignment of the PSTN0 port, see Table 3-92; for pin assignment of the
PSTN1 port, see Table 3-93.

Access Module

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59

Access Module

l l l l
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.21.11 H808ADPM Board Description

The H808ADPM board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-110 Working principle of the H808ADPM board

H808ADPM
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Interface DC
Protector
Backplane Connector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control MELT
module module
-48V POTS
DC Power Clock PSTN
power module module


The basic working principle of the H808ADPM board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.
l The MELT module provides the MELT test function for digital subscriber lines.

Access Module
converts the IP packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1 Connected the port to the

(32~63) MDF or xDSL port of the SPL


Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-95;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.21.12 H802ADQD Board Description

The H802ADQD board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over ISDN service board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-111 Working principle of the H802ADQD board

H802ADQD
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control
module
-48V ISDN
DC Power Clock PSTN
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802ADQD board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1
(32-63)
MDF or xDSL port of the
SPL

(0-31) MDF or xDSL port of the
SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-97;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.21.13 H802ADKM Board Description

The H802ADKM board is a 64-port ADSL2+ service board. It works with the ADSL terminal
unit-remote end (ATU-R) through the ADSL2+ port to access 64 channels of ADSL2+
service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-112 Working principle of the H802ADKM board

H802ADKM
GE
board
Protection module
xDSL1
Interface DC
Protector xDSL0 ATU-R
Backplane Connector
module block
Control MELT
module module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802ADKM board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module

lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

(32-63) the MDF
xDSL0 Connected the port

(0-31) to the MDF

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
see Table 3-99;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1

The H807ADPD board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS Service Board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Front panel
Backplane
H807ADPD
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Interface DC
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control
module
POTS
-48V Power Clock
power



ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

the SPL

the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
For pin assignment of the xDSL0 port, see Table 3-100; For pin assignment of the xDSL1
port, see Table 3-101;

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.21.15 H807ADPE Board Description

The H807ADPE board is an 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS Service Board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-114 Working principle of the H807ADPE board
Front panel
Backplane
H807ADPE
GE
board
Protection module
Interface DC
Backplane Connector
Protector
module block
LINE0
LINE1
Control ATU-R
module SPL
module
PSTN
PSTN0
-48V Power Clock PSTN1
DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H807ADPE board is as follows:

line.
ATM packets.

Access Module
line signals.
l In the upstream direction, the splitter module separates POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals over the subscriber cable, and then the interface module transmits such signals to
the forwarding module. The forwarding module reorganizes the cell flow into ATM
packets, encapsulates the ATM packets into IP packets, and then performs CAR on the IP
packets. Controlled by the logical switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the backplane
bus through the backplane interface.
packets, and then transmits the ATM packets to the interface module. The interface
module converts the ATM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to the
subscriber line through the splitter module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE1
(32~63)
Connected the port
to the MDF
LINE0
(0~31)
PSTN1
(32~63)
Connected the port
to the MDF
PSTN0
(0~31)

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the LINE port and that of the PSTN port on the H807ADPE board are
the same. For pin assignment of the PSTN0 port, see Table 3-102; for pin assignment of the
PSTN1 port, see Table 3-103.

Access Module

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59

Access Module

l l l l
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.21.16 H807ADPM Board Description

The H807ADPM board is a 64-port ADSL2+ over POTS Service Board. It works with the
ADSL2+ service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-115 Working principle of the H807ADPM board

H807ADPM
GE
board ADSL2+
over
xDSL0 ATU-R
Interface DC
Protector
Backplane Connector
module block
SPL board
xDSL1
Control MELT
module module
-48V POTS
DC Power Clock PSTN
power module module


The basic working principle of the H807ADPM board is as follows:

ATM packets.
line signals.

Access Module
converts the IP packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22 VDSL2 Service Board

VDSL2 service boards provide VDSL2 access services using their broadband ports.
3.22.1 24-Channel VDSL2 Service Board Comparison

Table 3-106 Specifications lists of 24-channel VDSL2 service boards

Specifications H805VDSA H805VDSF H805VDTF H805VDRD
Applicable Line VDSL2 over POTS VDSL2 over VDSL2 over ISDN VDSL2 over POTS
POTS
G.INP No No No Yes

Access Module
Specifications H805VDSA H805VDSF H805VDTF H805VDRD
VDSL2 PTM No No No Yes (Two-pair,

Bonding adjacent ports (port
IDs: 2n and 2n+1);
either port can be
specified as the master
port. n values 0, 1, 2,
and so on.)
INM No No No Yes
SELT Yes
MELT No No No No
Spectrum Supports 8b and Supports 8c, 8d, Supports 8a, 8c, 8d, Supports 8a, 8b, 8c,
Parameter 17a, and is 12a, 12b, and 17a 12a, 12b, and 17a 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a, and
Profile compatible with 8a, 30a
8c, 8d, 12a, and
12b.
Annex Type l G.992.1 Annex l G.992.1 Annex l G.992.1 Annex B l G.992.1 Annex A
A A l G.992.3 Annex l G.992.3 Annex
l G.992.3 Annex l G.992.3 Annex B/J A/L/M
A/L/M A/L/M l G.992.5 Annex l G.992.5 Annex
l G.992.5 Annex l G.992.5 Annex B/J A/M
A/M A/M l G.993.2 Annex l G.993.2 Annex
l G.993.2 Annex l G.993.2 Annex A/B A/B
A/B A/B
Flexible Supports TR129 and TI. Supports TR129, TI,

Configuration and TR-165/TR-252.
Modes
Built-in Splitter No No No No
Temperature Yes
Query and
High-
temperature
Alarm
Automatic Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power
Shutdown in
Case of a High
Temperature
Connector Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin

Access Module


Specific H805VD H802VD H802VDJ H80BVCM H80BVDM H80BCVM H80DSDM
ations MF NF M M F E M
Applica VDSL2 VDSL2 VDSL2 VDSL2 VDSL2 over VDSL2 and VDSL2
ble Line over over over ISDN POTS POTS
POTS ISDN Combo
G.INP Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VDSL2 Yes (Two- No No Yes (Two- Yes (Four- Yes (Two- Yes
PTM pair, pair, any pair any pair, any (Supports a
Bonding adjacent ports (port ports) ports (port maximum of
ports (port IDs: 2n and IDs: 2n and 4-pair
IDs: 2n 2m+1); only 2m+1); only bonding of
and 2n+1); the port with the port with any ports on
either port an even- an even- the same
can be number ID number ID board,
specified can be can be supports 8-
as the specified as specified as pair bonding
master the master the master when being
port. n port. n and port. n and connected to
values 0, m value 0, m value 0, the
1, 2, and 1, 2, and so 1, 2, and so MA5694)
so on.) on.) on.)
INM Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
SELT Yes
MELT No No Yes Yes No Yes (POTS Yes

MELT)
Spectru Supports 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, and 17a Supports 8a,
m 8b, 8c, 8d,
Paramet 12a, 12b,
er 17a, and 35b
Profile

Access Module
Specific H805VD H802VD H802VDJ H80BVCM H80BVDM H80BCVM H80DSDM

ations MF NF M M F E M
Annex l G. l G. l G.992.3 l G.992.1 l G.992.1 l G.992.1 l G.992.1

Type 992.1 992.3 Annex Annex A Annex A Annex A Annex A
Annex Annex B/J l G.992.3 l G.992.3 l G.992.3 l G.992.3
A B l G.992.5 Annex Annex Annex Annex
l G. l G. Annex A/B/J/L/ A/B/J/L/ A/L/M A/B/J/L/
992.3 992.5 B/J M M l G.992.5 M
Annex Annex l G.993.2 l G.992.5 l G.992.5 Annex l G.992.5
A/B/L/ B Annex Annex Annex A/M Annex
M l G. A/B A/B/J/M A/B/J/M A/B/J/M
l G.993.2
l G. 993.2 l G.993.2 l G.993.2 Annex l G.993.2
992.5 Annex Annex Annex A/B Annex
Annex A/B A/B A/B A/B
A/B/M
l G.
993.2
Annex
A/B
Flexible Supports TR129, TI, and TR-165/TR-252.

Configu
ration
Modes
Built-in No No No No No Yes No
Splitter
Tempera Yes
ture
Query
and
High-
tempera
ture
Alarm
Automat Yes
ic Power
Shutdow
n in
Case of
a High
Tempera
ture
Connect Champ Champ Champ 64- Champ 64- Champ 64- Delander Champ 64-
or 64-pin 64-pin pin pin pin 64-pin pin

Access Module


Spe H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80 H80
cifi BV BV BVD AV 6VC AVC AVC 6CC DV DV DV DCC DSD
cati DPE DP QM DPD PE PD PM PE CPE CPD CP PE PM
ons M M
Ap VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS VDS
plic L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2
able over over over over over over over and over over over and over
Lin POT POT ISDN POT POT POT POT POT POT POT POT POT POT
e S S S S S S S S S S S S
Com Com
bo bo
G.I Yes Yes( Yes

NP Supp
orts
only
down
strea
m
G.IN
P)
VD Yes (Two-pair, any Yes (Supports a maximum of 4-pair bonding of any ports on the same Yes
SL2 ports (port IDs: 2 n board, supports 8-pair bonding when being connected to the MA5694) (Sup
PT and 2 m + 1); only the ports
M port with an even- a
Bon number ID can be maxi
din specified as the mum
g master port. n and m of 8-
value 0, 1, 2, and so pair
on.) bondi
ng of
any
ports
on
the
same
board
)
IN Yes
M
SE Yes
LT

Access Module
ons M M
ME No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes

LT (POT (POT
S S
MEL MEL
T) T)
Spe Supports 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, and 17a Supp
ctru orts
m 8a,
Par 8b,
ame 8c,
ter 8d,
Pro 12a,
file 12b,
17a
and
35b

Access Module
ons M M
An l G l G l G. l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G
nex . . 99 . . . . . . . . . .
Typ 9 9 2. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
e 9 9 1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
2. 2. A 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2.
1 1 nn 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A A ex A A A A A A A A A A
n n B n n n n n n n n n n
n n l G. n n n n n n n n n n
e e 99 e e e e e e e e e e
x x 2. x x x x x x x x x x
A A 3 A A A A A A A A A A
l G l G A l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G l G
. . nn . . . . . . . . . .
9 9 ex 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
2. 2. l G. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2.
3 3 99 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A 2. A A A A A A A A A A
n n 5 n n n n n n n n n n
n n A n n n n n n n n n n
e e nn e e e e e e e e e e
x x ex x x x x x x x x x x
A A B A A A A A A A A A A
/L / /L /L /L /L /L /L / / /L /
/ l G. / / / / / / /
B B B B
M 99 M M M M M M M
/J /J /J /J
3.
l G /L l G l G l G l G l G l G /L /L l G /L
2
. / . . . . . . / / . /
A
9 M 9 9 9 9 9 9 M M 9 M
nn
9 l G ex 9 9 9 9 9 9 l G l G 9 l G
2. . A/ 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. . . 2. .
5 9 B 5 5 5 5 5 5 9 9 5 9
A 9 A A A A A A 9 9 A 9
n 2. n n n n n n 2. 2. n 2.
n 5 n n n n n n 5 5 n 5
e A e e e e e e A A e A
x n x x x x x x n n x n
A n A A A A A A n n A n
/ e / / / / / / e e / e
M x M M M M M M x x M x
l G A l G l G l G l G l G l G A A l G A
. / . . . . . . / / . /
9 B 9 9 9 9 9 9 B B 9 B
9 /J 9 9 9 9 9 9 /J /J 9 /J
3. / 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. / / 3. /
M M M M

Access Module
ons M M
2 l G 2 2 2 2 2 2 l G l G 2 l G
A . A A A A A A . . A .
n 9 n n n n n n 9 9 n 9
n 9 n n n n n n 9 9 n 9
e 3. e e e e e e 3. 3. e 3.
x 2 x x x x x x 2 2 x 2
A A A A A A A A A A A A
/ n / / / / / / n n / n
B n B B B B B B n n B n
e e e e
x x x x
A A A A
/ / / /
B B B B
Fle Supports TR129, TI and Supports TR129 and TR1651. Supports TR129, TI and Supp
xibl TR1651. TR1651. orts
e TR12
Con 9, TI
figu and
rati TR16
on 51.
Mo
des
Buil Yes No No No Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No

t-in
Spli
tter
Te Yes
mp
erat
ure
Que
ry
and
Hig
h-
tem
per
atu
re
Ala
rm

Access Module
ons M M
Aut Yes
om
atic
Po
wer
Shu
tdo
wn
in
the
Eve
nt
of a
Hig
h
Te
mp
erat
ure
Con Dela Cha Cham Cha Dela Cha Cha Dela Dela Cha Cha Dela Cha
nect nder mp p 64- mp nder mp mp nder nder mp mp nder mp
or 64- 64- pin 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64-
pin pin pin pin pin pin pin pin pin pin pin pin
3.22.4 H805VDSA Board Description

The H805VDSA is a 24-Port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL
transceiver unit-remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to support the VDSL2 service.

Please refer to "24-Channel VDSL2 Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-116 Working principle of the H805VDSA board
H805VDSA
GE VDSL
Control Forwarding module over
board POTS
VTU-R
Protection module
xDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control POTS
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H805VDSA board is as follows:

l The forwarding module converts between ATM/PTM services and IP services, and also
supports flow control and scheduling.
l The interface module provides the ports for information exchange.
l In the upstream direction, the interface module converts the VDSL2 signals into a cell
flow, aggregates the flow to the forwarding module, and then reorganizes the cell flow
into ATM/PTM packets. The forwarding module encapsulates the reorganized
ATM/PTM packets into IP packets and performs CAR on the IP packets. The IP packets
are transmitted to the backplane bus through the backplane port and then to the control

Access Module
board. After being processed by the control board, the IP packets are transmitted
upstream to the upper level device through the optical or electrical port.
l In the downstream direction, the forwarding logical decapsulates the IP packets from the
Ethernet, performs CAR on the IP packets, reorganizes the IP packets into ATM/PTM
packets, and transmits the ATM/PTM packets to the interface module. The interface
module converts the ATM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to
subscriber lines.
Front Panel Port


Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-109 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL port of the H805VDSA board. The
H805VDSA board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.5 H805VDSF Board Description

The H805VDSF is a 24-Port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL

Parameters

Access Module
Principles
Figure 3-117 Working principle of the H805VDSF board
H805VDSF
GE VDSL
board POTS
VTU-R
Protection module
xDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control POTS
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The H805VDSF board mainly consists of these functional modules: control module,
forwarding module, interface module, power module, and clock module. The basic principles
are described as follows:
l The control module loads the board software, controls the running, and manages the
whole board.
l The forwarding module supports conversion between ATM/PTM services and IP
services, and also supports flow control and scheduling.
The service processing flow is as follows:

Access Module
module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to
subscriber lines.
Port
Table 3-110 Port of the H805VDSF board

Port Function Connection
xDSL Supports 0-23 channels of VDSL2 Use the 5.2.4 32-Channel Inter-
services. Subrack Interconnection Cable
(for 32/24-Channel Board) or
5.2.1 32-Channel Intra-Subrack
Interconnection Cable (for
32/24-Channel Board) to
connect the port to the xDSL port
of the SPL board, or use the
VDSL subscriber cable to
connect the port to the MDF.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

(0-23) or xDSL port of the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-111 describes the pin assignments for the xDSL port of the H805VDSF board. The
H805VDSF board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.6 H805VDTF Board Description

The H805VDTF is a 24-port VDSL2 over ISDN service board. It works with the VDSL

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-118 Working principle of the H805VDTF board
H805VDTF
GE VDSL
board ISDN
VTU-R
Protection module
xDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control ISDN
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H805VDTF board is as follows:

l The forwarding module converts between ATM/PTM services and IP services, and also
supports flow control and scheduling.

Access Module
module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and transmits the signals to
subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

(0~23) or xDSL port of the SPL

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-112 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL port of the H805VDTF board. The
H805VDTF board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.7 H805VDRD Board Description

The H805VDRD board is a 24-Port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the
VDSL transceiver unit-remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to support the VDSL2
service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-119 Working principle of the H805VDRD board
H805VDRD
GE VDSL
board POTS
VTU-R
Protection module
xDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector
module block
SPL board
Control POTS
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H805VDRD board is as follows:

l The forwarding module converts between the ATM/PTM service and the IP service, and
also supports flow control and scheduling.

Access Module
board. After being processed by the control board, the IP packets are transmitted to the
upper level device through the optical or electrical port.
l In the downstream direction, the forwarding logic decapsulates the IP packets from the
backplane bus, performs CAR on the IP packets, reorganizes the IP packets into
ATM/PTM packets, and transmits the ATM/PTM packets to the interface module. The
interface module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and then transmits
the signals to subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port


Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r
RUN Running Red Blinking The board is in the APP

ALM status startup phase
indicator

repeatedly)

indicator activated
Pin Assignments
H805VDRD board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.8 H80BVDMF Board Description

The H80BVDMF is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-120 Working principle of the H80BVDMF board
The basic working principle of the H805VDMF board is as follows:

ATM/PTM packets and performs CAR on the ATM/PTM packets to convert them into IP
packets. The IP packets are transmitted to the backplane bus through the backplane port
and then to the control board. After being processed by the control board, the IP packets
are transmitted upstream to the upper level device through the optical or electrical port.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.9 H805VDMF Board Description

The H805VDMF is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-121 Working principle of the H805VDMF board
H805VDMF
GE VDSL
board POTS
VTU-R
Protection module xDSL1
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector xDSL0
module block
SPL board
Control POTS
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H805VDMF board is as follows:


Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.10 H80BVCMM Board Description

The H80BVCMM is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL
transceiver unit-remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to support the VDSL2 service
and supporting vectoring.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-122 Working principle of the H80BVCMM board
The basic working principle of the H80BVCMM board is as follows:

l The framer module forwards vectoring data.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1 Connected to the MDF or

(24-47) xDSL port of the SPL board


Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.11 H80DSDMM Board Description

The H80DSDMM is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. It works with the VDSL
transceiver unit-remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to provide VDSL2 access
service and support SuperVector.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-123 Working principle of the H80DSDMM board
The basic working principle of the H80DSDMM board is as follows:


Access Module
Front Panel Port
SDMM



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.12 H802VDNF Board Description

The H802VDNF board is a 48-port VDSL2 over ISDN Service board. It works with the
VDSL transceiver unit-remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to support the VDSL2
service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-124 Working principle of the H802VDNF board
H802VDNF
GE VDSL
board ISDN
VTU-R
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector xDSL0
module block
SPL board
Control ISDN
module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802VDNF board is as follows:

l The interface module supports modulation and demodulation of the VDSL2 service.

Access Module
backplane, performs CAR on the IP packets, reorganizes the IP packets into ATM/PTM
module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and then transmits the
signals to subscriber lines.

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.13 H802VDJM Board Description

The H802VDJM board is 48-port VDSL2 over ISDN service board. It works with the VDSL
Transceiver Unit-Remote end (VTU-R) through the VDSL port to provide 48 channels of
broadband VDSL2 access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-125 Working principle of the H802VDJM board
H802VDJM
GE VDSL
board ISDN
VTU-R
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector xDSL0
module block
SPL board
Control MELT ISDN
module module PSTN
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802VDJM board is as follows:

l The interface module supports modulation and demodulation of the VDSL2 service.

Access Module
backplane, performs CAR on the IP packets, reorganizes the IP packets into ATM/PTM
module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and then transmits the

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1
(24-47) Connected to the MDF
xDSL0
Connected to the MDF
(0-23)

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 -
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 39 48 31 64 32 32 40 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 38 46 30 30 41 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 37 44 29 28 42 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 36 42 28 26 43 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 35 40 27 24 44 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 34 38 26 22 45 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 33 36 25 20 46 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 32 34 24 18 47 2 -
49 33 17 1
3.22.14 H80AVCPD Board Description

H80AVCPD is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80AVCPD board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to
provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access service. In addition.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-126 Working principle of the H80AVCPD board
The basic working principle of the H80AVCPD board is as follows:


l In the upstream direction, the interface module converts the VDSL2 line signals into cell
flows, aggregates the cell flows to the forwarding module, and then reassembles the cell
flows into PTM packets. The forwarding module encapsulates the reassembled PTM
packets into IP packets, performs CAR on the IP packets, and then sends the IP packets
to the backplane bus through the backplane port and then to the control board. After
being processed by the control board, the IP packets are transmitted upstream to the
upper-level device through the optical or electrical port.
PTM packets, and then transmits the PTM packets to the interface module. The interface
module then converts the PTM packets into analog signals, and transmits the analog
signals over the subscriber line.

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
Table 3-126 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL0 port on the front panel of the
H80AVCPD board, and Table 3-127 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80AVCPD board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.15 H80AVCPM Board Description

H80AVCPM is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80AVCPM board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to
provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-127 Working principle of the H80AVCPM board
The basic working principle of the H80AVCPM board is as follows:



Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
NOTICE
The device supports protection specification 1500 V (the basic standard is ITU-T K.20). If the
device is placed in the scenario where the supported protection specification is higher than
1500 V, a protective unit needs to be configured on the MDF.
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80AVCPM board, and Table 3-129 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80AVCPM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.16 H806VCPE Board Description

H806VCPE is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board with built-in splitter. Using its
VDSL2 port, the H806VCPE board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal
end (VTU-R) to provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-128 Working principle of the H806VCPE board
Backplane Front Panel
H806VCPE
10GE
Control Framer
board module Protection
module
DC
GE/ block
10GE Forwarding Interface
Backplane Connector
module module
Protector
LINE1
Control module LINE0 VTU-R
SPL module PSTN1
-48V PSTN0 PSTN

Power Clock
DC module module
power


The basic working principle of the H806VCPE board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.
l The interface module provides two functions:
– In the upstream direction, the interface module converts line signals into cell flows,
aggregates the cell flows to the forwarding module, and then reassembles the cell
flows into ATM/PTM packets.
– In the downstream direction, the interface module converts the ATM/PTM cell
flows sent from the forwarding module into line signals that are transmitted
downstream.

Access Module
l The forwarding module processes services. For details, see the description of service
processing.
l In the upstream direction, the splitter module separates LINE signals over the subscriber
line into POTS signals and VDSL2 signals, and then the interface module transmits these
signals to the forwarding module. The forwarding module reassembles the cell flow into
ATM/PTM packets, encapsulates the ATM/PTM packets into IP packets, and performs
CAR on the IP packets. Controlled by the logic switch, the IP packets are transmitted to
the backplane bus through the backplane interface.
from the backplane bus, perform CAR on the packets, reassembles the packets into
ATM/PTM packets, and then transmits the ATM/PTM packets to the interface module.
The interface module then converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals, and
transmits the analog signals to the subscriber line through the splitter module.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE1
LINE0
PSTN1
PSTN0

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
The pin assignments of LINE ports are the same as those of the PSTN ports. Table 3-130
describes the pin assignments of the PSTN0 port, and Table 3-131 describes the pin
assignments of the PSTN1 port.

Access Module

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59

Access Module

l l l l
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.22.17 H80AVDPD Board Description

H80AVDPD is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80AVDPD board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-129 Working principle of the H80AVDPD board

Access Module
The basic working principle of the H80AVDPD board is as follows:

manages the board.
flows into PTM packets.
– In the downstream direction, the interface module converts the PTM cell flows sent
from the forwarding module into line signals that are transmitted downstream.
processing.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1 Connected to the MDF

(32-63) or xDSL port of the
SPL board
xDSL0 Connected to the MDF

(0-31) or xDSL port of the
SPL board

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80AVDPD board, and Table 3-133 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80AVDPD board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.18 H80BVDPE Board Description

H80BVDPE is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board with built-in splitter. Using its
VDSL2 port, the H80BVDPE board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal
end (VTU-R) to provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access services.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-130 Working principle of the H80BVDPE board
The basic working principle of the H80BVDPE board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.
downstream.
processing.


Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE1
(32-63)
LINE0
(0-31)
PSTN1
PSTN0
(0-31)

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59

Access Module

l l l l
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.22.19 H80BVDPM Board Description

H80BVDPM is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80BVDPM board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-131 Working principle of the H80BVDPM board
The basic working principle of the H80BVDPM board is as follows:

manages the board.
flows into PTM packets.
– In the downstream direction, the interface module converts the PTM cell flows sent
from the forwarding module into line signals that are transmitted downstream.
processing.

Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80BVDPM board, and Table 3-137 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80BVDPM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.20 H80DVCPD Board Description

H80DVCPD is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS Service Board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80DVCPD board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to
provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access service. In addition, it supports vectoring.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-132 Working principle of the H80DVCPD board
The basic working principle of the H80DVCPD board is as follows:



Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80DVCPD board, and Table 3-139 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80DVCPD board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.21 H80DVCPE Board Description

H80DVCPE is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS Service Board with built-in splitter. Using its
VDSL2 port, the H80DVCPE board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal
end (VTU-R) to provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access services. In addition, it supports
vectoring.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-133 Working principle of the H80DVCPE board
The basic working principle of the H80DVCPE board is as follows:

manages the board.
line.
downstream.
processing.


Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
LINE1
LINE0
PSTN1
PSTN0

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59

Access Module

l l l l
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.22.22 H80DVCPM Board Description

H80DVCPM is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS Service Board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80DVCPM board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to
provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access service. In addition, it supports vectoring.

Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-134 Working principle of the H80DVCPM board

Access Module
The basic working principle of the H80DVCPM board is as follows:


Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
The device supports protection specification 1500 V (the basic standard is ITU-T K.20). If the
device is placed in the scenario where the supported protection specification is higher than
1500 V, a protective unit needs to be configured on the MDF.
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80DVCPM board, and Table 3-143 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80DVCPM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.23 H80DSDPM Board Description

H80DSDPM is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80DSDPM board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to
provide 64 channels of VDSL2 access services. In addition, it supports SuperVector and
MELT.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-135 Working principle of the H80DSDPM board
The basic working principle of the H80DSDPM board is as follows:


Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.22.24 H80BVDQM Board Description

H80BVDQM is a 64-port VDSL2 over ISDN service board. Using its VDSL2 port, the
H80BVDQM board works with the VDSL transceiver unit, remote terminal end (VTU-R) to

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-136 Working principle of the H80BVDQM board
The basic working principle of the H80BVDQM board is as follows:

manages the board.
downstream.
processing.
flows into ATM/PTM packets. The forwarding module encapsulates the reassembled
ATM/PTM packets into IP packets, performs CAR on the IP packets, and then sends the
IP packets to the backplane bus through the backplane port and then to the control board.

Access Module
After being processed by the control board, the IP packets are transmitted upstream to
the upper-level device through the optical or electrical port.
transmits the analog signals over the subscriber line.

Access Module
Front Panel Port



Access Module
NOTICE
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80BVDQM board, and Table 3-147 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port on the
front panel of the H80BVDQM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1

Access Module

l l l l
64 47 48 39 64 32 32 48 16 56
63 47 31 15
62 46 46 38 30 49 14 57
61 45 29 13
60 45 44 37 28 50 12 58
59 43 27 11
58 44 42 36 26 51 10 59
57 41 25 9
56 43 40 35 24 52 8 60
55 39 23 7
54 42 38 34 22 53 6 61
53 37 21 5
52 41 36 33 20 54 4 62
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 40 34 32 18 55 2 63
49 33 17 1
3.23 Vectoring Processing Board

The Vectoring processing board provides the Vertoring feature, and it is used to eliminate the
signal crosstalk in the VDSL2 system.
3.23.1 Mapping Between the Vectoring Processing Board with

Other Boards
To implement vectoring, the device needs to be equipped with boards that support this feature.
NOTE
A vectoring board supports vectoring only when this board and VP board use the same R-version board
software.

Access Module
Table 3-148 Vectoring Hardware

Product Board Board Remarks Correspondin Terminals
Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
MA5603T Control SCUB Supports SLV S300/T300/ Vectoring can

board SCUN only. T500 be implemented
on VDSL2 lines
SCUH only when their
SCUK connected
terminals
Backpla H802M None support
ne ABO vectoring.
VP H806V Installed in slot Vectoring-
board PEA 12 fixedly. supported
Huawei
H806V
terminals
PEF
include the
HG612,
HG622,
HG630, and
HG658. For
details about the
version of these
terminals in
supporting
vectoring, see
the product
documents of
these terminals.

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
VDSL2 l H80 l The

board BV H80BVCM
CM M board is a
M 48-channel
l H80 VDSL2 over
DC POTS access
CPE service
board.
l H80
DV l The
CPD H80DCCPE
board is a
l H80 64-channel
DV VDSL2&PO
CPE TS Combo
l H80 Board with
DV built-in
CP splitter.
M l The
l H80 H80DVCPD
DSD board is a
MM 64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board.
l The
H80DVCPE
board is a
64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board,
equipped
with a built-
in splitter.
l The
H80DVCP
M board is a
64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board.
l H80DSDM
M: 48-
channel

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
SuperVector
access
service
board.
MA5600T Control SCUB Supports SLV N/A

board SCUN only.
SCUH
SCUK
Backpla H802M None

ne ABC
H803M
ABC
VP H806V Consistently
board PGA installed in slot
8 and slot 11.

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
VDSL2 l H80 l The

board BV H80BVCM
CM M board is a
M 48-channel
l H80 VDSL2 over
DC POTS access
CPE service
board.
l H80
DV l The
CPD H80DCCPE
board is a
l H80 64-channel
DV VDSL2&PO
CPE TS Combo
l H80 Board with
DV built-in
CP splitter.
M l The
H80DVCPD
board is a
64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board.
l The
H80DVCPE
board is a
64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board,
equipped
with a built-
in splitter.
l The
H80DVCP
M board is a
64-channel
VDSL2 over
POTS access
service
board.

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
MA5623A N/A N/A The N/A

R MA5623AR
extended
subrack can be
considered as
the extension
service board
for the main
subrack. The
main subrack
manages the
MA5623AR
extended
subrack in the
same way as it
manages its
service boards.
The
MA5623AR
extended
subrack
provides the
same functions
as the VDSL2
board of the
main subrack.
MA5616 Control H831C Supports SLV S200/S100

board CUE and NLV.
Daughte UP2CA None

r board /
UP2AA
Backpla H831M None

ne ABB

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
VP H836V l H836VPBA/
board PBA H836VPME
H836V : A daughter
PDA board for
SLV;
H836V attached to
PME the power
board.
l H836VPDA:
A daughter
board for
NLV;
attached to
the power
board. It
only can be
used
together
with
H83BVCM
M,
H83BVCLE
or
H83BVCLF
board for
vectoring.

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
VDSL2 H83BV l H83BVCM

board CMM M/
H83DV H83DVCM
CMM M: 48-
channel
H83BV VDSL2
CLE access
H83BV service
CLF board.
H83DC l H83BVCLE
CME /
H83DS H83BVCLF:
DMM 32-channel
VDSL2
access
service
board.
l H83DCCM
E: 48-
channel
VDSL2&PO
TS combo
board.
l H83DSDM
M: 48-
channel
SuperVector
access
service
board.
Power H831P l H831PAVD

board AVDA A: An AC
H832P power board
DVAA for SLV.
H832P l H832PDVA
DNAA A: A DC
power board
H832P for SLV.
DMSB
l H832PDNA
A: A DC
power board
for NLV.
l H832PDMS
B: A DC
power board
for SLV.

Access Module

Type Name g Outdoor
Cabinet
MA5622A Control HS22C Supports SLV N/A

board CVB only.
MA5623A Control HS22C Supports SLV N/A

board CVW only.
MA5611S Integrate N/A Supports SLV N/A

d device only.
MA5811S Integrate N/A Supports G.fast N/A

d device Vectoring.
Table 3-149 SuperVector Hardware
Product Board Type Board Name Remarks
MA5603T Control board SCUB SCUN is recommended.

SCUN
SCUK
Backplane H802MABO None
VP board H806VPEF Installed in slot 12 fixedly.
SuperVector H80DSDMM A 48-channel SuperVector

board access service board.
H80DSDPM A 64-channel SuperVector

access service board.
H80DCSPE A 64-channel SuperVector

access service board.
3.23.2 H806VPEA Board Description

The H806VPEA board is a vectoring centralized processing board, and it works with the
vectoring-supporting VDSL2 board to achieve vectoring on the MA5603T. It provides the
clock source for the system and supports functions such as input and output of alarm digital
parameters.
Overview
The H806VPEA board supports the following functions and features:

Access Module
l Two inputs of 1 PPS+TOD time signals

l The control board pass-through RS-485 monitoring serial port, and providing
environmental monitoring channel with the main control board
l Automatic power shutdown in case of a high temperature (only supported by
H802SCUN)
l Working with the H802MABO backplane and installed in the GPIO slot of the subrack.
l G.993.5
Parameters
Working Principles
Figure 3-137 Working principles of the H806VPEA board
Backplane User side
H806VPEA
BITS/TOD IN0
BITS
BITS/TOD IN1
Module
BITS/TOD OUT
High speed
120GE connector
Control and service
integration module
COM
Main/Slave
Backboard Switch
serial signal ALM
connector module
GE control
signal
ETH
-48V DC Power Power Clock

Power connector module module
Power required Clock required

by boards by boards
Service signal Control signal Test signal
Alarm signal Power signal Clock signal

Access Module
The basic working principles of the H806VPEA board are as follows:

l The control and service integration module, including the service processor and
peripheral memory, manages the H806VPEA board and service boards, communicates
with the SPM subrack through a serial port, calculates the link signal compensation for
service boards, achieves the energy-saving control, detects the slot information and types
of service boards, performs the clock frequency-dividing detection, and records the
restart information.
l The switching module provides four GE ports, for the interconnection between the main
control board, control and service integration module, monitoring network port.
l The BITS clock daughter board recovers the 2 Mbit/s clock signals or shapes the 2 MHz
clock signals, which can function as the system clock source.
l The clock module provides the working clock for other function modules of the board.
The service process of the H806VPEA board is as follows:
The H806VPEA board provides 120GE bus signals, and sends these signals to each service
board in a star topology (20GE signals for each service board). This method enables the
H806VPEA board to calculate the link signal compensation for each service board.
Front Panel Port
Connected to the
BITS clock source,
BITS/TOD time source, or lower
stratum clock
GE transparent Connected to the

transmission port Ethernet port of the
peer device
SPM 485 serial port
Connected to an external
Alarm digital
port (used for detecting
parameters port
alarm digital parameters)
or to a control output port

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated


IN0,IN1 IN0 Green On The signals are correct

indicator,
IN1 - Off There are no signals or the
indicator signals are incorrect
ETH ETH Green On The link is normal

indicator
- Off The link is abnormal or no

data is being transmitted
over the link
Pin Assignment
Table 3-150, Table 3-151, Table 3-152, Table 3-153, Table 3-154, Table 3-155 and Table
3-156 show the pin assignments of the BITS/TOD IN0 port, BITS/TOD IN1 port, BITS/TOD
OUT port, ETH port, COM port, ALM port (upper) and ALM port (lower) on the front panel
of the H806VPEA board.

Access Module


8
7
5
3
2 signals
1
signals

signals

signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding


8
7
5
3
2 signals
1
signals

signals

signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding

Access Module

1 TOD_OUT- Negative polarity of the TOD time

8
7 signals output
6
5 2 TOD_OUT+ Positive polarity of the TOD time signals
4
3 output
2
1 3 PPS_OUT- Negative polarity of the PPS time signals
output
4 BITS_OUT_ Output B of the BITS clock signals

B
5 BITS_OUT_ Output A of the BITS clock signals

A
6 PPS_OUT+ Positive polarity of the PPS time signals

output
7 GND Grounding
8 - -
Table 3-153 Pin assignment of the ETH port

1 GE1_MDI_T0+ GE electrical port

8
7
6 2 GE1_MDI_T0-
5
4 3 GE1_MDI_T1+
3
2
1 4 GE1_MDI_T2+
5 GE1_MDI_T2–
6 GE1_MDI_T1-
7 GE1_MDI_T3+
8 GE1_MDI_T3-

Access Module
Table 3-154 Pin assignment of the COM port

1 B_SPM_485_TX+ 485 serial port on the

control board
2 B_SPM_485_TX- 485 serial port on the

control board
3 B_SPM_485_RX+ 485 serial port on the

control board
4 - -
5 - -
6 B_SPM_485_RX- 485 serial port on the

control board
7 - -
8 - -
Table 3-155 Pin assignment of the ALM port (upper)

1 ALM_IN0_+ Positive polarity of

channel 0 alarm digital
parameter signals
2 ALM_IN0_- Negative polarity of

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

Access Module

parameter signals
Table 3-156 Pin assignment of the ALM port (lower)


parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals

parameter signals
7 ALM_OUT_+ Positive polarity of alarm

signal control output
8 ALM_OUT_- Negative polarity of

alarm signal control
output
NOTE
The "upper" and "lower" in Table 3-155 and Table 3-156 refer to the physical location of ALM ports on
the front panel of the H806VPEA board.
3.23.3 H806VPEF Board Description

The H806VPEF board is a SuperVector centralized processing board, Being used on the
MA5603T,it works with the vectoring-supporting VDSL2 board to achieve 17a
Vectoring,works with the SuperVector-supporting VDSL2 board to achieve 35b SuperVector
function. It provides the clock source for the system and supports functions such as input and
output of alarm digital parameters.

Access Module
Overview
The H806VPEF board supports the following functions and features:
l Two inputs of 1 PPS+TOD time signals
l The control board pass-through RS-485 monitoring serial port, and providing
environmental monitoring channel with the main control board
l Automatic power shutdown in case of a high temperature (supported by H802SCUN and
H801SCUK)
l Working with the H802MABO backplane and installed in the GPIO slot of the subrack.
l G.993.5
Parameters
Working Principles
Figure 3-138 Working principles of the H806VPEF board
The basic working principles of the H806VPEF board are as follows:

Access Module
l The control module controls the board operating status.

l The switching module processes signals on the GE interface.
l The panel provides the BITS, clock, and GE interfaces.
l The BITS module receives, transmits, and shapes BTIS signals.
l The power module supplies power to other function modules of the board
l The clock module provides the working clock for other function modules of the board
The H806VPEF board processes services as follows: The H806VPEF board sends 240
channels of GE bus signals to service boards. Each service board processes 40 channels of GE
services, and implements the crosstalk calculation function.
Front Panel Port
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

Access Module

r
Orange Blinking (on for 0.25 A high-temperature alarm

s and off for 0.25 s is generated
repeatedly)


IN0,IN1 IN0 Green On The signals are correct

indicator,
IN1 - Off There are no signals or the
indicator signals are incorrect
ETH ETH Green On The port has a connection

indicator set up
- Off The port has no connection

or no data is being
transmitted over the link
Pin Assignment
Table 3-157, Table 3-158, Table 3-159, Table 3-160, Table 3-161, Table 3-162 and Table
3-163 show the pin assignments of the BITS/TOD IN0 port, BITS/TOD IN1 port, BITS/TOD
OUT port, ETH port, COM port, ALM port (upper) and ALM port (lower) on the front panel
of the H806VPEF board.
1 BITS0_IN_B Input B of channel 0 BITS

8
7 clock signals
6
5 2 BITS0_IN_A Input A of channel 0 BITS
4
3 clock signals
2
1 3 PPS0_IN- Negative polarity of channel 0
PPS time signals
4 TOD0_IN- Negative polarity of channel 0

TOD time signals
5 TOD0_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 0

TOD time signals

Access Module
6 PPS0_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 0

PPS time signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding

1 BITS1_IN_B Input B of channel 1 BITS

8
7 clock signals
6
5 2 BITS1_IN_A Input A of channel 1 BITS
4
3 clock signals
2
1 3 PPS1_IN- Negative polarity of channel 1
PPS time signals
4 TOD1_IN- Negative polarity of channel 1

TOD time signals
5 TOD1_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 1

TOD time signals
6 PPS1_IN+ Positive polarity of channel 1

PPS time signals
7 - -
8 GND Grounding

1 TOD_OUT- Negative polarity of the TOD

8
7 time signals output
6
5 2 TOD_OUT+ Positive polarity of the TOD
4
3 time signals output
2
1 3 PPS_OUT- Negative polarity of the PPS
time signals output
4 BITS_OUT_B Output B of the BITS clock

signals
5 BITS_OUT_A Output A of the BITS clock

signals

Access Module
6 PPS_OUT+ Positive polarity of the PPS

time signals output
7 GND Grounding
8 - -
Table 3-160 Pin assignment of the ETH port

1 GE1_MDI_T0+ GE electrical port

8
7
6 2 GE1_MDI_T0-
5
4 3 GE1_MDI_T1+
3
2
1 4 GE1_MDI_T2+
5 GE1_MDI_T2–
6 GE1_MDI_T1-
7 GE1_MDI_T3+
8 GE1_MDI_T3-
Table 3-161 Pin assignment of the COM port

1 B_SPM_485_T 485 serial port on the control

8
7 X+ board
6
5 2 B_SPM_485_T 485 serial port on the control
4
3 X- board
2
1 3 B_SPM_485_R 485 serial port on the control
X+ board
4 - -
5 - -
6 B_SPM_485_R 485 serial port on the control

X- board
7 - -
8 - -

Access Module
Table 3-162 Pin assignment of the ALM port (upper)

1 ALM_IN0_+ Positive polarity of channel 0

8
7 alarm digital parameter signals
6
5 2 ALM_IN0_- Negative polarity of channel 0
4
2
1 3 ALM_IN1_+ Positive polarity of channel 1
alarm digital parameter signals

5 ALM_IN2_- Negative polarity of channel 2




Table 3-163 Pin assignment of the ALM port (lower)


8
6
5 2 ALM_IN4_- Negative polarity of channel 4
4
2
1 3 ALM_IN5_+ Positive polarity of channel 5



7 ALM_OUT_+ Positive polarity of alarm

8 ALM_OUT_- Negative polarity of alarm


Access Module
NOTE
The "upper" and "lower" in Table 3-162 and Table 3-163 refer to the physical location of ALM ports on
the front panel of the H806VPEF board.
3.23.4 H806VPGA Board Description

The H806VPGA board is a vectoring centralized processing board, and it works with
vectoring-supporting VDSL2 board to achieve vectoring on the MA5600T.
Overview
The H806VPGA board supports the following functions and features:
l Working with the H802MABC and H803MABC backplane and the H806VPGA board
can be installed only in slots 8 and 11. When installed in slot 8, the H806VPGA board
processes the vectoring services of slots 1-6. When installed in slot 11, the H806VPGA
board processes the vectoring services of slots 13-18. Slots 7 and 12 cannot house
vectoring service boards but can house other service boards.
l G.993.5
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principles
Figure 3-139 Working principles of the H806VPGA board
Backplane
H806VPGA
Vectoring VDSL2 board
Control and service integration

BUS
Vectoring VPGA board
BUS
module
Main/Slave
serial signal
Switch
GE control module
signal
-48V DC Power Power Clock

Power connector module module
Power required Clock required

by boards by boards
Service signal Control signal Power signal
Clock signal
The basic working principles of the H806VPGA board are as follows:
l The control and service integration module, manages the H806VPGA board and service
boards, and calculates the link signal compensation for service boards.

Access Module
l The switching module is used for the interconnection between the main control board,
control and sercvice integration module.
l The clock module provides the working clock for other function modules of the board.
The service process of the H806VPGA board is as follows:
l H806VPGA connects with other service boards by vectoring bus, which enables the
H806VPGA board to calculate the link signal compensation for each service board.
l H806VPGA interconnects with the other H806VPGA by vectoring bus, which provides
link signal compensation for vectoring.
Front Panel Port

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup

repeatedly)

is generated

SHDSL service boards provide SHDSL access services using their broadband ports.
3.24.1 SHDSL Service Board Comparison

Table 3-164 Specifications lists of SHDSL service boards
Specific H803SHDA H802SHLB H80ASHLM H802SHGM

ations
Wetting No Yes Yes Yes

current
Board No No Yes Yes

Power-
off
Tempera Yes No Yes Yes

ture
Query
and
High-
temperat
ure
Alarm

Access Module
Specific H803SHDA H802SHLB H80ASHLM H802SHGM

ations
Bonding Yes (M Pair Yes (M Pair and Yes (M Pair, Yes (M Pair and
bonding) EFM bonding ) EFM and IMA EFM bonding )
bonding )
MELT No No Yes Yes
Annex G.991.2 ANNEX G.991.2 Annex G.991.2 Annex G.991.2 Annex

Type A/B(does not A/B (contains A/B (contains A/B (contains
support F/G of F/G of F/G of
SHDSL.bis) SHDSL.bis) SHDSL.bis) SHDSL.bis)
Matchin 32-channel 32-channel 32-channel 32-channel

g Cable subscriber cable subscriber cable subscriber cable subscriber cable
(old wire
sequence)
SHDSL No Yes Yes Yes

regenera
tors
manage
ment
16- Yes Yes Yes Yes

TCPAM/
32-
TCPAM
Modulati No Yes(Supports Yes(Supports Yes

on TCPAM16 and TCPAM16 and
configur TCPAM32) TCPAM32)
ation
Connect Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin Champ 64-pin

or
3.24.2 H803SHDA Board Description

H803SHDA is a 16-port SHDSL service board. It board works with the SHDSL transceiver
unit-remote end (STU-R) to provide 16 channels of SHDSL access services.

Please refer to "SHDSL Service Board Comparison".
Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-140 Working principle of the H803SHDA board
Backplane User side
H803 SHDA
GE
Control Switching module
board
Protection module
16*SHDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC ONT
Protector
module block
Control
module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H803SHDA board is as follows:
manages the board.
l The forwarding module forwards signals. After being processed by the control module,
the signals are then sent to the backplane bus through the backplane connector.
l The interface module inputs, outputs, and converts signals.

forwarding module. The forwarding module reorganizes the cell flow into ATM/PTM
packets, encapsulates the ATM/PTM packets into IP packets, and performs CAR on the
IP packets. Controlled by the logic switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the
backplane bus through the backplane interface.

Access Module
l In the downstream direction, the forwarding module decapsulates the IP packets that are
transmitted from the backplane bus, performs CAR on the packets, reassembles the
packets into ATM/PTM packets, and transmits the ATM/PTM packets to the interface
module. The interface module then converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals,
and transmits the analog signals over the subscriber line.
Front Panel Port
xDSL

Access Module
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H803SHDA board.

Access Module

l l l l
48 15 40 7 64 32 17 - 25 -
16 8 49 57
47 14 39 6 18 - 26 -
15 7 50 58
46 13 38 5 19 - 27 -
14 6 51 59
45 12 37 4 20 - 28 -
13 5 52 60
44 11 36 3 21 - 29 -
12 4 53 61
43 10 35 2 22 - 30 -
11 3 54 62
42 9 34 1 23 - 31 -
33 1
10 2 55 63
41 8 33 0 24 - 32 -
9 1 56 64
3.24.3 H802SHLB Board Description

The H802SHLB is a 16-port SHDSL.bis service board. The SHDSL port cooperates with the
SHDSL transceiver unit-remote (STU-R) to provide 16 channels of the SHDSL service.

Parameters

Access Module
Working Principle
Figure 3-141 Working principle of the H802SHLB board
Backplane User side
H802SHLB
GE
Control Switching module
board
Protection module
16*SHDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC STU-R
Protector
module block
Control
module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802SHLB board is as follows:

l The forwarding module processes the signals. After being processed by the control
module, the signals are transmitted to the backplane bus through the interface of the
backplane.
l The interface module inputs, outputs, and converts the signals.
IP packets. Controlled by the logical switch, the IP packets are transmitted to the

Access Module
interface module converts the ATM/PTM packets into analog signals and transmits the
Front Panel Port
xDSL

Access Module
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H802SHLB board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 - 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 - 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 - 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 - 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 - 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 - 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 - 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 - 2 -
49 33 17 1
Daughter Board
The H802SHLB board provides one daughter board port that can hold one daughter board.
Figure 3-142 shows the position of the daughter board on the H802SHLB board.

Access Module
Figure 3-142 Position of the daughter board on the H802SHLB board
Daughter board
Table 3-167 describes the daughter board supported by the H802SHLB board.
Table 3-167 Daughter board supported by the H802SHLB board

board
H806SHUAB The functional module of logical Mandatory

processing is integrated on the daughter
board to support the protocol process
and frame format conversion of the
service data stream.
3.24.4 H80ASHLM Board Description

The H80ASHLM board is a 16-port SHDSL.bis service board. It works with the SHDSL
transceiver unit-remote (STU-R) to provide 16-channels of SHDSL services.


Access Module
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-143 Working principle of the H80ASHLM board
The basic working principle of the H80ASHLM board is as follows:

backplane.

Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL
(0～15) Connected to the MDF

Access Module
Indicator
r

0.25 s repeatedly)

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H80ASHLM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 - 16 -
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 - 14 -
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 - 12 -
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 - 10 -
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 - 8 -
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 - 6 -
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 - 4 -
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 - 2 -
49 33 17 1
Daughter Board
The H80ASHLM board provides one daughter board port that can hold one daughter board.
Figure 3-144 shows the position of the daughter board on the H80ASHLM board.

Access Module
Figure 3-144 Position of the daughter board on the H80ASHLM board
Daughter board
Table 3-169 describes the daughter board supported by the H80ASHLM board.
Table 3-169 Daughter board supported by the H80ASHLM board

Board
SHUI The functional module of logical Mandatory

processing is integrated on the daughter
board to support the protocol process
and frame format conversion of the
service data stream.
3.24.5 H802SHGM Board Description

The H802SHGM board is a 32-port SHDSL.bis service board. It works with the SHDSL
transceiver unit-remote (STU-R) to provide 32-channels of SHDSL services.


Access Module
Parameters
Working Principle
Figure 3-145 Working principle of the H802SHGM board
H802SHGM
GE
board
Protection module
32*SHDSL
Backplane Connector
Interface DC
Protector STU-R
module block
Control MELT
module module
-48V
DC Power Clock
power module module


The basic working principle of the H802SHGM board is as follows:
backplane.

Access Module

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL

Access Module
Indicator
r


startup phase

is generated

indicator activated

activated
Pin Assignments
H802SHGM board.

Access Module

l l l l
64 15 48 7 64 32 32 16 16 24
63 47 31 15
62 14 46 6 30 17 14 25
61 45 29 13
60 13 44 5 28 18 12 26
59 43 27 11
58 12 42 4 26 19 10 27
57 41 25 9
56 11 40 3 24 20 8 28
55 39 23 7
54 10 38 2 22 21 6 29
53 37 21 5
52 9 36 1 20 22 4 30
33 1
51 35 19 3
50 8 34 0 18 23 2 31
49 33 17 1
3.25 ADSL2+ SPL Board

The ADSL SPL board separates narrowband signals from ADSL signals.
3.25.1 Differences Between ADSL SPL Boards

ADSL SPL boards separate ADSL2+ broadband signals from POTS/ISDN narrowband
signals.
By access user quantity, ADSL SPL boards can be classified into 32-channel ADSL SPL
board and 64-channel ADSL SPL board.
l A 32-channel ADSL SPL board works with a 32-channel ADSL2+ service board.
l A 64-channel ADSL SPL board works with a 64-channel ADSL2+ service board.
Differences Between 32-channel ADSL SPL Boards

Table 3-171 lists the major differences between 32-channel ADSL SPL boards.

Access Module
Table 3-171 Major differences between 32-channel ADSL SPL boards

Board Port Impedance Applicable Applicable
Line Service Board
H801SPLF 600-ohm impedance POTS l H805ADLF

l H808ADLF
H801SPLH 2B1Q or 4B3T ISDN H808ADIF
H801SPLL Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 POTS l H805ADLF

01 01 option A) l H808ADLF
Differences Between 64-channel ADSL SPL Boards

By the front panel appearance, 64-channel ADSL SPL boards can be classified into two types:
boards with common front panel and boards with embedded front panel. These two types of
boards are applicable to different subracks and use different cables. Therefore, they cannot be
used together.
NOTE
l Ports on the board with common front panel (from top to bottom): xDSL0, xDSL1, LINE1, LINE0,
PSTN1, and PSTN0
l Ports on the board with embedded front panel (from top to bottom): xDSL1, xDSL0, LINE0, LINE1,
PSTN0, and PSTN1
Figure 3-146 shows the appearance difference between 64-channel ADSL SPL boards.
Figure 3-146 Appearance of the board with common front panel and board with embedded
front panel
Table 3-172 lists the major differences between 64-channel ADSL SPL boards.

Access Module
Table 3-172 Major differences between 64-channel ADSL SPL boards

Board Front Port Impedance Applicable Applicable
Panel Line Service Board
H801SPPF Common 600-ohm impedance POTS l H802ADPD

l H805ADPD
H801SPPH Embedded 2B1Q or 4B3T ISDN H802ADQD

A
H801SPPF1 Embedded 600-ohm impedance POTS l H802ADPD

l H805ADPD
H801SPPLA Embedded Complex impedance POTS l H802ADPD

(ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 l H805ADPD
option A)
H801SPPLB Embedded BT complex impedance POTS l H802ADPD

l H805ADPD
H801SPPLC Embedded Complex impedance POTS l H802ADPD

(ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 l H805ADPD
option B)
NOTE
l More information about the boards supported by the product version, please reference the 3.2
Mapping Between Boards and Software Versions.
l More information about the boards function supported by the version, please reference the related
board description topic.
3.25.2 H801SPLF Board Description

The H801SPLF is 32-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPLF supports the following function:
l Separating 32-channel POTS signals from ADSL2+ signals
l Supporting real impedance (600 ohms).
Figure 3-147 shows the external connections of the H801SPLF board.
Figure 3-147 External connections of the H801SPLF board

32-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPLF
POTS PSTN device

Access Module
Parameters
Table 3-173 Parameters of the H801SPLF board

Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum
Power
Consumption
H801SPLF 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
Different signals use different bands.
The H801SPLF board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the SPPF board can separate POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPLF board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of
POTS and ADSL2+ are transmitted to the splitter through the line protection module. The
splitter separates the mixed signals, and then the ADSL2+ signals and the POTS signals are
forwarded through corresponding ports.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL Connected to xDSL port of

(0-31) the ADSL2+ service board
LINE
PSTN

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
Table 3-174 describes the pin assignment of the xDSL port of the H801SPLF board.

l l l l
64 31 48 23 32 32 15 16 7
48
63 47 31 15
16
62 30 46 22 64 30 14 14 6
61 45 29 13
60 29 44 21 28 13 12 5
1
59 43 49 27 11
17
58 28 42 20 33 26 12 10 4
57 41 25 9
56 27 40 19 24 11 8 3
55 39 23 7
54 26 38 18 22 10 6 2
53 37 21 5
52 25 36 17 20 9 4 1
51 35 19 3
50 24 34 16 18 8 2 0
49 33 17 1
The pin assignments of the LINE port and the pin assignment of the PSTN port are the same
on the H801SPLF board, as described in Table 3-175.

Access Module
Table 3-175 Pin assignments of the PSTN port

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.25.3 H801SPLH Board Description

The H801SPLH is 32-port ADSL over ISDN splitter board, It separates ISDN signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPLH supports the following function:
l Separating 32-channel ISDN signals from ADSL2+ signals
l Supporting 2B1Q/4B3T coding.

Access Module
Figure 3-148 shows the external connections of the H801SPLH board.
Figure 3-148 External connections of the H801SPLH board

32-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over ISDN
ATU-R SPLH
ISDN PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-176 Parameters of the H801SPLH board

Power
Consumption
H801SPLH 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPLH board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the SPPF board can separate ISDN signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPLH board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of
ISDN and ADSL2+ are transmitted to the splitter through the line protection module. The
splitter separates the mixed signals, and then the ADSL2+ signals and the ISDN signals are

Access Module
Front Panel Port

LINE
PSTN

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
Table 3-177 describes the pin assignment of the xDSL port of the H801SPLH board.

l l l l
64 31 48 23 32 32 15 16 7
48
63 47 31 15
16
62 30 46 22 64 30 14 14 6
61 45 29 13
60 29 44 21 28 13 12 5
1
59 43 49 27 11
17
58 28 42 20 33 26 12 10 4
57 41 25 9
56 27 40 19 24 11 8 3
55 39 23 7
54 26 38 18 22 10 6 2
53 37 21 5
52 25 36 17 20 9 4 1
51 35 19 3
50 24 34 16 18 8 2 0
49 33 17 1
on the H801SPLH board, as described in Table 3-178.

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.25.4 H801SPLL Board Description

The H801SPLL is 32-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPLL supports the following function:
l Supporting complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option A).

Access Module
Figure 3-149 shows the external connections of the H801SPLL board.
Figure 3-149 External connections of the H801SPLL board

32-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPLL
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-179 Parameters of the H801SPLL board

Power
Consumption
H801SPLL 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPLL board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the SPPF board can separate POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPLL board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of

Access Module
Front Panel Port

LINE
PSTN

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
Table 3-180 describes the pin assignment of the xDSL port of the H801SPLL board.

l l l l
64 31 48 23 32 32 15 16 7
48
63 47 31 15
16
62 30 46 22 64 30 14 14 6
61 45 29 13
60 29 44 21 28 13 12 5
1
59 43 49 27 11
17
58 28 42 20 33 26 12 10 4
57 41 25 9
56 27 40 19 24 11 8 3
55 39 23 7
54 26 38 18 22 10 6 2
53 37 21 5
52 25 36 17 20 9 4 1
51 35 19 3
50 24 34 16 18 8 2 0
49 33 17 1
on the H801SPLL board, as described in Table 3-181.

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.25.5 H801SPPLA Board Description

The H801SPPLA is 64-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPLA supports the following function:
l Separating 64-channel ADSL2+ signals from POTS signals
l standard impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option A).

Access Module
Figure 3-150 shows the external connections of the H801SPPLA board.
Figure 3-150 External connections of the H801SPPLA board
64-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPPLA
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-182 Parameters of the H801SPPLA board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPLA 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPLA board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the H801SPPLA board can separate POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPLA board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1 Connected to xDSL port of


LINE0
(0-31)
LINE1
PSTN0
PSTN1
(32-63)

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPLA board
are the same. For pin assignment of the xDSL0 port, see Table 3-183; for pin assignment of
the xDSL1 port, see Table 3-184.

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.25.6 H801SPPLB Board Description

The H801SPPLB is 64-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPLB supports the following function:
l the BT complex impedance.
Figure 3-151 shows the external connections of the H801SPPLB board.

Access Module
Figure 3-151 External connections of the H801SPPLB board
64-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPPLB
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-185 Parameters of the H801SPPLB board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPLB 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPLB board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the H801SPPLB board can separate POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPLB board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of

Access Module
Front Panel Port


LINE0
(0-31)
LINE1
PSTN0
PSTN1
(32-63)

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPLB board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.25.7 H801SPPLC Board Description

The H801SPPLC is 64-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPLC supports the following function:
l standard impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option B).
Figure 3-152 shows the external connections of the H801SPPLC board.

Access Module
Figure 3-152 External connections of the H801SPPLC board
64-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPPLC
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-188 Parameters of the H801SPPLC board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPLC 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPLC board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the H801SPPLC board can separate POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPLC board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of

Access Module
Front Panel Port


LINE0
(0-31)
LINE1
PSTN0
PSTN1
(32-63)

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPLC board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.25.8 H801SPPHA Board Description

The H801SPPHA is 64-port ADSL over ISDN splitter board, It separates ISDN signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPHA supports the following function:
l Separating 64-channel ISDN signals from ADSL2+ signals
l Supporting 2B1Q/4B3T coding.
Figure 3-153 shows the external connections of the H801SPPHA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-153 External connections of the H801SPPHA board
ADSL2+ 64-channel
ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over ISDN
ATU-R SPPHA
ISDN
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-191 Parameters of the H801SPPHA board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPHA 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPHA board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the SPPF board can separate ISDN signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPHA board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of
ISDN and ADSL2+ are transmitted to the splitter through the line protection module. The
splitter separates the mixed signals, and then the ADSL2+ signals and the ISDN signals are

Access Module
Front Panel Port

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPHA board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.25.9 H801SPPF1 Board Description

The H801SPPF1 is 64-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPF1 supports the following function:
Figure 3-154 shows the external connections of the H801SPPF1 board.

Access Module
Figure 3-154 External connections of the H801SPPF1 board
64-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPPF1
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-194 Parameters of the H801SPPF1 board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPF1 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPF1 board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the H801SPPF1 board can separate POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPF1 board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of
Front Panel Port

PSTN1
(32-63)

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPF1 board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.25.10 H801SPPF Board Description

The H801SPPF is 64-port ADSL over POTS splitter board, It separates POTS signals from
ADSL2+ signals.

The H801SPPF supports the following function:
Figure 3-155 shows the external connections of the H801SPPF board.

Access Module
Figure 3-155 External connections of the H801SPPF board

64-channel
ADSL2+ ADSL2+
service board
ADSL2+ over POTS
ATU-R SPPF
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-197 Parameters of the H801SPPF board

Power
Consumption
H801SPPF 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801SPPF board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering
ADSL2+ signals. Therefore, the H801SPPF board can separate POTS signals from ADSL2+
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801SPPF board through the LINE port, the mixed signals of

Access Module
Front Panel Port

(0～31) the ADSL2+ service board

(32～63) the ADSL2+ service board
LINE1
(32～63)
LINE0
(0～31)
PSTN1
(32～63)
PSTN0
(0～31)

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801SPPF board are
the same. For pin assignment of the xDSL0 port, see Table 3-198; for pin assignment of the
xDSL1 port, see Table 3-199.

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.26 VDSL2 SPL Board

The VDSL SPL board separates narrowband signals from VDSL signals.
3.26.1 Differences Between VDSL SPL Boards

VDSL SPL boards separate VDSL2 broadband signals from POTS/ISDN narrowband signals.
By access user quantity, VDSL SPL boards can be classified into 24-channel VDSL SPL
board and 48/64-channel VDSL SPL board.
l A 24-channel VDSL SPL board works with a 24-channel VDSL2 service board.
l A 48/64-channel VDSL SPL board works with a 48-channel VDSL2 service board.
NOTE
l The 24-channel VDSL SPL board is a low-density SPL board.

l The 48/64-channel VDSL SPL board is a high-density SPL board. Both the 24-channel VDSL SPL board
and 48/64-channel VDSL SPL board use the same intra-subrack interconnection cable, inter-subrack
interconnection cable, and external subscriber cable.

Access Module
Differences Between 24-channel VDSL SPL Boards

Table 3-200 lists the major differences between 24-channel VDSL SPL boards.
Table 3-200 Major differences between 24-channel VDSL SPL boards

Board Port Impedance Applicable Applicable
Line Service Board
H801VSTL Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 POTS 24-port VDSL2

01 01 option A) over POTS
Service Board
H801VSTH Complex impedance (2B1Q or 4B3T) ISDN 24-port VDSL2

over ISDN
Service Board
Differences Between 48/64-channel VDSL SPL Boards

Table 3-201 lists the major differences between 48/64-channel VDSL SPL boards.
Table 3-201 Major differences between 48/64-channel VDSL SPL boards

Board Port Port Impedance Applicable Applicable
Quanti Line Service
ty Board
H801VSN 48 600-ohm impedance POTS 48-port

F VDSL2 over
POTS
Service
Board
H801VSN 48 Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 POTS 48-port

LA 952 01 01 option A) VDSL2 over
POTS
Service
Board
H801VSP 64 2B1Q or 4B3T ISDN 48/64-port

HA VDSL2 over
ISDN
Service
Board
H801VSP 64 Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 POTS 64-port

LA 952 01 01 option A) VDSL2 over
POTS
Service
Board

Access Module
Board Port Port Impedance Applicable Applicable

Quanti Line Service
ty Board
H801VSP 64 Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 POTS 64-port

LC 952 01 01 option B) VDSL2 over
POTS
Service
Board
NOTE
l More information about the boards supported by the product version, please reference the 3.2
Mapping Between Boards and Software Versions.
l More information about the boards function supported by the version, please reference the related
board description topic.
3.26.2 H801VSTH Board Description

The H801VSTH board is a 24-port VDSL2 over ISDN splitter board, separating 24-channel
VDSL signals from ISDN signals.

The H801VSTH board supports the following function:
l Separating 24-channel VDSL2 signals from ISDN signals
l Supporting 2B1Q/4B3T coding
Figure 3-156 shows the external connections of the H801VSTH board.
Figure 3-156 External connections of the H801VSTH board

24-channel
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over ISDN
VTU-R VSTH
ISDN PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-202 Parameters of the H801VSTH boards

Board Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum Power
Consumption
H801VSTH 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W

Access Module
Working Principle
The H801VSTH board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering the
VDSL2 band signals. Therefore, the SPL board can separate VDSL2 signals from ISDN
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801VSTH board through the LINE port, the mixed ISDN and
VDSL2 signals are transmitted to the splitter through the line protection module. The mixed
signals are separated by the splitter, and then the separated ISDN and VDSL2 signals are

Access Module
Front Panel Port

(0-23) the VDSL2 service board
LINE
PSTN

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
Table 3-203 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL port of the H801VSTH board. The
H801VSTH board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

l l l l
64 31 48 23 32 32 15 16 7
48
63 47 31 15
16
62 30 46 22 64 30 14 14 6
61 45 29 13
60 29 44 21 28 13 12 5
1
59 43 49 27 11
17
58 28 42 20 33 26 12 10 4
57 41 25 9
56 27 40 19 24 11 8 3
55 39 23 7
54 26 38 18 22 10 6 2
53 37 21 5
52 25 36 17 20 9 4 1
51 35 19 3
50 24 34 16 18 8 2 0
49 33 17 1
Pin assignments for the LINE port and that for the PSTN port are the same, as described in
Table 3-204. The H801VSTH board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.26.3 H801VSTL Board Description

The H801VSTL board is a 24-port VDSL2 over POTS splitter board, separating 24-channel
VDSL signals from POTS signals.

The H801VSTL board supports the following function:
l Separating 24-channel VDSL2 signals from POTS signals
l Supporting complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option A)

Access Module
Figure 3-157 shows the external connections of the H801VSTL board.
Figure 3-157 External connections of the H801VSTL board

24-channel
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over POTS
VTU-R VSTL
POTS PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-205 Parameters of the H801VSTL boards

Consumption
H801VSTL 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSTL board mainly consists of a splitter that is a low-pass filter for filtering the
VDSL2 band signals. Therefore, the SPL board can separate VDSL2 signals from POTS
signals.
After being transmitted to the H801VSTL board through the LINE port, the mixed POTS and
VDSL2 signals are transmitted to the splitter through the line protection module. The mixed
signals are separated by the splitter, and then the separated POTS and VDSL2 signals are

Access Module
Front Panel Port

LINE
PSTN

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
Table 3-206 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL port of the H801VSTL board. The
H801VSTL board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

l l l l
64 31 48 23 32 32 15 16 7
48
63 47 31 15
16
62 30 46 22 64 30 14 14 6
61 45 29 13
60 29 44 21 28 13 12 5
1
59 43 49 27 11
17
58 28 42 20 33 26 12 10 4
57 41 25 9
56 27 40 19 24 11 8 3
55 39 23 7
54 26 38 18 22 10 6 2
53 37 21 5
52 25 36 17 20 9 4 1
51 35 19 3
50 24 34 16 18 8 2 0
49 33 17 1
Pin assignments for the LINE port and that for the PSTN port are the same, as described in
Table 3-207. The H801VSTL board uses only the first 24 channels of signals.

Access Module

l l l l
64 TIP15 48 TIP7 64 32 32 TIP16 16 TIP24

15 7 16 24
62 TIP14 46 TIP6 30 TIP17 14 TIP25

14 6 17 25
60 TIP13 44 TIP5 28 TIP18 12 TIP26

13 5 18 26
58 TIP12 42 TIP4 26 TIP19 10 TIP27

12 4 19 27
56 TIP11 40 TIP3 24 TIP20 8 TIP28

11 3 20 28
33 1
54 TIP10 38 TIP2 22 TIP21 6 TIP29

10 2 21 29
52 TIP9 36 TIP1 20 TIP22 4 TIP30

9 1 22 30
50 TIP8 34 TIP0 18 TIP23 2 TIP31

8 0 23 31
3.26.4 H801VSNF Board Description

The H801VSNF is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS splitter board that supports real impedance
(600 ohms). It separates 48 channels of VDSL signals from POTS signals. The separated
VDSL2 signals are transmitted to the VDSL2 service board, and the separated POTS signals
are transmitted to the PSTN switch device.

The H801VSNF board supports the following function:

Access Module

l Real impedance (600 ohms)
Figure 3-158 shows the external connections of the H801VSNF board.
Figure 3-158 External connections of the H801VSNF board
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over POTS

VSNF
VTU-R
POTS
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-208 Parameters of the H801VSNF board

Power
Consumption
H801VSNF 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSNF board consists of two parts: splitter module and protection module. The
splitter module separates the VDSL signals and the POTS signals. The protection module
supports the over-voltage protection of the LINE line.

Access Module
Front Panel Port
xDSL1
Connected to xDSL port of
(24-47)
the VDSL2 service board

LINE0
LINE1 Connected to the MDF

(24-47)
PSTN0
PSTN1

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801VSNF board are
the same. For pin assignment of the xDSL0 port, see Table 3-209; for pin assignment of the
xDSL1 port, see Table 3-210.

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 -
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 -
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 -
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 -
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 -
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 -
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 -
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 -
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 31 17 39 33 33 47 49 -
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 30 19 38 1 35 46 51 -
4 20 36 52
5 29 21 37 37 45 53 -
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 28 23 36 32 39 44 55 -
8 24 40 56
9 27 25 35 41 43 57 -
10 26 42 58
11 26 27 34 43 42 59 -
12 28 44 60
13 25 29 33 45 41 61 -
14 30 46 62
15 24 31 32 47 40 63 -
16 32 48 64
3.26.5 H801VSNLA Board Description

The H801VSNLA board is a 48-port VDSL2 over POTS splitter board that supports standard
complex impedance. It separates 48 channels of VDSL signals from POTS signals. The
separated VDSL2 signals are transmitted to the VDSL2 service board, and the separated
POTS signals are transmitted to the PSTN switch device.

The H801VSNLA board supports the following function:
l Supports complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option A)
Figure 3-159 shows the external connections of the H801VSNLA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-159 External connections of the H801VSNLA board
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over POTS
VSNLA
VTU-R
POTS
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-211 Parameters of the H801VSNLA board

Power
Consumption
H801VSNLA 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSNLA board consists of two parts: splitter module and protection module. The
splitter module separates the VDSL signals and the POTS signals. The protection module

Access Module
Front Panel Port


LINE0
LINE1
PSTN0
(0-23)
PSTN1
(24-47)
NOTE
Ports on the front panel are concave.

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801VSNLA board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 -
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 -
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 -
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 -
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 -
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 -
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 -
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 -
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 31 17 39 33 33 47 49 -
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 30 19 38 1 35 46 51 -
4 20 36 52
5 29 21 37 37 45 53 -
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 28 23 36 32 39 44 55 -
8 24 40 56
9 27 25 35 41 43 57 -
10 26 42 58
11 26 27 34 43 42 59 -
12 28 44 60
13 25 29 33 45 41 61 -
14 30 46 62
15 24 31 32 47 40 63 -
16 32 48 64
3.26.6 H801VSPHA Board Description

The H801VSPHA board is a 64-port VDSL2 over ISDN splitter board, separating 64-channel
VDSL2 signals from the ISDN signals. The H801VSPHA board supports overvoltage and
overcurrent protection of the external line (K.21). After passing the H801VSPHA board, the
VDSL2 signals of the LINE line from the MDF are transmitted to the VDSL2 service board,
and the ISDN signals of the LINE line are transmitted to the PSTN switch through the MDF.

The H801VSPHA board supports the following function:
l Separating 64-channel VDSL2 signals from ISDN signals
l Supporting ISDN (2B1Q/4B3T) complex impedance.
Figure 3-160 shows the external connections of the H801VSPHA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-160 External connections of the H801VSPHA board
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over ISDN
VTU-R VSPHA
ISDN
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-214 Parameters of the H801VSPHA board

Power
Consumption
H801VSPHA 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSPHA board consists of 2 parts: splitter module and protection module. The
splitter module separates the VDSL signals and the ISDN signals. The protection module

Access Module
Front Panel Port

xDSL0
(0-31)
LINE0

LINE1
(32-63)
PSTN0
PSTN1
NOTE

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignment of the xDSL port, LINE port, and PSTN port on the H801VSPHA board

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.26.7 H801VSPLA Board Description

H801VSPLA is a 64-port VDSL over POTS splitter board. It separates 64-channel VDSL2
signals from POTS signals and protects the subscriber line against overcurrent and
overvoltage (K.20). The H801VSPLA board separates the LINE signals into VDSL2 signals
and POTS signals. After that, the VDSL2 signals are sent to the VDSL2 service board and the
POTS signals are sent to the PSTN device through the MDF.

The H801VSPLA board supports the following functions:
l Separation of 64-channel VDSL2 signals from POTS signals
l Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option A)
Figure 3-161 shows the external connections of the H801VSPLA board.

Access Module
Figure 3-161 External connections of the H801VSPLA board
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over POTS
VTU-R VSPLA
POTS
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-217 Parameters of the H801VSPLA board

Power
Consumption
H801VSPLA 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSPLA board is divided into two parts: splitter module and protection module. The
splitter module separates VDSL2 signals from POTS signals, and the protection module
protects the LINE line against overcurrent and overvoltage.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

xDSL0
(0-31)
LINE0

(32-63)
PSTN0
PSTN1 Connected to the MDF

(32-63)
NOTE

Access Module
NOTICE
Port
The ports of the H801VSPLA board are located on its front panel. Table 3-218 describes the
ports of the H801VSPLA board.
Table 3-218 Ports of the H801VSPLA board

Port Function Connection
xDSL1 Provides 32 channels (channels Use an intra-subrack interconnection

32-63) of VDSL2 access cable or inter-subrack interconnection
service. cable to connect the port to an xDSL port of
the VDSL2 service board.
xDSL0 Provides 32 channels (channels
0-31) of VDSL2 access
service.
LINE0 Provides 32 channels (channels Use a subscriber cable to connect the port
0-31) of user access service. to the MDF.
LINE1 Provides 32 channels (channels

32-63) of user access service.
PSTN0 Provides 32 channels (channels Use a subscriber cable to connect the port
0-31) of POTS access service. to the MDF.
PSTN1 Provides 32 channels (channels

32-63) of POTS access service.
NOTICE

Access Module
Pin Assignments
The pin assignments of xDSL, LINE, and PSTN ports on the H801VSPLA board are the
same. Table 3-219 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL0 port, and Table 3-220
describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port.

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.26.8 H801VSPLC Board Description

H801VSPLC is a 64-port VDSL2 over POTS splitter board. It separates 64-channel VDSL2
signals from POTS signals and protects the subscriber line against overcurrent and
overvoltage (K.20). The H801VSPLC board separates the LINE signals into VDSL2 signals
and POTS signals. After that, the VDSL2 signals are sent to the VDSL2 service board and the
POTS signals are sent to the PSTN device through the MDF.

The H801VSPLC board supports the following functions:
l Separation of 64-channel VDSL2 signals from POTS signals
l Complex impedance (ETSI TS 101 952 01 01 option B)
Figure 3-162 shows the external connections of the H801VSPLC board.

Access Module
Figure 3-162 External connections of the H801VSPLC board
VDSL2 VDSL2
service board
VDSL2 over POTS
VSPLC
VTU-R
POTS
PSTN device
Parameters
Table 3-221 Parameters of the H801VSPLC board

Power
Consumption
H801VSPLC 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W
Working Principle
The H801VSPLC board is divided into two parts: splitter module and protection module. The
splitter module separates VDSL2 signals from POTS signals, and the protection module
protects the LINE line against overcurrent and overvoltage.

Access Module
Front Panel Port

xDSL0
(0-31)
LINE0

(32-63)
PSTN0
PSTN1 Connected to the MDF

(32-63)
NOTE

Access Module
NOTICE
Pin Assignments
The pin assignments of xDSL, LINE, and PSTN ports on the H801VSPLC board are the
same. Table 3-222 describes the pin assignments of the xDSL0 port, and Table 3-223
describes the pin assignments of the xDSL1 port.

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.27 Extension Board

Extension boards transfer services of the service boards.
3.27.1 H801SHET Board Description

The H801SHET board is an 64-channel extension board. It can connect the signals between
the four Delander 64-pin ports.

The H801SHET board is used to extend the H80ASHLM and H802SHGM board, and it
converts signals between Champ 64-pin connector and Delander 64-pin connector.

Access Module
Parameters
Table 3-224 Parameters of the H801SHET board

Consumption
H801SHET 22.86 mm x 237.00 mm x 395.40 mm 0W

Access Module
Front Panel Port
IN1 Connected to xDSL/POTS

(32-63) port of the service board
IN0 Connected to xDSL/POTS

(0-31) port of the service board
OUT0
OUT1
(32-63)

Access Module
NOTE
l Ports on the front panel are concave.

l The lower two connectors on the front panel are used only for securing redundant subscriber cables.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-225 describes the pin assignments of the IN0 port of the H801SHET board. Table
3-226 describes the pin assignments of the IN1 port of the H801SHET board.The pin
assignments of the OUT port are the same as those of the IN port.
Table 3-225 Pin assignments of the IN0 port

l l l l
1 7 17 15 33 33 23 49 31
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 6 19 14 1 35 22 51 30
4 20 36 52
5 5 21 13 37 21 53 29
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 4 23 12 32 39 20 55 28
8 24 40 56
9 3 25 11 41 19 57 27
10 26 42 58
11 2 27 10 43 18 59 26
12 28 44 60
13 1 29 9 45 17 61 25
14 30 46 62
15 0 31 8 47 16 63 24
16 32 48 64

Access Module
Table 3-226 Pin assignments of the IN1 port

l l l l
1 39 17 47 33 33 55 49 63
17
2 18 49 34 50
3 38 19 46 1 35 54 51 62
4 20 36 52
5 37 21 45 37 53 53 61
64
16
6 22 38 54
48
7 36 23 44 32 39 52 55 60
8 24 40 56
9 35 25 43 41 51 57 59
10 26 42 58
11 34 27 42 43 50 59 58
12 28 44 60
13 33 29 41 45 49 61 57
14 30 46 62
15 32 31 40 47 48 63 56
16 32 48 64
3.28 Filler Panel

A filler panel is used to cover a slot that is not in use in a subrack.
Functions
The filler panel supports the following functions:
l Prevents electrical parts in the subrack from being exposed.
l Prevents foreign objects from entering the subrack.
l Ensures that the subrack meets electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements.
l Ensures that cold air inside the subrack flows along the specified air channel.
l Helps to lay out cables reserved for future capacity expansion when the filler panel
provides interfaces.

Access Module
NOTICE
Filler panels must be installed in the vacant slots in the subrack. Otherwise, heat dissipation of
the boards will be affected.
Description
Table 3-227 describes the applicable slots, dimensions, and appearance of filler panels.
Table 3-227 Applicable slots, dimensions, and appearance of filler panels
Dimensions
Slot Appearance (View of the Horizontally Placed Board)
(W x H)
MA5600T/
MA5603T:
25.40 mm x
Control board 395.40 mm
slot
MA5608T:
35.56 mm x
134.84 mm
MA5600T/
Power board MA5603T:
slot 25.40 mm x
105.10 mm
Slot for
25.40 mm x
universal
183.20 mm
interface board
l Default configuration:
Service board
slot in the 22.86 mm x
service l Pre-installing cables is required (in future when the ADPE, CAME, or 395.40 mm
subrack VDPE board is configured):
GIU slot in the

25.40 mm x
service
197.20 mm
subrack
l Pre-installing cables is not required (same as the filler panel in the

service board slot of the service subrack):
Service board
22.86 mm x
slot in the SPL
l Pre-installing cables is required (in future when the 48-port or 64-port 395.40 mm
subrack
SPL board is configured):

Access Module
Dimensions
Slot Appearance (View of the Horizontally Placed Board)
(W x H)
GIU slot in the 25.40 mm x

SPL subrack 395.40 mm

Access Module
Hardware Description 4 Optical and Electrical Module
4 Optical and Electrical Module
About This Chapter
The optical and electrical module is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver

used in optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications
applications.
4.1 Overview
This topic describes types and labels of optical and electrical modules.
4.2 PON Optical Module
This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation with boards of PON optical modules.
4.3 GE Optical/Electrical Module
This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation between GE optical/electrical modules
and boards.
4.4 10GE Optical Module
This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation with boards of 10GE optical modules.
4.5 FE Optical Module
This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation between FE optical modules and
boards
4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module
This topic describes the parameters and relation between FE/GE adaptive optical modules and
boards.
4.7 STM-1 Optical Module
This topic describes the parameters and relation with boards of STM-1 optical modules.
4.1 Overview
This topic describes types and labels of optical and electrical modules.

Access Module
Types of Optical and Electrical Modules

Mod Description Appearance Connector
ule Type
Type
SFP Small form- Two-fiber bi-directional optical module LC/PC

factor
pluggable
optical module.
supports the SC/PC, SC/UPC
highest rate 4
Gbit/s and LC
connectors.
One-fiber bi-directional optical module
Electrical module RJ-45

Access Module

ule Type
Type
eSFP Enhanced SFP, Two-fiber bi-directional optical module LC/PC

supports
performance
report LC
connectors.
CSFP Compact SFP, LC/PC

uses general
SFP connectors
but its
dimensions is
reduced to 1/2
or even 1/4 of
the existing
industry
standard. It
supports
multiple
channels. On
the device,
CSFP supports
dual channels.

Access Module

ule Type
Type
SFP+ High-speed (8 Two-fiber bi-directional optical module LC/PC

Gbit/s and 10
Gbit/s) SFP
SC/PC, SC/UPC
XFP 10-Gigabit LC/PC

SFP, supports
LC connectors.
SC/PC, SC/UPC
NOTE
l The appearances of SFP, CSFP, and eSFP optical modules are the same.
l SFP, CSFP, and eSFP optical modules use the SFP connector.
l Unlike SFP optical modules, eSFP optical modules support performance reporting.
l A CSFP optical module is a multi-channel optical module. Huawei devices use two-channel
CSFP optical modules.
l The size of an SFP+ optical module is the same as that of an SFP optical module, and the size of an
XFP optical module is larger than that of an SFP+ optical module.
Label on the Optical Module

The label attached on an optical module presents the information about this optical module.
Figure 4-1 shows the label of a PON optical module; Figure 4-2 shows the label of a
10GE/GE/FE optical module.

Access Module
Figure 4-1 Appearance of the Label on a PON Optical Module
Table 4-1 Description of the Label on a PON Optical Module

Item Description
Item number Part identification code. It consists of 8-17 digits containing letters,
(BOM) number, and symbols - =. It is also called part number (PN for
short). The BOM of optical and electrical modules consist of 8 or 12
digits.
Module type Optical module types include GPON, XGPON, XGSPON, XG&G-
PON, and XGS&G-PON.
Encapsulation mode Encapsulation mode of an optical module.

NOTE
This field is displayed on only combo PON (XG&G-PON and XGS&G-
PON) modules.
Installation Device on which an optical module is installed: OLT, ONU, and

ONT.
Power level l GPON: CLASS B+/C+/C++

l XGPON/XGSPON: N1/N2a
l XG&G-PON and XGS&G-PON: N1/N2a/D1/D2
Vendor model Model of an optical module vendor.
Vendor code and Code and SN of an optical module vendor.

SN
Class of laser Class of laser (CLASS 1 LASER) of an optical module.
Place of origin Place where an optical module is produced.

Access Module
Figure 4-2 Appearance of the Label on a 10GE/GE/FE Optical Module
Table 4-2 Description of the Label on a 10GE/GE/FE Optical Module

Item Description
Item number Part identification code. It consists of 8-17 digits containing letters,
(BOM) number, and symbols "-" and "=". It is also called part number (PN
for short). The BOM of optical and electrical modules consist of 8
or 12 digits.
Rate Rate of an optical module.
Operating Operating wavelength of an optical module.

wavelength
Transmission Transmission distance of an optical module.

distance
Fiber type The fiber type can be single-mode (SM) or multimode (MM).
Transmission mode Transmission mode of an optical module. For example, BIDI

indicates a one-fiber bi-directional optical module.
NOTE
This field is displayed on only GE optical modules.
Encapsulation mode Encapsulation mode of an optical module.
Vendor model Model of an optical module vendor.
Vendor code and Code and SN of an optical module vendor.

SN
Class of laser Class of laser (CLASS 1 LASER) of an optical module.
Place of origin Place where an optical module is produced.
4.2 PON Optical Module

This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation with boards of PON optical modules.
Table 4-3 shows the relation between PON optical modules and boards.

Access Module
Table 4-3 Relation between PON optical modules and boards

Board Type Board Name Optical Module Encapsulation Port Rate
Type Type
Upstream P2CA GPON Upstream SFP Tx: 2.49 Gbit/s

interface board Optical Module Rx: 1.24 Gbit/s
GPON interface GPBC/GPBD/ GPON Optical SFP Tx: 2.49 Gbit/s

board GPFD/GPBH/ Module Rx: 1.24 Gbit/s
GPMD
10G GPON XGBC/XGBD 10G GPON Optical SFP+ Tx: 9.95 Gbit/s
interface board Module Rx: 2.49 Gbit/s
GPON Upstream Optical Module

A GPON upstream optical module is connected to one SC optical fiber to provide GPON
upstream transmission.
Type One-fiber bi-directional optical One-fiber bi-directional optical

module, ONU class B+ module, ONU class C+
Operating Tx: 1310 nm Tx: 1310 nm

Wavelengt Rx: 1490 nm Rx: 1490 nm
h
Encapsulat SFP SFP

ion Type
Port Rate Tx: 1.24 Gbit/s Tx: 1.24 Gbit/s

Rx: 2.49 Gbit/s Rx: 2.49 Gbit/s
Minimum 0.50 dBm 0.50 dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum 5.00 dBm 5.00 dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum -27.00 dBm -30.00 dBm (FEC enabled)

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical SC SC
Connector
Type
Optical Single-mode Single-mode

Fiber Type

Access Module
GPON Optical Module

A GPON optical module is connected to one SC optical fiber to provide GPON access
service.
No. 1 2 3
Type One-fiber bi-directional One-fiber bi-directional One-fiber bi-directional

optical module, class B+ optical module, class C+ optical module, class C++
Operating Tx: 1490 nm Tx: 1490 nm Tx: 1490 nm

Wavelength Rx: 1310 nm Rx: 1310 nm Rx: 1310 nm
Encapsulation SFP SFP SFP

Type
Port Rate Tx: 2.49 Gbit/s Tx: 2.49 Gbit/s Tx: 2.488 Gbit/s
Rx: 1.24 Gbit/s Rx: 1.24 Gbit/s Rx: 1.244 Gbit/s
Minimum 1.50 dBm 3.00 dBm 6.00 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum 5.00 dBm 7.00 dBm 10.00 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum -28.00 dBm -32.00 dBm -35.00 dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical SC SC SC
Connector
Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Type
Overload -8.0 dBm -12.0 dBm -15.0 dBm

Optical Power
Extinction 10 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB

Ratio
10G GPON Optical Module

A 10G-GPON optical module is connected to one SC optical fiber to provide 10G-GPON
access service.
No. 1 2 3
Type One-fiber bi-directional One-fiber bi-directional One-fiber bi-directional

optical module, N1 optical module, N1 optical module, N2a

Access Module
Operating Tx: 1577 nm Tx: 1577 nm Tx: 1577nm

Wavelength Rx: 1270 nm Rx: 1270 nm Rx: 1270nm
Encapsulatio XFP SFP+ SFP+

n Type
Port Rate Tx: 9.95 Gbit/s Tx: 9.95 Gbit/s Tx: 9.95 Gbit/s
Rx: 2.49 Gbit/s Rx: 2.49 Gbit/s Rx: 2.488 Gbit/s
Minimum 2 dBm 2 dBm 4dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum 6 dBm 6 dBm 8dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum -27.5 dBm -27.5 dBm -29.5dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical SC SC SC
Connector
Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Type
Overload -7 dBm -7 dBm -9dBm

Optical
Power
Extinction 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2dB

Ratio
Standards Compliance of the GPON Port

Standard ID Description
ITU-T G.984.1 Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Networks (GPON)

General Characteristics

Physical Media Dependent (PMD) Layer Specification

Transmission Convergence Layer Specification
ITU-T G.984.4 Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Networks (GPON) ONU

Management and Control Interface Specification

Access Module
Standards Compliance of the 10G GPON Port

ITU-T G.987.1 10Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Networks (XG-PON)

General Requirements

Physical Media Dependent (PMD) Layer Specification

Transmission Convergence Layer Specification
ITU-T G.988 10Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Networks (XG-PON)

ONU Management and Control Interface Specification
4.3 GE Optical/Electrical Module

This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation between GE optical/electrical modules
and boards.
Table 4-4 shows the relation between GE optical/electrical modules and boards.
Table 4-4 Relation between GE optical/electrical modules and boards

Board Type Board One- One- Two- One-channel GE Electrical
Name channel channel channel Two-fiber Module
Two-fiber One-fiber One-fiber Bi-
Bi- Bi- Bi- directional
directional directional directional GE CWDM
GE Optical GE Optical GE Optical Optical
Module Module Module Module
Control SCUB/ √ √ × √ √
board SCUN/
SCUK/
SCUF/
SCUH
MCUD/ √ √ × √ √
MCUD1/
MCUE
Upstream GICF/ √ √ × √ √
interface GICK/
board X2CK/
H802X2CS
GICD √ √ × √ √
GSCA √ √ × √ ×

Access Module
Board Type Board One- One- Two- One-channel GE Electrical

Name channel channel channel Two-fiber Module
Two-fiber One-fiber One-fiber Bi-
Bi- Bi- Bi- directional
directional directional directional GE CWDM
GE Optical GE Optical GE Optical Optical
Module Module Module Module
SPU board SPUA/ √ √ × √ ×

SPUF
SPUC √ √ √ √ ×
Ethernet ETHA √ × × × ×
service
access board ETHB √ √ × √ √
P2P OPGD/ √ √ √ √ √
interface OPGE
board
One-channel Two-fiber Bi-directional GE Optical Module

A one-channel two-fiber bi-directional GE optical module is connected to two LC optical
fibers (one for transmission and the other for reception) to provide one GE channel.
Type One-channel two-fiber bi-directional optical module
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Operating 850 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm

Wavelength
Encapsulation eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

Type
Port Rate 2.13 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s
Minimum Output -9.50 dBm -9.00 dBm -5.00 dBm -5.00 dBm -2.00 dBm
Optical Power
Maximum Output -2.50 dBm -3.00 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 5.00 dBm
Optical Power
Maximum -17.00 dBm -20.00 dBm -23.00 dBm -22.00 dBm -23.00 dBm
Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical Connector LC LC LC LC LC
Type
Optical Fiber Type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Reach 0.50 km 10.00 km 40.00 km 40.00 km 80.00 km

Access Module
Overload Optical 0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm
Power
Extinction Ratio 9.0 dB 9.0 dB 9.0 dB 8.5 dB 9.0 dB
One-channel One-fiber Bi-directional GE Optical Module

A one-channel one-fiber bi-directional GE optical module is connected to one LC optical fiber
(for both transmission and reception) to provide one GE channel.
Type One-channel one-fiber bi-directional optical module
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Operating Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1570nm Tx: 1490nm
Wavelength nm nm nm nm Rx: 1490nm Rx: 1570nm
Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310
nm nm nm nm
Encapsulation eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

Type
Port Rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s
Minimum Output -9.00 dBm -9.00 dBm -2.00 dBm -2.00 dBm -2 dBm -2dBm
Optical Power
Maximum Output -3.00 dBm -3.00 dBm 3.00 dBm 3.00 dBm 4 dBm 4dBm
Optical Power
Maximum -19.50 dBm -19.50 dBm -23.00 dBm -23.00 dBm -26 dBm -26dBm
Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical LC LC LC LC LC LC
Connector Type
Optical Fiber Single- Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Type mode
Reach 10.00 km 10.00 km 40.00 km 40.00 km 80 km 80km
Overload Optical -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3.0 dBm -3 dBm -3dBm
Power
Extinction Ratio 6.0 dB 6.0 dB 9.0 dB 9.0 dB 9 dB 9dB
Two-channel One-fiber Bi-directional GE Optical Module

A two-channel one-fiber bi-directional GE optical module is connected to two LC optical
fibers (each for both transmission and reception) to provide two GE channels.

Access Module
Type Two-channel one-fiber bi-directional optical module
No. 1 2
Operatin Tx: 1490 nm Tx: 1490nm

g Rx: 1310 nm Rx: 1310nm
Wavelen
gth
Encapsu CSFP CSFP

lation
Type
Port 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Rate
Minimu -9.00 dBm -5.0dBm

m
Output
Optical
Power
Maximu -3.00 dBm 0dBm

m
Output
Optical
Power
Maximu -19.50 dBm -25.0dBm

m
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty
Optical LC LC
Connect
or Type
Optical Single-mode Single-mode

Fiber
Type
Reach 10.00 km 40.0km
Overloa -3.0 dBm 0dBm

d
Optical
Power
Extinctio 6.0 dB 6.6dB

n Ratio

Access Module
One-channel Two-fiber Bi-directional GE CWDM Optical Module

A GE CWDM optical module is connected to two LC optical fibers (one for transmission and
the other for reception) to provide one GE channel.
Operating 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm,
Wavelength 1611 nm
Encapsulation eSFP
Type
Port Rate 100 Mbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s
Minimum 0 dBm
Output Optical
Power
Maximum 5.0 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum -28.0 dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical LC
Connector Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode

Type
Reach 80.0 km
Overload Optical -9.0 dBm

Power
Extinction Ratio 8.5 dB
NOTE
There are different types of GE CWDM optical modules, and these types of optical modules vary with
the operating wavelength.
GE Electrical Module
A GE electrical module is connected to a network cable to provide one GE channel.
Type 1000Base-T RJ45 electrical port
Encapsulation SFP
Type
Port Rate Full-duplex 1000 Mbit/s

Access Module
Reach 100.00 m
Standards Compliance of the GE Optical Module

IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X Gbit/s Ethernet over Fiber-Optic at 1 Gbit/s
SFF-8472 Specification for Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for

Optical Transceivers
Standards Compliance of the GE Electrical Module

IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T Gbit/s Ethernet over twisted pair at 1 Gbit/s
4.4 10GE Optical Module

This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation with boards of 10GE optical modules.
Table 4-5 shows the relation between 10GE optical modules and boards.
Table 4-5 Relation between 10GE optical modules and boards

Board Board One-channel One-channel One-channel One-channel
Type Name One-fiber Bi- One-fiber Bi- One-fiber Bi- Two-fiber Bi-
directional directional 10GE directional 10GE directional 10GE
10GE Optical Optical Module Optical Module CWDM Optical
Module (SFP+) (XFP) Module (SFP+)
Control SCUH/ √ × √ √
board SCUV/
MCUD1
Upstream X1CA/ × √ √ ×
interface X2CA
board
X2CS/ √ × √ √
X2CK
SPU board SPUA/ √ × √ √

SPUC/
SPUF

Access Module
One-channel two-fiber bi-directional 10GE Optical Module (SFP+)

A 10GE optical module (SFP+) is connected to two LC optical fibers to provide one 10GE
channel.
No. 1 2 3 4
Operating 850 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm

Wavelength
Encapsulation Type SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+
Port Rate 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 9.95 Gbit/s-11.10 9.95 Gbit/s-10.31

Gbit/s Gbit/s
Minimum Output -7.30 dBm -8.20 dBm -4.70 dBm 0 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum Output -1.00 dBm 0.50 dBm 4.00 dBm 4.00 dBm
Optical Power
Maximum Receiver -11.10 dBm -12.60 dBm -14.10 dBm -24.00 dBm
Sensitivity
Optical Connector LC LC LC LC
Type
Optical Fiber Type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Reach 0.30 km 10.00 km 40.00 km 80.00 km
Overload Optical -1.0 dBm 0.5 dBm 0.5 dBm -7.0 dBm
Power
Extinction Ratio 3.0 dB 3.5 dB 3.5 dB 9.0 dB
One-channel two-fiber bi-directional 10GE Optical Module (XFP)

A 10GE optical module (XFP) is connected to two LC optical fibers to provide one 10GE
channel.
No. 1 2 3 4

Wavelength
Encapsulation Type XFP XFP XFP XFP
Port Rate 10.30 Gbit/s 9.95 Gbit/s-10.71 9.95 Gbit/s-11.10 9.95 Gbit/s-11.10
Gbit/s Gbit/s Gbit/s

Access Module
Minimum Output -7.30 dBm -6.00 dBm -1.00 dBm 0 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum Output -1.30 dBm -1.00 dBm 2.00 dBm 4.00 dBm
Optical Power
Sensitivity
Type
Optical Fiber Type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Reach 0.30 km 10.00 km 40.00 km 80.00 km
Overload Optical -1.0 dBm 0.5 dBm -1.0 dBm -7.0 dBm
Power
One-channel One-fiber Bi-directional 10GE Optical Module

A 10GE optical module (SFP+) is connected to one LC optical fibers to provide one 10GE
channel.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Operating Tx: 1270nm Tx: 1330nm Tx: 1270nm Tx: 1330nm Tx: 1330nm Tx: 1270nm
Wavelength Rx: 1330nm Rx: 1270nm Rx: 1330nm Rx: 1270nm Rx: 1270nm Rx: 1330nm
Encapsulatio SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+

n Type
Port Rate 9.95Gbit/ 9.95Gbit/ 2.5Gbit/ 2.5Gbit/ 9.95Gbit/ 9.95Gbit/

s-10.3Gbit/s s-10.3Gbit/s s-11.3Gbit/s s-11.3Gbit/s s-10.3Gbit/s s-10.3Gbit/s
Minimum -4.2dBm -4.2dBm -8.2dBm -8.2dBm 0dBm 0dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum 3dBm 3dBm 0.5dBm 0.5dBm 5dBm 5dBm

Output
Optical
Power
Maximum -14.4dBm -14.4dBm -14.4dBm -14.4dBm -18dBm -18dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity

Access Module
Optical LC LC LC LC LC LC
Connector
Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Type
Reach 20km 20km 10km 10km 40km 40km
Overload 0.5dBm 0.5dBm 0.5dBm 0.5dBm -9dBm -9dBm

Optical
Power
Extinction 3.5dB 3.5dB 3.5dB 3.5dB 3.5dB 3.5dB

Ratio
One-channel Two-fiber Bi-directional 10GE CWDM Optical Module

A 10GE CWDM optical module is connected to two LC optical fibers (one for transmission
and the other for reception) to provide one 10GE channel.
Operating 1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm,
Wavelength 1611 nm
Encapsulation SFP+
Type
Port Rate 9.95 Gbit/s-11.1 Gbit/s
Minimum 0 dBm
Output Optical
Power
Maximum 4.0 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum -23.0 dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical LC
Connector Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode

Type
Reach 70.0 km

Power

Access Module
NOTE
There are different types of 10GE CWDM optical modules, and these types of optical modules vary with
the operating wavelength.
Standards Compliance of the 10GE Optical Port

IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gbit/s (1,250 MB/s) Ethernet over fiber
SFF-8431 Specifications for Enhanced Small Form Factor Pluggable

Module SFP+
INF-8432 Specification for SFP+ Module and Cage
4.5 FE Optical Module

This topic describes the types, parameters, and relation between FE optical modules and
boards
Relation between FE Optical Modules and Boards

Board Type Board Name One-channel One-fiber Bi- Two-channel One-fiber Bi-
directional FE Optical directional FE Optical
Module Module
P2P interface OPFA √ ×

board
OPGD √ √
OPGE √ √
One-channel One-fiber Bi-directional FE Optical Module

A one-channel one-fiber bi-directional FE optical module is connected to one LC optical fiber
to provide one FE channel.
No. 1 2

Wavelength Rx: 1310 nm Rx: 1550 nm
Encapsulation Type eSFP eSFP
Port Rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Access Module
Minimum Output -15.00 dBm -15.00 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum Output -8.00 dBm -8.00 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum Receiver -32.00 dBm -32.00 dBm

Sensitivity
Optical Connector LC LC
Type
Optical Fiber Type Single-mode Single-mode
Reach 15.00 km 15.00 km
Overload Optical -8.0 dBm -8.0 dBm

Power
Extinction Ratio 8.5 dB 8.5 dB
Two-channel One-fiber Bi-directional FE Optical Module

A two-channel one-fiber bi-directional FE optical module is connected to two LC optical
fibers to provide two FE channels.
Operating Tx: 1550 nm

Wavelength Rx: 1310 nm
Encapsulation CSFP
Type
Port Rate 125 Mbit/s-155 Mbit/s
Minimum Output -14.00 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum Output -8.00 dBm

Optical Power
Maximum -28.2 dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity
Optical Connector LC
Type
Optical Fiber Type Single-mode
Reach 10.00 km

Power

Access Module
Standards Compliance of the FE Optical Modules

IEEE 802.3 100BASE-BX Fast Ethernet at 100 Mbit/s
SFF-8472 Specification for Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for

Optical Transceivers
4.6 FE/GE Adaptive Optical Module

This topic describes the parameters and relation between FE/GE adaptive optical modules and
boards.
Relation between FE/GE Adaptive Optical Moduls and Boards

An FE/GE adaptive optical modules is applicable to the OPGD and OPGE boards.
Two-channel One-fiber Bi-directional FE/GE adaptive optical module

A two-channel one-fiber bi-directional FE/GE adaptive optical module is connected to two
LC optical fibers to provide two FE/GE channels.
No. 1 2

Wavelength Rx: 1310 nm Rx: 1310 nm
Encapsulation CSFP CSFP

Type
Port Rate 125 Mbit/s–1.25 GBit/s 125 Mbit/s–1.25 GBit/s
Minimum -9.00 dBm -9.00 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum -3.00 dBm -3.00 dBm

Output Optical
Power
Maximum -23.00 dBm -24 dBm

Receiver
Sensitivity

Access Module
Optical LC LC
Connector Type
Optical Fiber Single-mode Single-mode

Type
Reach 10.00 km 10.00 km
Overload -3.00 dBm -3.00 dBm

Optical Power
Extinction Ratio 6.60 dB 6.6 dB
4.7 STM-1 Optical Module

This topic describes the parameters and relation with boards of STM-1 optical modules.
An STM-1 optical module is applicable to the TOPA (O2CE/CSSA) board, AIUG (O2CS)
board and TOPB board. It is connected to two LC optical fibers to provide one STM-1
channel. The following table lists specifications of STM-1 optical modules.
No. 1 2 3 4

Wavelength
Encapsulation Type eSFP SFP eSFP eSFP
Port Rate STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
Minimum Output -15.00 dBm -19.00 dBm -5.00 dBm -5.00 dBm
Optical Power
Maximum Output -8.00 dBm -14.00 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm

Optical Power
Sensitivity
Type
Optical Fiber Type Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Reach 15.00 km 2.00 km 40.00 km 80.00 km
Overload Optical -8.0 dBm -14.0 dBm -10.0 dBm -10.0 dBm
Power

Access Module
Hardware Description 5 Cable
5 Cable
About This Chapter
This topic covers the appearance, pin assignments, applications, and technical specifications
of the cables used by the device.
5.1 Power Cable and Ground Cable

Power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state, and ground
cable is used to protect devices from lightning strike and interference.
5.2 Subscriber Cable
This topic provides the appearance and parameters of the subscriber cable, and describes the
application and pin assignments of the cable.
5.3 E1 Trunk Cable
This topic covers the applications, appearances, pin assignments, and technical specifications
of E1 trunk cables.
5.4 Clock Cable
This topic covers the applications, appearances, and technical specifications of Clock cables.
5.5 Network Cable
A network cable is used for equipment cascading, communication between the device and the
network, and local maintenance and remote access of the device.
5.6 Optical Fiber
An optical fiber connects an optical port to an upstream device or optical network terminal.
5.7 Environment Monitoring Cable
Environment monitoring cable is the shielded straight-through network cable, and it used to
transmit the monitored signals collected by the ESC board to the control board.
5.8 Local Maintenance Serial Cable
A local maintenance serial cable is used for debugging devices or maintaining devices at the
local end.
5.9 Local Maintenance and Environment Monitoring Combo Cable
A local maintenance and environment monitoring combo cable is connected to a local
maintenance terminal or an environment monitoring device for debugging and maintaining
the main device or reporting the monitoring information to the control board.

Access Module
5.1 Power Cable and Ground Cable

Power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state, and ground
cable is used to protect devices from lightning strike and interference.
5.1.1 DC Power Cable (Cabinet)

The DC power cable is used to transmit the DC power to loads and enable the loads to work
in the normal state.
Application
The DC power cable (cabinet) connects the power port of the device to the external power
supply. It is connected as follows:
l One end of the DC power cable is connected to the output port of the DC power supply.
l The other end of the DC power cable is connected to the input port on the DC PDU of
the device.
NOTE
The black cable is the -48 V return ground cable connected to the RTN(+) terminal of the DC power board.
The blue cable is the -48 V power cable connected to the NEG(-) terminal of the DC power board.
Appearance and Structure

Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 show the appearances of a -48 V return ground cable and a -48 V
power cable.
Figure 5-1 Appearance of a -48 V return ground cable

Access Module
Figure 5-2 Appearance of a -48 V power cable
Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of a -48 V return ground cable and a -48 V power cable are the
same, as listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Technical specifications of a -48 V return ground cable and a -48 V power cable
Parameter Description
Cable type Electrical cable
Color Black (-48 V return ground cable); blue (-48 V power cable)
Maximum current 110 A
DC resistance of the inner 0.78 ohms/km

conductor
Cross-sectional area of the 25 mm2 or 16 mm2

conductor NOTE
The diameter and length of the DC power cable affect the power
supply of the device.
l The DC power line, whose length is shorter than 20 m and
whose cross-sectional area is 16 mm2, can meet the device
voltage requirement.
l The DC power line, whose length is longer than 20 m but shorter
than 32 m must have a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2 to meet
the device voltage requirement.
5.1.2 DC Power Cable (Device)

DC power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state.

Access Module
Cable Connector
Cord end terminals

Connected to the output
port of the DC power D type 3PIN female
supply Connected to the input
port on the power board
of the device
Parameter
Type Electric power cable
Color l Blue (-)

l Black (+)
DC resistance of the inner conductor 3.3 ohms/km
Cross-sectional area of the conductor 6 mm2
5.1.3 AC Power Cable (Cabinet)

AC power cable supplies power and ensures that the load works in the normal state.
Application
The AC power cable connects the power port of the device to the external power supply. The
AC power cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the AC power cable connects to the output port of the AC power supply.
l The other end of the AC power cable connects to the input port on the power system of
the device.
Appearance
Figure 5-3 shows the appearance of the AC power cable.

Access Module
Figure 5-3 Appearance of the AC power cable
Parameter
Table 5-2 lists the parameters of the AC power cable.
Table 5-2 Parameters of the AC power cable

Color Black
5.1.4 AC Power Cable (Device)

An AC power cable is used to transmit AC power supply to loads and enable the loads to
work in the normal state.

Access Module
Cable Connector
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of an AC power cable.
NOTE
Specifications of the AC power cable vary with country/area. The following uses the AC power cable
that meets the Chinese standard as an example.
Table 5-3 Specifications of an AC power cable

Connector 1 PI straight male
Connector 2 C13 straight female
Cable type External power cable
Cable length 1.8 m
Cross-sectional area of the conductor 1.0 mm2
5.1.5 PGND Cable (Cabinet)

PGND cable (cabinet) is used for protect cabinet from lightning strike and interference.

Access Module
Cable Connector
Parameter
Color Yellow and green
5.1.6 PGND Cable (Device)

A PGND cable (device) is used for protecting the device against lightning strikes and
interference.

Access Module
Cable Connector
Parameter
Cable type Electrical cable
Color Yellow and green
Connector (X1) type OT 6-6
Connector (X2) type OT 6-6
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 6 mm2
Maximum current 50A
5.2 Subscriber Cable

This topic provides the appearance and parameters of the subscriber cable, and describes the
application and pin assignments of the cable.
5.2.1 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 32/24-

Channel Board)
Intra-subrack interconnection cable is used to connect a service board to an SPL board.
Cable Connector
Delander 64-pin connector Champ 64-pin connector

Connected to the xDSL Connected to the xDSL
port of the SPL board port of the service board

Access Module
Cable Structure
Pos.64
Pos.48 Pos.49
Pos.33 Pos.64 Pos.33
Pos.32 Pos.17
Pos.16 Pos.1
Twisted pair Pos.32 Pos.1
Main label
X1 X2

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter
Connector l X1: Delander 64-pin

l X2: Champ 64-pin
Type Symmetrical twisted pair

Access Module
Color PANTONE 430 U (PANTONE refers to

international standard color cards and
430 U is close to grey)
Characteristic impedance 100.0 ohms
Wire diameter of the inner conductor 0.400 mm (26 AWG)
Wire 64-wire
Breakdown voltage 1000.0 V
Frequency range Default
Frequency attenuation ≤ 2.95 dB/100 m (1 MHz)
Capacitance ≤ 56 nF/km (1 kHz)
5.2.2 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64/48-

Channel Board)
Cable Connector

Cable Structure
Pos.49
Pos.64
Pos.33
Pos.48
Pos. 64 Pos.33
Pos.32
Pos.16 Pos.17
Pos.1
Pos.32 Pos.1
Main label
Twisted pair
X1 X2

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter

l X2: Champ 64-pin

Access Module

Wire 64-wire
5.2.3 32-Channel Intra-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64-

Channel Board)
Cable Connector

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter

l X2: Delander 64-pin

Access Module

Wire 64-wire
5.2.4 32-Channel Inter-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 32/24-

Channel Board)
Inter-subrack interconnection cable is used to connect a service board to an SPL board.
Cable Connector

Cable Structure
Pos.16
Pos.1 Pos.32
Pos.17 Pos.1 Pos.32
Pos.33
Pos.49 Pos.48
Pos.64 Pos.33 Pos.64
Main label Twisted pair
X1 X2

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter

l X2: Champ 64-pin

Access Module

Wire 64-wire
5.2.5 32-Channel Inter-Subrack Interconnection Cable (for 64/48-

Channel Board)
Inter-subrack interconnection cable is used to connect a service board to an SPL board.
Cable Connector

The 32-channel inter-subrack interconnection cables can be classified according to the length
of the cables.
l The shorter one connects the xDSL0 port of the SPL board to the xDSL0 port of the
service board.
l The longer one connects the xDSL1 port of the SPL board to the xDSL1 port of the
service board.
Cable Structure
Pos.49
Pos.64
Pos.33
Pos.48
Pos.1 Pos.32
Pos.32
Pos.16 Pos.17
Pos.1
Pos.33 Pos.64
Main label Twisted pair
X1 X2

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter

l X2: Champ 64-pin

Access Module

Wire 64-wire
5.2.6 32-Channel Subscriber Cable (for 64/48 channel board)

Subscriber cable connects the SPL board or service board to the MDF to transmit audio,
video, and data signals.
Cable Connector
Delander 64-pin connector Connected to

Connected to the PSTN or LINE the MDF
port of the SPL board, the PSTN
or LINE port of the service board
Cable Structure
X1
Pos.1 Main lable

Pos.16 Pos.17
Pos.32
Pos.48
Pos.64 Pos.33
Pos.49

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Figure 5-4 describes the pin assignments of the 32-channel subscriber cable.
Figure 5-4 Pin assignments of the 32-channel subscriber cable

Access Module
Parameter

Wire 64-wire
Frequency range ADSL: Default

VDSL: 1 MHz - 30 MHz
5.2.7 32-Channel Subscriber Cable (for 32/24/16 channel board)

Subscriber cable connects the service board or SPL board to the MDF to transmit audio,
Cable Connector
Champ 64-pin connector

Connected to the PSTN or
LINE port of the SPL board,
the PSTN or xDSL port of
the service board

Access Module
Cable Structure

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter
Connector Champ 64-pin

Access Module

Wire 64-wire

5.2.8 64-Channel Subscriber Cable

The 64-channel subscriber cable connects the service board to the MDF to transmit audio,
Cable Connector
NOTE
The 64-channel subscriber cable can be classified into four types, unshielded ADSL subscriber cable,
shielded ADSL subscriber cable, unshielded VDSL subscriber cable, and shielded VDSL subscriber
cable. The appearances of these cables are similar.
Delander 64-pin connector

Connected to the PSTN
(PSTN0 and PSTN1) or LINE
(LINE0 and LINE1) port of the
SPL board or service board
Connected to
the MDF

Access Module
Cable Structure
Pos.16
Pos.1
Pos.32
Pos.17
Pos.33
Pos.49 Pos.48
Pos.64
Main Label
X1 W
X2

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Figure 5-5 Pin assignments of the 64-channel subscriber cable (UP)

X1 Color LINE/PSTN Label X1 Color LINE/PSTN Label
16 White 48 White
0 16
15 Blue 47 Blue
14 White 46 White
1 17
13 Orange 45 Orange
12 White 44 White
2 18
11 Green 43 Green
10 White 42 White
3 19
9 Green Brown 41 Brown Brown
Up UP
8 bundle White 40 bundle White
4 20
7 Grey 39 Grey
6 Red 38 Red
5 21
5 Blue 37 Blue
4 Red 36 Red
6 22
3 Orange 35 Orange
2 Red 34 Red
7 23
1 Green 33 Green
32 Red 64 Red
8 24
31 Brown 63 Brown
30 Red 62 Red
9 25
29 Grey 61 Grey
28 Black 60 Black
10 26
27 Blue 59 Blue
26 Black 58 Black
11 27
25 Green Orange 57 Brown Orange
Up UP
24 bundle Black 56 bundle Black
12 28
23 Green 55 Green
22 Black 54 Black
13 29
21 Brown 53 Brown
20 Black 52 Black
14 30
19 Grey 51 Grey
18 Yellow 50 Yellow
15 31
17 Blue 49 Blue

Access Module
Figure 5-6 Pin assignments of the 64-channel subscriber cable (DOWN)

16 White 48 White
0 16
15 Blue 47 Blue
14 White 46 White
1 17
13 Orange 45 Orange
12 White 44 White
2 18
11 Green 43 Green
10 White 42 White
3 19
9 Blue Brown 41 Orange Brown
DOWN DOWN
8 bundle White 40 bundle White
4 20
7 Grey 39 Grey
6 Red 38 Red
5 21
5 Blue 37 Blue
4 Red 36 Red
6 22
3 Orange 35 Orange
2 Red 34 Red
7 23
1 Green 33 Green
32 Red 64 Red
8 24
31 Brown 63 Brown
30 Red 62 Red
9 25
29 Grey 61 Grey
28 Black 60 Black
10 26
27 Blue 59 Blue
26 Black 58 Black
11 27
25 Blue Orange 57 Orange Orange
DOWN DOWN
24 bundle Black 56 bundle Black
12 28
23 Green 55 Green
22 Black 54 Black
13 29
21 Brown 53 Brown
20 Black 52 Black
14 30
19 Grey 51 Grey
18 Yellow 50 Yellow
15 31
17 Blue 49 Blue
Parameter

Wire 128-wire

Access Module
5.2.9 32-Channel xDSL Subscriber Cable (old pin assignments)

xDSL subscriber cable connects the service board or SPL board to the MDF to transmit audio,
Cable Connector
Champ 64-pin connector

Connected to the PSTN or
LINE port of the SPL board,
the PSTN or xDSL port of
the service board
Cable Structure

Access Module
Pin Assignment
Parameter
Connector Champ 64-pin

Wire 64-wire


Access Module
5.3 E1 Trunk Cable

This topic covers the applications, appearances, pin assignments, and technical specifications
of E1 trunk cables.
5.3.1 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable

A 75-ohm E1 trunk cable is a communication cable used for transmitting E1 trunk signals.
Cable Connector
DB44 connector
Connected to an E1
port on a board
Connected to
the DDF
Cable Structure
Pos.1 Pos.30
Pos.16 1 Pos.44 Label 1

A
DB44 Main Label
Label 16
X1

Access Module
Pin Assignments
NOTE
"SN" in "Cable and SN" is the print on the cable sheath.

A 75-ohm E1 trunk cable consists of the shield layer and wire.
In the following table, "Rx/Tx Channel" indicates that the transmitting is from the board and the
receiving is to the board.
l R0: receive end of channel 0 E1 signals
l T0: transmit end of channel 0 E1 signals
X1 Pin Cable and SN Rx/Tx X1 Pin Cable and SN Rx/Tx

Channel Channel
38 Shield 1 R0 15 Shield 2 T0
layer layer
23 Wire 30 Wire
layer layer
22 Wire 29 Wire
layer layer
21 Wire 28 Wire
layer layer
20 Wire 27 Wire
layer layer
19 Wire 26 Wire
layer layer
18 Wire 25 Wire
layer layer
17 Wire 24 Wire
layer layer
16 Wire 7 Wire

Access Module
Connector DB44 connector
Cable type Coaxial cable
Cable diameter 2.20 mm
Wire diameter of the inner conductor 0.25 mm
DC resistance of the inner conductor <= 355.0 ohms/km
Frequency attenuation 4.2 dB/100 m@2 MHz
Capacitance <= 64 pF/m
5.3.2 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable

A 120-ohm E1 trunk cable is a communication cable used for transmitting E1 trunk signals.
Cable Connector
Connected to DB44 connector

the DDF Connected to an E1
port on a board
Cable Structure
Pos.1 Pos.30
Pos.16 1 Pos.44 Label 1

A
DB44 Main Label
Label 16
X1

Access Module
Pin Assignments
NOTE
A 120-ohm E1 trunk cable is a twisted pair cable consisting of two wires.

"Rx/Tx Channel" in the following table indicates that the transmitting is from the board and the
receiving is to the board.
l R0-: negative pole on the receive end of channel 0 E1 signals
l R0+: positive pole on the receive end of channel 0 E1 signals
l T0-: negative pole on the transmit end of channel 1 E1 signals
l T0+: positive pole on the transmit end of channel 1 E1 signals
Connector DB44 connector
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair
Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.50 mm

Access Module
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 24 AWG
Frequency attenuation <= 2.20 dB/100 m@1.024 MHz
Capacitance <= 56.0 pF/m@1 KHz
5.4 Clock Cable

This topic covers the applications, appearances, and technical specifications of Clock cables.
5.4.1 75-ohm Clock Cable

A 75-ohm clock cable is used to transmit clock signals.
Cable Connector
ConnectEd to the upper

layer or lower layer clock
device
SMB connector
Connected to the clock port of
the BITS board
Parameter
Connector Coaxial connector-SMB connector-75 ohms,

straight, female
Type Coaxial cable-75 ohms-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-

shielded

Access Module
Diameter of the cable 3.9 mm
Diameter of the inner conductor 0.34 mm
DC resistance of the inner 224.0 ohms

conductor
Frequency attenuation 3 dB/100 m @2 MHz
Capacitance 69 pF/m
5.4.2 120-ohm Clock Cable

A 120-ohm clock cable is used to transmit clock signals.
Cable Connector
Main Label
R W1
T
W2
RJ45 connector
Connected to the upper layer Connected to the clock
or lower layer clock device port of the CITD board
Pin Assignment
Connector Pin Color Relation Core No.
X1.1 Blue Twisted pair W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Orange Twisted pair W2
X1.5 White
Parameter
Connector RJ45 connector

Access Module
Type Symmetric twisted pair cable-120 ohms-two

pairs-0.40 mm-shielded
Characteristic impedance 120.0 ohm
Diameter of the cable 4.60 mm
Diameter of the inner conductor 0.40 mm
DC resistance of the inner 145.0 ohm

conductor
Frequency attenuation 2.8 dB/100 m @1.024 MHz
Capacitance 56 nF/km
5.4.3 Clock Transfer Cable

The clock transfer cable is a 120-ohm-to-75-ohm clock cable and is used for transmitting
clock/time signals.
Connection
The clock transfer cable is connected as follows:
l One end of the cable is an RJ45 connector connecting to the CLK/TOD port on the
control board.
l The other end is connected to the external clock device. The connector must be made
based on the on-site situation.
Cable Connector

Access Module
Pin Assignment
120-Ohm Cable 75-Ohm Cable
Connector Pin Color Relation Core No.
X1.1 Orange Twisted pair W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair W2
X1.5 White
X1.3 Green Twisted pair W3
X1.6 White
X1.7 White Twisted pair W4
X1.8 Brown
Parameter
Item Specification
Cable 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector

type
120-ohm cable Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm, 26AWG, 4Pairs,
type Pantone 430U
75-ohm cable Coaxial Cable, SYV-75-2-2(4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm, Double-

type Layer Copper Braid Shielded
5.5 Network Cable

A network cable is used for equipment cascading, communication between the device and the
network, and local maintenance and remote access of the device.

Access Module
Cable Appearance
Cable Structure
Main label
View A
1 8
X1 X2
Table 5-4 Pin assignments of a straight-through cable

X1 Pin Wire Color X2 Pin
1 White and orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

Access Module
Table 5-5 Pin assignments of a crossover cable

2 Orange 6
3 White and green 1
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 2
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8
Connector (X1/X2) RJ45 connector
Type Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs

(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP)
Color Dark gray
Wire diameter of the inner 0.510 mm

conductor

conductor
Number of wires 8
Frequency range 0-100 MHz
Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz
5.6 Optical Fiber

An optical fiber connects an optical port to an upstream device or optical network terminal.

Access Module
Appearance and Structure

The appearances of a single-mode optical fiber and a multi-mode optical fiber are the same,
but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode
optical fiber is orange.
Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the appearances of single-mode optical fibers with different
connectors.
Figure 5-7 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with LC/PC connectors
Figure 5-8 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with SC/PC (SC/UPC) connectors
An optical fiber carries optical signals. It is connected as follows:

l One end of the optical fiber is connected to an optical port of a board.

Access Module
l The other end of the optical fiber is connected to the optical distribution frame (ODF),
optical port of the upper layer device, or optical port of other devices.
Fiber Selection Criterion

Table 5-6 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 5-7 lists common optical
connectors.
Table 5-6 Criteria for selecting optical fibers

Determine ... According to ...
Length Survey result
Single-mode or Optical module type

multi-mode
Optical connector l Square connector: SC/PC, SC/UPC and LC/PC

type l Round connector: FC/PC
Table 5-7 Common optical connectors
LC/PC connector
SC/PC (SC/UPC) connector
FC/PC connector
5.7 Environment Monitoring Cable

Environment monitoring cable is the shielded straight-through network cable, and it used to
transmit the monitored signals collected by the ESC board to the control board.

Access Module
Cable Connector
Figure 5-9 Appearance of a network cable
Cable Structure
Main label
View A
1 8
X1 X2
Pin Assignments
2 Orange 2
6 Green 6
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5

Access Module
8 Brown 8
7 White and brown 7
Connector (X1/X2) RJ45 connector
Type Shielded straight-through network cable
Color Dark gray

conductor

conductor
Number of wires 8
Frequency range 0-100 MHz
5.8 Local Maintenance Serial Cable

A local maintenance serial cable is used for debugging devices or maintaining devices at the
local end.

Access Module
Cable Appearance
DB9 female connector
Connected to the
maintenance terminal
RJ45 connector
Connected to a
maintenance serial
port of the device
DB25 Female connector

Connected to the
maintenance terminal
Cable Structure
Table 5-8 Pin assignments of the local maintenance serial cable

Connector Pin Mapping
X2 (RJ45) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X1 (DB-25) 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4
X3 (DB-9) 8 6 2 5 5 3 4 7

Access Module
Connector type DB-9 female + Ethernet port 8-pin/DB-25 female
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair
Color Dark blue

conductor
Wire gauge of the inner 28 AWG (cross-sectional area ≈ 0.08 mm2)

conductor
Number of wires 8
5.9 Local Maintenance and Environment Monitoring

Combo Cable
A local maintenance and environment monitoring combo cable is connected to a local
maintenance terminal or an environment monitoring device for debugging and maintaining
the main device or reporting the monitoring information to the control board.
Cable Connector
Pin Assignments
Cable Connector X1 Connectors X2 and X3 Color Relationship
W1 X1.1 X2.4 White Pair

Access Module
Cable Connector X1 Connectors X2 and X3 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.5 Blue
X1.7 X2.1 White Pair
X1.8 X2.2 Orange
X1.4 X2.6 Green -
X1.Shell X2.Shell Shield -
W2 X1.3 X3.3 White Pair
X1.6 X3.6 Blue
X1.5 X3.5 White -
X1.Shell X3.Shell Shield -
Connector X1 type RJ45 connector
Connector X2 type RJ45 connector
Connector X3 type RJ45 female connector
Cable W1 type Symmetrical twisted pair-100 ohms-4 pairs
Cable W2 type Symmetrical twisted pair-100 ohms-2 pairs
Color Black
Core diameter of the inner 0.48 mm

conductor
Wire gauge of the inner conductor 26 AWG

Access Module
Hardware Description 6 Electromechanical Device
6 Electromechanical Device
About This Chapter
This topic describes the function, front panel, and input and output terminals of the
electromechanical device, and list the specification of the electromechanical device.
6.1 I-Type DC PDU

This topic provides the appearance and specification of the I-type DC PDU, and describes the
function, power distribution principle, input terminals, output terminals, -48 V/-60 V output
control switch, LED, monitoring port, and environment monitoring board DIP switches of the
PDU.
6.2 C3-Type DC PDU
This topic provides the appearance and main performance specifications of the C3-type DC
PDU, and describes the power distribution principle of the PDU.
6.3 B-Type DC PDU
This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the B-type DC PDU, and describes
the function, power distribution principle, input terminals, output terminals, and control
switch of the PDU.
6.4 ETP4890 Power System
An AC-powered cabinet uses the ETP4890 power system to convert the AC power to the DC
power for power distribution. The small and modular ETP4890 power system supports easy
installation and maintenance and effective LCD interface management. The power system
supports a maximum of 90 A output current.
6.5 EPS75-4815AF Power System
The AC-powered cabinet uses the EPS75-4815AF power system to convert the AC input into
the DC and then distribute the power.
6.6 GEPS4845 Power System
This topic describes the function, power supply principles, and front panel of the GEPS4845
power system, and provides the specifications of the GEPS4845 power system.
6.7 PMIB01 Sensor Transfer Box
This topic describes the application and front panel of the sensor transfer box, and provides
the specifications of the sensor transfer box.

Access Module
6.9 SPD28SZ surge protector
This topic describes the functions and front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector, and
provides the specifications of the surge protector.
6.10 100 Ah Battery
This topic provides the overview, outline and specifications of the 100 Ah battery.
6.1 I-Type DC PDU

This topic provides the appearance and specification of the I-type DC PDU, and describes the
function, power distribution principle, input terminals, output terminals, -48 V/-60 V output
control switch, LED, monitoring port, and environment monitoring board DIP switches of the
PDU.
Appearance
Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the I-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-1 Appearance of the I-type DC PDU
Function
The functions of the I-type PDU are as follows:
l Provides four or two -48 V/-60 V inputs.

l Provides eight -48 V/-60 V outputs.
The monitoring and displaying functions of the I-type DC PDU are as follows:
l Supports displaying four or two power inputs.

l Supports detecting the voltage of four or two -48 V/-60 V inputs.
l Supports detecting 10 channels of external boolean parameters (including one channel of
water sensor parameters, door status and MDF).
l Supports detecting 4 external analog parameters (including temperature, humidity and
two channels of reserved parameters).

Access Module
Power Distribution Principle

Figure 6-2 shows the power distribution principle of the I-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-2 Power distribution principle of the I-type DC PDU

SW11
NEG11
NEGA SW21
NEG21
RTN11
RTNA RTN21
SW12
NEG12
NEGB SW22
NEG22
RTN12
RTNB
RTN22
SW31
NEG31
NEGC SW41
NEG41
RTN31
RTNC RTN41
SW32
NEG32
NEGD SW42
NEG42
RTN32
RTND RTN42
Input Terminal
Open the front panel of the I-type DC PDU and you can see the input terminals of the PDU,
as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Input terminals of the I-type DC PDU
The I-type DC PDU can provide four or two inputs. Different input terminals are used for
different external power inputs, as described in Table 6-1.

Access Module
Table 6-1 Input terminals of the I-type DC PDU

External Input Connected Cable Remarks
Power Terminal
Input
Two inputs NEGA (-) The first -48 V/-60 V blue Redundant backup mode:
cable NEGA (-) and NEGC (-) are
connected; NEGB (-) and
NEGB (-) The second -48 V/-60 V NEGD (-) are connected.
blue cable Tributaries A and B support
PGND The PGND yellow and mutual backup; tributaries C
green cable and D support mutual backup.
RTNA (+) The first GND black cable
RTNB (+) The second GND black

cable
Four inputs NEGA (-) The first -48 V/-60 V blue -

cable
NEGC (-) The third -48 V/-60 V

blue cable
NEGB (-) The second -48 V/-60 V

blue cable
NEGD (-) The fourth -48 V/-60 V

blue cable
PGND The PGND yellow and

green cable
RTNA (+) The first GND black cable
RTNC (+) The third GND black

cable
RTNB (+) The second GND black

cable
RTND (+) The fourth GND black

cable
Output Terminal
The I-type DC PDU provides eight outputs. Figure 6-4 shows the output terminals.
Table 6-2 lists the mapping between the output terminals, control switches and service
subracks.

Access Module
Figure 6-4 Output terminals of the I-type DC PDU
NEG11 (- ) NEG 12(-) RTN 11 (+) RTN 12 (+) NEG 21 (-) NEG 22(-) RTN 21 (+) RTN 22 (+) NEG 31 (-) NEG 32(-) RTN 31 (+) RTN 32 (+) NEG 41(-) NEG 42 (- ) RTN 41 (+) RTN 42 (+)
NEG 11(-) NEG 12(-) RTN 11 (+) RTN 12 (+) NEG 21 (-) NEG 22(-) RTN 21 (+) RTN 22(+) NEG 31 (-) NEG 32(-) RTN 31 (+) RTN 32 (+) NEG 41(-) NEG 42(-) RTN 41 (+) RTN 42 (+)
-48 V/-60 V Output Control Switch

Figure 6-5 shows the -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the I-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-5 -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the I-type DC PDU
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
SW11 SW12 SW21 SW22 SW31 SW32 SW41 SW42

Frame1 Frame2 Frame3 Frame4
Table 6-2 Mapping between the output terminals, control switches and service subracks
Terminal Silkscreen Control Switch Load
NEG11 (-), RTN11 (+) SW11 The first service subrack (from
bottom to top)
NEG12 (-), RTN12 (+) SW12
NEG21 (-), RTN21 (+) SW21 -
NEG22 (-), RTN22 (+) SW22
NEG31 (-), RTN31(+) SW31 The second service subrack (from

bottom to top)
NEG32 (-), RTN32 (+) SW32
NEG41(-), RTN41(+) SW41 -
NEG42 (-), RTN42(+) SW42

Access Module
LED
Table 6-3 describes the front panel of the monitoring board (ESCA) and lightning proof board
(SPDA).
Table 6-3 Front panel of the monitoring board
RUN
PWRA
ALM COM1
RUN
PWRB
ALM
RUN
PWRC
ALM
COM2
RUN
PWRD
ALM
RUN RUN
SPD
ALM ALM
RUN ALM: running status LED
Green: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The monitoring board works in the normal
state.
Red: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The monitoring board generates critical
repeatedly alarms, such as temperature alarm, power
abnormality, lightning proof abnormality, and
so on.
Yellow: on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly The monitoring board generates warnings.
Yellow: on The communication to the host is interrupted.
Yellow: on for 0.3s and off for 0.3s The monitoring board is being loaded or is
repeatedly not registered.
SPD RUN ALM: surge protector status LED
Green: on The surge protector is normal.
Red: on The surge protector is faulty.

Access Module
PWRA, PWRB, PWRC, PWRD: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th power input LEDs
Green: on The input voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72

V.
Red: on The input voltage is below -38.4 V.
Monitoring Port
The monitoring ports of the I-type DC PDU include the serial port and the ports for
monitoring boolean parameters, as shown in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Monitoring ports of the I-type DC PDU
JTD1
JTM1 JTD2 JTA1 JAC1
COM1 JTP1 JTD3 JAC2
JAB1 JTD4 JTA2
COM2 JAK1 JTD5
JAK2 JTD6 JTA3
RUN JAK3 JTD7

ALM
COM3
JTS1 JTA4
Table 6-4 describes the monitoring serial ports, and Table 6-5 describes the ports for
monitoring boolean parameters of the I-type DC PDU.
Table 6-4 Monitoring serial ports of the I-type DC PDU

Serial Port Function Connection
COM1 (Reserved) -
COM2 RS-485 monitoring Use the environment monitoring cable to connect

port the port to the ESC port of the control board.
COM3 (Reserved) -

Access Module
Table 6-5 Ports for monitoring boolean parameter of the I-type DC PDU
Port Monitoring Parameter Remarks
JTM1 Door status sensor value -
JTP1 MDF -
JAB1 Output control switch of the cabinet Reserved

buzzer
JAK1 Output control switch of the cabinet Reserved

alarm LED

alarm LED

alarm LED
JTD1 Input 1 of the sensor for common -

boolean parameters

boolean parameters

boolean parameters

boolean parameters

boolean parameters

boolean parameters

boolean parameters
JTS1 Water sensor value -
JTA1 Common external analog sensor 1 Temperature
JTA2 Common external analog sensor 2 Humidity
JTA3 Common external analog sensor 3 Reserved
JTA4 Common external analog sensor 4 Reserved
JAC1 External control parameter output (relay Reserved

output)
JAC2 External control parameter output (relay Reserved

output)

Access Module
DIP Switches of the Environment Monitoring Board

The I-type DC PDU uses the ESCA environment monitoring board, which provides two sets
of DIP switches S5 and S6. Figure 6-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches.
Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches of the I-type DC PDU
ON
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
1234
S6 S5
H801ESCA
Table 6-6 describes the settings of S5 and S6.
Table 6-6 Settings of S5 and S6

S5-1 S5 is used to set the external ON

sensors of JTA1-JTA4 to be
S5-2 the voltage type or current ON
S5-3 type. ON
l ON: The external sensors
S5-4 are of the voltage type. ON
l OFF: The external
sensors are of the current
type.
S6-1 S6-1 to S6-5 are used to set OFF

the mapping subnode
S6-2 addresses of system OFF
S6-3 configuration to ensure OFF

normal communication.
S6-4 l ON: The address bit is 0. OFF
S6-5 l OFF: The address bit is ON

1.
S6-6 Reserved ON
S6-7 Reserved ON

Access Module
S6-8 S6-8 is used to set the baud ON

rate of the communication
between the ESCA board
and the control board.
l ON: The baud rate of the
communication between
the ESCA board and the
control board is 19200
bit/s.
l OFF: The baud rate of
the communication
between the ESCA board
and the control board is
9600 bit/s.
Table 6-7 shows the mapping of S5 and ports for sensors.
Table 6-7 Mapping of S5 and ports for sensors

DIP Switch OFF ON
S5-1 The external sensor of JTA1 is of the The external sensor of

voltage type. JTA1 is of the current type.



S6-1 to S6-5 are used to set the subnode addresses of the ESCA board. For details, see Table
6-8.
Table 6-8 Mapping of S6-1 to S6-5 and the subnode address

DIP Switch Settings (5, 4, 3, Addres DIP Switch Settings (5, 4, 3, Addres
2, 1) s Value 2, 1) s Value
00000 0 10000 16
00001 1 10001 17
00010 2 10010 18
00011 3 10011 19

Access Module
DIP Switch Settings (5, 4, 3, Addres DIP Switch Settings (5, 4, 3, Addres
2, 1) s Value 2, 1) s Value
00100 4 10100 20
00101 5 10101 21
00110 6 10110 22
00111 7 10111 23
01000 8 11000 24
01001 9 11001 25
01010 10 11010 26
01011 11 11011 27
01100 12 11100 28
01101 13 11101 29
01110 14 11110 30
01111 15, 11111 31

default
NOTE
When S6-1 to S6-5 are used to set the subnode address, make sure that the DIP switch settings are
consistent with the data configuration. The address value cannot be 30. The subnode address value
cannot be the same as that of the monitoring board of the fan tray.
Specification
Table 6-9 shows the specification of the I-type DC PDU.
Table 6-9 Specification of the I-type DC PDU

Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 490 mm x 231.2 mm x 97.2 mm

mounting brackets)
Weight 5.3 kg
Output tributary quantity 8
Input voltage -48 V (-38.4 V to -57.6 V)

/-60 V (-38.4 V to -72 V)

Access Module
6.2 C3-Type DC PDU

This topic provides the appearance and main performance specifications of the C3-type DC
PDU, and describes the power distribution principle of the PDU.
Appearance
Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearance of the C3-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-8 Appearance of the C3-type DC PDU (with cover)
Figure 6-9 Appearance of the C3-type DC PDU (without cover)
Function
The C3-Type DC PDU provides the following functions:
l Short-circuit protection and overload protection
l The functions such as over-voltage protection, lightning proof, and filter are not
provided.

Figure 6-10 shows the power distribution principle of the C3-Type DC PDU.

Access Module
Figure 6-10 Diagram of the power distribution principle of the C3-Type DC PDU
SW1 -48V1
-48VA
NEG1 (-) -48V1
SW2
BGND
Jumper
SW3 BGND
-48VB
NEG2 (-) -48V2
SW4
-48V2
RTNA BGND
RTN1 (+)
Jumper BGND
RTNB
RTN2 (+) -48V3
-48V3
PGND
BGND
BGND
-48V4
-48V4
BGND
BGND
Input Terminal
Figure 6-11 shows the input terminals of the C3-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-11 Input terminals of the C3-type DC PDU
The C3-type DC PDU supports two -48 V DC/-60 V DC inputs. The connections of the input
terminals are as follows:

Access Module
l RTN1 (+) connects to RTN of the first channel DC power supply.

l NEG1 (-) connects to NEG of the first channel DC power supply.
l PGND connects to the ground cable.
l RTN2 (+) connects to RTN of the second channel DC power supply.
l NEG2 (-) connects to NEG of the second channel DC power supply.
NOTE
By default, the two channels of input power are provided by different power sources. To use the same
power source to provide two channels of input power, connect a jumper to the terminal of each channel,
as shown in Figure 6-10.
Output Terminal
Figure 6-12 shows the output terminals of the C3-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-12 Output terminals of the C3-type DC PDU
-48 V//-60 V Output Control Switch

Figure 6-13 shows the -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the C3-type DC PDU.

Access Module
Figure 6-13 -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the C3-type DC PDU
subracks.
Terminal Silkscreen Control Load
Switch
48V1, 48V1 SW1 The first service subrack (from bottom to

top)
BGND, BGND
48V2, 48V2 SW2 The second service subrack (from

bottom to top)
BGND, BGND

top)
BGND, BGND
48V4, 48V4 SW4 The second service subrack (from

bottom to top)
BGND, BGND
Specification
Table 6-11 shows the main performance specifications of the C3-Type DC PDU.

Access Module
Table 6-11 Main performance specifications of the C3-Type DC PDU

Item Performance Specification
Inpu Rated input -48 V to -60 V DC

t voltage
featu
re Input voltage -38.4 V to -72 V DC
Mode of input Two channels of DC input power. By default, the two channels of
power input power are provided by different power sources. To use the
same power source to provide two channels of input power,
connect a jumper to the terminal of each channel, as shown in
Figure 6-10.
Maximum Maximum input current of each channel is 80 A.

input current
Input terminal M8 OT terminal
Outp Rated output -48 V to -60 V DC

ut voltage
featu
re output voltage -38.4 V to -72 V DC
Output Eight channels of output power, controlled by four air breakers

channel (Each air breaker controls two channels of output power.)
Fixed current 40 A
of the air
breaker
Output Over-current protection. You need to restore the circuit manually.

protection
feature
Output Bare crimping terminal (12-10AWG).

terminal
Envi Working -25 °C to 55 °C

ron temperature
ment
Storage -40 °C to 70 °C
temperature
Relative <= 95%

humidity
Standard 70-106 KPa

atmospheric
pressure
Dimensions 2 U x 436 mm x 116.4 mm (Height x Width x Depth)
NOTE
1 U = 44.45 mm

Access Module
6.3 B-Type DC PDU

This topic provides the appearance and specifications of the B-type DC PDU, and describes
the function, power distribution principle, input terminals, output terminals, and control
switch of the PDU.
Appearance
Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 show the appearance of the B-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-14 Appearance of the B-type DC PDU (with cover)

Access Module
Figure 6-15 Appearance of the B-type DC PDU (without cover)
Function
The functions of the B-type PDU are as follows:
l Provides two -48 V/-60 V inputs.
l Provides eight -48 V/-60 V outputs.

Figure 6-16 shows the power distribution principle of the B-type DC PDU.

Access Module
Figure 6-16 Power distribution principle of the B-type DC PDU

48V1
SW1 48V1
BGND
NEG1(-)
BGND
SW2
48V2
48V2
NEG2(-)
SW3/SW4 BGND
BGND
48V3
48V3
RTN1(+)
BGND
RTN2(+) BGND
48V4
PGND
48V4
BGND
BGND
Input Terminal
Figure 6-17 shows the input terminals of the B-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-17 Input terminals of the B-type DC PDU
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
The B-type DC PDU supports two -48 V DC/-60 V DC inputs. The connections of the input
terminals are as follows:
l RTN1 (+) connects to RTN of the first channel DC power supply.
l NEG1 (-) connects to NEG of the first channel DC power supply.

Access Module
l RTN2 (+) connects to RTN of the second channel DC power supply.

l NEG2 (-) connects to NEG of the second channel DC power supply.
Output Terminal
Figure 6-18 shows the output terminals of the B-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-18 Output terminals of the B-type DC PDU
48V1 48V1 BGNDBGND 48V2 48V2 BGNDBGND 48V3 48V3 BGND BGND 48V4 48V4 BGND BGND
48V1 48V1 BGNDBGND 48V2 48V2 BGNDBGND 48V3 48V3 BGND BGND 48V4 48V4 BGND BGND
-48 V/-60 V Output Control Switch

Figure 6-19 shows the -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the B-type DC PDU.
Figure 6-19 -48 V/-60 V output control switch of the B-type DC PDU
ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
SW1 SW2 SW3/SW4
subracks.

Access Module
Terminal Silkscreen Control Load

Switch

top)
BGND, BGND
48V2, 48V2 SW2 -
BGND, BGND
48V3, 48V3 SW3/SW4 The second service subrack (from

bottom to top)
BGND, BGND
48V4, 48V4 SW3/SW4 -
BGND, BGND
Specification
Table 6-13 lists the specification of the B-type DC PDU.
Table 6-13 Specification of the B-type DC PDU
Item Specification
Dimensions (W x D x H, excluding 436 mm x 110 mm x 86.1 mm

mounting brackets)
Weight (fully loaded) 2.5 kg
Output tributary quantity 8
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72 V
6.4 ETP4890 Power System

An AC-powered cabinet uses the ETP4890 power system to convert the AC power to the DC
power for power distribution. The small and modular ETP4890 power system supports easy
installation and maintenance and effective LCD interface management. The power system
supports a maximum of 90 A output current.
Function
The ETP4890 power system supports the following functions:
l Converts AC power to DC power and provides the DC power for communication
devices.

Access Module
l Communicates with the upper device using a COM or an RS485/RS232 serial port;
sends control signals based on the values of monitored parameters or the control
command sent by the upper device; detects power distribution parameters, power supply
module parameters, and auxiliary digital parameters in real time.
l Connects to one to two groups of lead acid batteries and uses a monitoring module to
manage the batteries; provides complete management for battery charging and
discharging, ensuring efficient battery usage.
l Connects to a sensor transfer box using a DB50 port, detecting analog parameters and
digital parameters, and outputting control signals.
l Uses a monitoring module to monitor all running parameters for the ETP4890 power
system in real time; determines the working status; reports alarms in a timely manner.
l Clearly displays the monitoring and alarm information on the liquid crystal display
(LCD) of the monitoring module; allows operations such as parameter setting on the
LCD of the monitoring module.
Appearance
Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the ETP4890 power system.
Figure 6-20 ETP4890 power system
Configuration
Table 6-14 lists the components of the ETP4890 power system.
Table 6-14 Component configuration of the ETP4890 power system

Component Quantity
AC and DC power distribution subrack 1
Monitoring module 1
Power supply module R4830N1/R4830G1 1 to 3 (optional; by default, the R4830N1 is

configured)
The ETP4890 power system can be configured with three power supply modules, which are
connected in parallel for output.
Table 6-15 shows the mapping between the quantity of power supply modules in the
ETP4890 power system and the maximum output current.

Access Module
Table 6-15 Mapping between the quantity of power supply modules of the ETP4890 power
system and the maximum output current
Quantity of Power Supply Modules Maximum Output Current
1 l 30 A (at 55°C)
l 25 A (at 60°C)
2 l 60 A (at 55°C)
l 50 A (at 60°C)
3 l 90 A (at 55°C)
l 75 A (at 60°C)
Communication Ports on the Monitoring Module

Table 6-16 lists the communication ports on the monitoring module. A user can set the baud
rate of the device using the LCD interface of the monitoring module.
Table 6-16 Communication ports on the monitoring module

Communication Communication Communication Description
Port Mode Parameter
COM RS485/RS232 Baud rate: 9600 bit/s Used as a serial port,

or 19200 bit/s communicating with
the upper device
RS485/RS232 RS485/RS232 Baud rate: 9600 bit/s Used as a serial port,

or 19200 bit/s supporting the
northbound/
southbound
communications
NOTE
By default, the ETP4890 power system is equipped with a monitoring module, which is capable of the
inband management (SMU01B). The COM port cannot be used as a network port.
Indicators
Table 6-17 lists the indicators on the power supply module of the ETP4890 power system.
Table 6-17 Indicators on the power supply module of the ETP4890 power system
Indicator Color Status Description
Power indicator Green Steady on Normal

Access Module
Blinking at a There is AC input,

frequency of 0.5 Hz and the power
supply module is in
the manual query
state.
Blinking at a Data is being loaded

frequency of 4 Hz online.
Off There is no AC
input.
Alarm indicator Yellow Steady on A protection

mechanism is
triggered. After the
fault is rectified, the
power supply
module can be
restored to the
normal state.
Blinking Communication
between the power
supply module and
the site monitoring
module is
interrupted.
Off Normal
Fault indicator Red Steady on An unrecoverable

fault occurs.
Blinking The power supply

module equipped
with the EMU does
not match the actual
power supply
module.
Off Normal
Table 6-18 lists the indicators on the monitoring module.

Access Module
Table 6-18 Indicators on the monitoring module

RUN Green Off The monitoring

module is faulty or
there is no DC
power input.
Blinking at a The monitoring

frequency of 0.5 Hz module is working
properly and
communicating with
the upper device
properly.
Blinking at a The monitoring

frequency of 4 Hz module works
properly but does
not communicate
with the upper
device properly.
ALM Red Off The system does not

generate any critical
alarms.
Steady on The system

generates critical
alarms.
Input Terminal
The ETP4890 power system supports 220 V AC input.Figure 6-21 shows the input terminals
in the ETP4890 power system.
Figure 6-21 Input terminals in the ETP4890 power system

Access Module
Output Terminal
The ETP4890 power system supports eight groups of output terminals. The left-side eight
output terminals are negative and the right-side eight output terminals are positive.
Figure 6-22 shows the output terminals in the ETP4890 power system.
Figure 6-22 Output terminals in the ETP4890 power system
Table 6-19 lists the Specifications of the output terminals.
Table 6-19 Specifications of the output terminals

Port Circuit Breaker
LOAD1 10 A
LOAD2 30 A
LOAD3 40 A
LOAD4 40 A
BATT 80 A
Figure 6-23 shows the output branch circuit breaker in the ETP4890 system.
Figure 6-23 Output branch circuit breaker in the ETP4890 system

Access Module
Specifications
Table 6-20 lists the specifications of the ETP4890 power system.
Table 6-20 Specifications of the ETP4890 power system

Parameter Class Parameter Description
Environment Operating -40°C to +70°C

conditions temperature NOTE
The power system can work at a temperature of
70°C for 8 hours.
Operating humidity 5% to 95% (no condensation)
Altitude 0 m to 4000 m
(Note that in the range of 2000 m to 4000 m,
the operating temperature decreases by 1°C
when the altitude increases by 200 m.)
AC input Mode mono-phase, dual-live wire
Voltage 85 V AC to 290 V AC (rated value: 110 V/220

V)
Frequency 45 Hz to 66 Hz (rated value: 50 Hz)
Power factor ≥ 0.99 in the case of a rated load
Power supply l R4830N1: 94%

module peak l R4830G1: 96%
efficiency
DC output Voltage -42 V to -58 V
Default voltage -53.5 V
Maximum power l R4830N1: 4815 W (input voltage: 176 V

AC to 290 V AC; if the temperature is
higher than 55°C, power decreases
linearly); 2407.5 W (input voltage: 85 V
linearly)
l R4830G1: 4800 W (input voltage: 176 V
linearly); 2400 W (input voltage: 85 V AC
to 175 V AC; if the temperature is higher
than 55°C, power decreases linearly)
NOTE
Maximum output power of the system = Number of
the configured power supply modules x Output
power of each power supply module

Access Module
Parameter Class Parameter Description
Regulated voltage ≤ ±0.6%

precision
Peak noise voltage ≤ 200 mV (0 MHz to 20 MHz)
Structure Dimensions (H x W 86.1 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm

x D) without
brackets
Weight ≤ 10 kg (including three 30 A power supply

modules and one SMU01B monitoring
module)
Protection class IP20
Installation mode Installed in an IEC cabinet or an ETSI cabinet

with brackets
Maintenance mode Front access
Cooling method Air cooling, with the built-in fan in the power
supply module
6.5 EPS75-4815AF Power System

The AC-powered cabinet uses the EPS75-4815AF power system to convert the AC input into
the DC and then distribute the power.
Functions
The EPS75-4815AF power system converts one AC input into six DC outputs to implement
the DC power distribution. It can be connected to one to two sets of batteries and use its
monitoring module to manage batteries.
The EPS75-4815AF power system can also use the external sensor transfer box to collect and
report the status of sensors and standby detected parameters.
NOTE
The rectifier modules of the EPS75-4815AF power system work in the load balancing and mutual hot
backup mode.
Appearance
Figure 6-24 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Access Module
Figure 6-24 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Rectifier module
Monitoring module
Configuration
Table 6-21 lists the component configuration of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 6-21 Component configuration of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Component Name Configuration
GERM4815T rectifier module 2 to 5 (optional)
EPMU02 monitoring module 1
Rack-EPS75-4815AF AC/DC power supply 1

unit
The EPS75-4815AF power system can be configured with five rectifier modules, which are
connected in parallel for output.
Table 6-22 shows the mapping between the number of rectifier modules in the
EPS75-4815AF power system and the maximum output current.
Table 6-22 Mapping between the number of rectifier modules in the EPS75-4815AF power
system and the maximum output current
Number of Rectifier Modules Maximum Output Current
1 15 A
2 30 A
3 45 A
4 60 A

Access Module
5 75 A
LED Description
Table 6-23 describes the LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Table 6-23 LEDs on the rectifier module of the EPS75-4815AF power system
LED Status Description
RUN The green LED is on. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
The green LED is off. This LED is off when the red LED is on or
the yellow LED is on which is not caused by
the output overcurrent.
ALM The yellow LED is on. An alarm has been generated for the rectifier
module. The possible causes are as follows:
l The AC power is cut off or no AC power
is supplied.
l Over-temperature protection is enabled.
l Primary protection is enabled.
Specifically, the rectifier module
automatic protection function is enabled
due to a high voltage on the AC input
end.
l Overcurrent protection is enabled.
Specifically, the rectifier module
automatic protection function is enabled
because the DC output current of the
rectifier module exceeds the current
range supported by the rectifier module.
The yellow LED blinks. The communication of the rectifier module

is interrupted.
The yellow LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
FAULT The red LED is on. The rectifier module is faulty. The possible
causes are as follows:
l The AC power supply is faulty.
l The output voltage is 0 V.
l The fan is faulty.
l The rectifier module output is short-
circuited or does not work.

Access Module
The red LED is off. The rectifier module works in the normal
state.
Table 6-24 describes the LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS75-4815AF power
system.
Table 6-24 LEDs on the monitoring module of the EPS75-4815AF power system
RUN The green LED is on for The monitoring module works in the normal
1s and off for 1s state.
repeatedly.
The green LED is The monitoring unit hardware is normal but

blinking quickly. the communication between the monitoring
unit and the upper layer device is faulty.
The green LED is off. The monitoring module is faulty or there is

no AC power input.
ALM The red LED is on. The system generates a critical alarm or the
battery is disconnected.
The red LED is off. The system does not generate any critical
alarm and the battery is already connected.
Input Terminals
Figure 6-25 shows the input terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 6-25 Input terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
AC input BATT. LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4
1- 2- + +
AC-L AC-N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
BATT.(-) LOAD(-) BATT.(+) LOAD(+)

Access Module
The EPS75-4815AF power system supports one 220 VAC input. The connections of the
power system are as follows:
l The AC-L terminal is connected to line L of the AC power cable.

l The AC-N terminal is connected to line N of the AC power cable.
l The grounding point is connected to the PGND cable.
Output Terminals
Figure 6-26 shows the output terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 6-26 Output terminals of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
AC input BATT. LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4
1- 2- + +
AC-L AC-N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
Figure 6-27 shows the output tributary switches of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 6-27 Output tributary switches of the EPS75-4815AF power system
ON ON ON ON ON ON
O FF OFF O FF O FF O FF O FF
A C in p u t BATT. LO AD1 LO AD2 LO AD3 LO AD4
1- 2- + +
A C -L A C -N B1 B2 3- 4- + + + +
1- 2- + +
B A T T .(-) L O A D (-) B A T T .(+ ) L O A D (+ )

Access Module
Table 6-25 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading
tributaries.
Table 6-25 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries
Output Tributary Switch Load Tributary
BATT. BATT. (-) (two channels) and BATT.(+) (two channels)
LOAD1 LOAD1 (-) (two channels) and LOAD1(+) (two

channels)
LOAD2 LOAD2 (-) (two channels) and LOAD2(+) (two

channels)
LOAD3 LOAD3 (-), LOAD3(+)
LOAD4 LOAD4 (-), LOAD4(+)
DIP Switch
The EPS75-4815AF power system provides a DIP switch, the DIP switch is on the right
middle of the monitoring module control board, which can be seen after you remove the
monitoring module. The DIP switch has eight available electrical switches. ON indicates 1,
and OFF indicates 0. Table 6-26 describes the settings of DIP switch.
Table 6-26 Settings of the DIP switch

Electrical Setting Indication Factory
Switch Default
1-5 Supported Used to set the address of the environment 1: OFF

monitoring module. 2: OFF
3: OFF
4: OFF
5: OFF
6-7 Supported Used to set the rate of the serial port 6: ON

7: OFF
8 Not - OFF
supported
The DIP switches 1-5 are used to set the address of the environment monitoring module,
Table 6-27 shows the settings of the DIP switches.

Access Module
Table 6-27 Settings of the DIP switches 1-5

5 4 3 2 1 Address Value
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 1 1 1 7
0 1 0 0 0 8
0 1 0 0 1 9
0 1 0 1 0 A
0 1 0 1 1 B
0 1 1 0 0 C
0 1 1 0 1 D
0 1 1 1 0 E
0 1 1 1 1 F
1 0 0 0 0 10
... .. .. .. .. ..
The DIP switches 6-7 are used to set the rate of the serial port, Table 6-28 shows the settings
of the DIP switches.
Table 6-28 Settings of the DIP switches 6-7

7 6 Rate Value
0 0 4800 bit/s
0 1 9600 bit/s
1 0 19200 bit/s
Specifications
Table 6-29 lists the specifications of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Access Module
Table 6-29 Specifications of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Item Specification
Input l Rated input voltage: 220 VAC (90 VAC to 290 VAC)
(Note that in the range of 90 VAC to 175 VAC, the
output current also decreases linearly, limited within a
specified range.)
l Maximum input current: 28 A
l Frequency: 50 Hz (45 Hz to 65 Hz)
Output l Rated output voltage: -53.5 V DC

l Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
l Output current:
– LOAD1: 10 A (circuit breaker)
– BATT.: 80 A (circuit breaker)
Efficiency ≥ 90% (in rated working state)
Working temperature range -33 °C to +65 °C.

NOTE
In the range of +50 °C to +65 °C, the output current decreases
linearly, limited within a specified range.
Cooling method Forced air cooling, with the built-in fan in the rectifier
module
Dimensions (W x D x H, 436 mm x 255 mm x 133 mm

excluding the mounting
ears)
6.6 GEPS4845 Power System

This topic describes the function, power supply principles, and front panel of the GEPS4845
power system, and provides the specifications of the GEPS4845 power system.
Function
The AC-powered cabinet uses the GEPS4845 power system to convert the 220/110 VAC into
-48 V DC and then distributes the power to each load. The GEPS4845 power system can
connect to two sets of batteries.
NOTE
Both the rectifier units of GEPS4845 and the two sets of batteries work in the load-balancing mode. The
rectifier units are hot backup for each other.

Access Module
Front Panel
Figure 6-28 shows the front panel of the GEPS4845 power system.
Figure 6-28 Front panel of the GEPS4845 power system
AC input switch Battery Output tributary switch

control switch
ALM RUN ALM FAN-ALM RUN ALM FAN-ALM RUN ALM FAN-ALM RUN
AC INPUT BATT LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4
COM
B1 B2 MS
++
B
AC-L AC-N PSM-B9 HRS1150-9000 HRS1150-9000 HRS1150-9000

Power supply unit Monitoring unit Rectifier unit
Table 6-30 describes the front panel of the GEPS4845 power system.
Table 6-30 Front panel of the GEPS4845 power system

Item Description
Switch for AC input Used to control the AC input.
Switch for battery control Used to control the battery connection.
Output tributary switch Used to control the output loading.
Power supply unit Input and output terminal blocks.
Monitoring unit Used for environment monitoring. Only one unit can
be configured to the power system.
Rectifier unit Used to convert the AC to the DC. Up to three units

can be configured to the power system.
Input Terminal
Figure 6-29 shows the input terminals of the GEPS4845 power system.

Access Module
Figure 6-29 Input terminals of the GEPS4845 power system
BA LOA LOAD
AC INPUT TT
LOAD1 LOAD2
D3 4
COM
B B
1 2 MS
+ +
B
AC-L AC-N PSM-B5 HRS850-9000C HRS850-9000C HRS850-9000C

BATT. LOAD BATT.( LOAD(
(-) (-) +) +)
AC-L AC-N
The GEPS4845 power system supports one 220/110 VAC input and the connection of the
power system is as follows:
l AC-L connects to line L of the AC power supply.
l AC-N connects to line N of the AC power supply.
Output Terminal
Figure 6-30 shows the output terminals of the GEPS4845 power system.
Figure 6-30 Output terminals of the GEPS4845 power system
BA LOA LOAD
AC INPUT TT
LOAD1 LOAD2
D3 4
COM
B B
1 2 MS
+ +
B

BATT. LOAD BATT.(+ LOAD(+
(-) (-) ) )
1- 2- 3- + + +
B1 B2
4- 4- + +
B 2- 3- + + +

Access Module
Figure 6-31 shows the output tributary switches of the GEPS4845 power system.
Figure 6-31 Output tributary switches of the GEPS4845 power system
BA LOA LOAD
AC INPUT TT
LOAD1 LOAD2
D3 4
COM
B B
1 2 MS
+ +
B

BATT. LOAD BATT.( LOAD(+
(-) (-) +) )
AC INPUT BATT LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4
The GEPS4845 power system supports four sets with eight -48 V DC outputs in total.
Table 6-31 shows the mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading
tributaries.
Table 6-31 Mapping between the output tributary switches and the loading tributaries
Output Tributary Switch Loading Tributary
BATT BATT. (-), BATT. (+)
LOAD1 LOAD (-) 1, LOAD (+) 1
Specifications
Table 6-32 lists the specifications of the GEPS4845 power system.
Table 6-32 Specifications of the GEPS4845 power system

Item Specifications

Access Module
Item Specifications
Number of output tributaries 8 channels
Output current l BATT: 63 A

l LOAD1: 10 A
l LOAD2: 20 A
l LOAD3: 20 A
l LOAD4: 50 A
The GEPS4845 AC power supply unit contains three rectifier modules. The three rectifier
modules are parallel connected for output.
Table 6-33 shows the number of rectifier modules in the GEPS4845 AC power supply unit
and the maximum output current.
Table 6-33 Number of rectifier modules and the maximum output current
1 15 A
2 30 A
3 45 A

Appearance
Figure 6-32 shows the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.
Figure 6-32 Front panel of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box

Access Module
Sensor Port
Figure 6-33 and Table 6-34 describe the sensor ports of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.
Figure 6-33 Sensor ports of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box
JAC6 JAC5 JAC4 JAC3 JAC2 JAC1
FU_ALM
JKM4 JKM3 JKM2 JKM1 JK 2 JK1
SIM2 SIM 1 JTP1 JTM1 SMOKE VTEM2 VBTEM2
JTD7 JTD6 JTD5 TEM_HU WATER
JTD4 JTD3 JTD2 JTD1 BAT_WE
J1
Table 6-34 Pin Function of the Sensor Ports

Silk Signal Port Pin Function
Screen
BAT_WE Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power supply.

battery temperature l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
1
The external sensor outputs the 0-5 V voltage signal.
VBTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.

battery temperature l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
2
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA current
signal.
WATER Water sensor port l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power supply.
l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
l Pin 3 is for grounding.
l Pin 4 is reserved.
When the impedance between pin 2 and pin 3 drops to
a certain range, alarms are triggered.

Access Module

Screen
TEM_HU Sensor port of l Pin 1 and pin 3 are for the +24 V power supply.
temperature and l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal cable.
humidity 1
l Pin 4 is for the humidity signal cable.
VTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.

temperature and l Pin 2 is for the temperature or humidity signal
humidity 2 cable.
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA current
signal.
JTP1 Sensor port of the l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

MDF l Pin 2 is reserved.
SMOKE Smoke sensor port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
JTM1 Door-status sensor l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
By default, when pin 1 and pin 2 are connected, the
door is in the normal state; when they are
disconnected, alarms are triggered. If no door-status
sensor is used, connect pin 1 and pin 2 to disable
door-status alarms.
JK1, JK2 Alarm digital ports The maximum voltage is 60 V DC and the maximum
load current is 500 mA.
l When minor alarms are generated, JK2 is short-
circuited.
l When critical alarms are generated, JK1 is short-
circuited.
l Users can define alarm levels through the BAM
program.
JKM1- Digital ports The maximum voltage is 5.6 V DC and the maximum
JKM4 current is 20 mA.
SIM1, Battery unbalanced l Pin 1 is for the signal cable.

SIM2 sensor ports l Pin 2 is reserved.
JAC1- Output ports of the Pin 1 and pin 2 are connected to pole C and pole E of
JAC6 optical coupler the optical coupler.
The optical coupling parameter Vce max is 40 V DC
and Ic max is 80 mA. Avoid setting the parameters to
the maximum values.
FU_ALM Detecting port of l Pin 1 is for the signal cable FU1+ and is connected
the battery fuse to the negative pole of the battery.
l Pin 2 is reserved for the FU1- signal.

Access Module

Screen
JTD1-JTD7 Input ports of the l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply.
standby Boolean l Pin 2 is for the +12 V power supply.
value
According to the actual requirements, access related
passive digital signals to pins 2 and pin 3.
J1 DB50 port The port connects the monitoring transfer board and
the monitoring board to input the sensor signals and
the output the control signals.
Specifications
Table 6-35 lists the specifications of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box.
Table 6-35 Specifications of the PMIB01 sensor transfer box

Sensor Transfer Box Dimensions (W x D x H)
PMIB01 140 mm x 96 mm x 31 mm

Function
The sensor transfer box provides various sensor ports to connect the EMU and external
sensors.
Overview
The sensor transfer box is an optional part. It provides diverse Sensor ports to connect the
monitoring unit to the external sensors.
Front Panel
Figure 6-34 shows the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Figure 6-34 Front panel of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box

Access Module
Sensor Port
Figure 6-35 and Table 6-36 describe the sensor ports of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Figure 6-35 Sensor ports of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box
JAC1 JAC2 JAC3 JAC4 JAC5 JAC6 JK1 JK2 JKM1 JKM2 TEM HU JTD1 JTD2 JTD3 JTD4
J1
SIM1 SIM2 JTP1 JKM3 JKM4 FU_ALMJTM1 SMOKE VTEM2 VBTEM2 BAT WE WATER JTD7 JTD6 JTD5
Table 6-36 Function of the sensor ports

Silk Signal Port Pin Function Remarks
Screen
BAT_W Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for grounding. Used

E battery l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
temperature 1
l Pin 4 is for the +12 V power supply.
The external sensor outputs the 0-5 V
voltage signal.
VBTEM Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. -

2 battery l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal
temperature 2 cable.
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA
current signal.
WATER Water sensor l Pin 1 is for the +12 V power supply. -

port l Pin 2 is for the signal cable.
When the impedance between pin 2 and
pin 3 drops to a certain range, alarms are
triggered.
TEM_H Sensor port of l Pin 1 and pin 3 are for the +24 V Used
U temperature power supply.
and humidity 1 l Pin 2 is for the temperature signal
cable.
l Pin 4 is for the humidity signal cable.

Access Module

Screen
VTEM2 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. -

temperature l Pin 2 is for the temperature or
and humidity 2 humidity signal cable.
The external sensor outputs the 4-20 mA
current signal.
JTP1 Sensor port of l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. Used

the MDF l Pin 2 is reserved.
SMOKE Smoke sensor l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. -

port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
JTM1 Door-status l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. Used

sensor port l Pin 2 is for the +24 V power supply.
By default, when pin 1 and pin 2 are
connected, the door is in the normal state;
when they are disconnected, alarms are
triggered. If no door-status sensor is used,
connect pin 1 and pin 2 to disable door-
status alarms.
JK1, Alarm digital The maximum voltage is 60 V DC and the Reserved

JK2 ports maximum load current is 500 mA.
l When minor alarms are generated, JK2
is short-circuited.
l When critical alarms are generated,
JK1 is short-circuited.
l Users can define alarm levels through
the BAM program.
JKM1- Digital ports The maximum voltage is 5.6 V DC and -

JKM4 the maximum current is 20 mA.
SIM1, Battery l Pin 1 is for the signal cable. -

SIM2 unbalanced l Pin 2 is reserved.
sensor ports
JAC1- Output ports of Pin 1 and pin 2 are connected to pole C Reserved
JAC6 the optical and pole E of the optical coupler.
coupler The optical coupling parameter Vce max
is 40 V DC and Ic max is 80 mA. Avoid
setting the parameters to the maximum
values.
FU_AL Detecting port l Pin 1 is for the signal cable FU1+ and -
M of the battery is connected to the negative pole of the
fuse battery.
l Pin 2 is reserved for the FU1- signal.

Access Module

Screen
JTD1- Input ports of l Pin 1 is for the +24 V power supply. Reserved
JTD7 the standby l Pin 2 is for the +12 V power supply.
Boolean value
According to the actual requirements,
access related passive digital signals to
pins 2 and pin 3.
J1 DB50 port The port connects the monitoring transfer -

board and the monitoring board to input
the sensor signals and the output the
control signals.
NOTE
"JTD1-JTD7" are the input ports of the standby Boolean value. By default, the sensors are not
configured. You can determine the type of signal to be accessed. With related configuration, the monitor
unit can monitor them.
Specifications
Table 6-37 lists the specifications of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box.
Table 6-37 Specifications of the PMIB02 sensor transfer box
Sensor Transfer Box Dimensions (W x D x H)
PMIB02 482.6 mm x 70 mm x 43.6 mm
6.9 SPD28SZ surge protector

This topic describes the functions and front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector, and
provides the specifications of the surge protector.
Function
The SPD28SZ surge protector has the over-voltage protection function against lightning. It
can protect the power supply device and the powered device. The SPD28SZ surge protector is
used in the 220 VAC-powered indoor cabinet.
Front Panel
Figure 6-36 shows the front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector.

Access Module
Figure 6-36 Front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector
华为技术
HUAWEI
SPD28SZ -LA单相防雷箱
Single Phase Lightning Protection Box
工作指示故障指示
working indicator failure indicator
注意!高压危险
Danger! High Voltage
绿灯正常红灯失效
Green=normal Red=fault
LEDs
Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector.

Access Module
Table 6-38 LEDs on the front panel of the SPD28SZ surge protector.
Working LED Green The surge protector works in the normal

state.
Red The surge protector is faulty.
Failure LED OFF The surge protector works in the normal

state.
Red The surge protector is faulty.
NOTE
When the mains over-voltage protection circuit is started for the surge protector, the surge protection
function of the surge protector still works and the green working LED is still on. When the failure LED
is red, replace the surge protector in time.
Electrical Connection
Figure 6-37 shows the electrical connections of the SPD28SZ surge protector.
Figure 6-37 Electrical connections of the SPD28SZ surge protector
Nout Lout Nin Lin

PE
Grounding
bar
Input terminal
Output terminal
SPD
Alarm
SPD
Specifications
Table 6-39 lists the specifications of the SPD28SZ surge protector.

Access Module
Table 6-39 Specifications of the SPD28SZ surge protector

No. Item Technical Requirement
1 Input feature Input rated voltage Single-phase 220 VAC
Input frequency range 47 Hz to 53 Hz
Input voltage range 154 V to 286 V
Input rated current 30 A
2 Output feature Output voltage 154 V to 286 V
3 surge protection Normal nominal discharge 20 kA

index current In
Maximum impact 40 kA
throughput capacity Imax
Residual voltage Ur (8/20 ≤ 1300 V

µs, 20 kA)
4 Over-voltage Over-voltage protection 275±5 V

protection point
Return difference 5 V to 10 V
5 Alarm function Remote alarm function The remote output is the dry
contact digital signals. In
normal cases, the contact is
closed.
Local alarm function Indicated by the LED on the

front panel.
6.10 100 Ah Battery

This topic provides the overview, outline and specifications of the 100 Ah battery.
NOTICE
l Ensure that the polarity position of each battery is correct. The connection between
batteries and the power system/battery interface of the device must be firm and correct.
l When the device power supplied by the battery, it is suggested that powered on timely to
avoid the battery extended storage.
l When the device is power off, ensure that the battery switch is in the OFF state.
l After the device is powered on, the battery parameters need to be configured in time.
NOTE
The appearance and weight of the battery are only for reference, which may differ from the actual
delivered battery.

Access Module
Overview
Batteries are rechargeable and functions as a backup power supply for the device.
Outline
Figure 6-38 shows the outline of the 100 Ah battery.
Figure 6-38 Outline of the 100 Ah battery
NOTE
The 100 Ah storage battery shown in the figure is only for reference, which may differ from the
delivered storage battery.
Specifications
Table 6-40 lists the specifications of the 100 Ah battery.
Table 6-40 Specifications of the 100 Ah battery

Item Value
Single battery voltage 12 V
Rated capacity 100 Ah
Equalized charging voltage (four batteries in 56.5 V

serial connection)
Floating charging voltage (four batteries in 53.5 V

serial connection)
Maximum charging current 25.0 A
Dimensions of a single battery (width x 330.0 mm x 173.0 mm x 218 mm

depth x height)
Weight of a single battery 34.3 kg

Access Module
NOTE
The battery charging status can be float charging or equalized charging, as described in the following:
l Equalized charging: It is a method that fully charges the discharged battery quickly by constant
voltage and limited current. The voltage is usually set high. This method balances the capacity
among batteries in a battery group.
l Float charging: It is a charging method that preserves full charge for the battery by constant voltage.
The voltage is usually set low.


MA5600T&MA5603T&MA5608T Hardware Description 23

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA5600T&MA5603T&MA5608T Hardware Description 23

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA5600T&MA5603T&MA5608T Hardware Description 23

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartAX MA5600T/MA5603T/MA5608T Multi-

service Access Module

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineers

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

NOTE Calls attention to important information, best practices and

Updates in Issue 23 (2018-04-27)

Updates in Issue 22 (2017-12-29)

3 Board Added the 3.8.7 H802GICK Board Description and

5 Cable Added the 5.1.4 AC Power Cable (Device).

Updates in Issue 21 (2017-09-30)

3 Board Added the 3.8.13 H801X2CK Board Description and

Included the V800R018C10 updates.

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Updates in Issue 20 (2017-04-24)

3 Board Added the 3.8.12 H802X2CS Board Description and

Included the V800R018C00 updates.

Updates in Issue 19 (2016-10-30)

3 Board Added the 3.22.8 H80BVDMF Board Description.

Updates in Issue 18 (2016-07-30)

3 Board Added the 3.22.11 H80DSDMM Board Description,

Included the V800R017C00 updates.

Updates in Issue 17 (2016-04-29)

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

3 Board Added the 3.20.6 H80BASPB Board Description, 3.20.7

Updates in Issue 16 (2015-09-30)

3.1.2 Board Dimensions Added the dimension of MPWE board.

2.3.3 Configuration MA5600T IEC Service Subrack supports the H802MABH

2.6.7 Power Distribution Added the MPWE board.

Updates in Issue 15 (2015-07-28)

3 Board The ETSI service subrack supports a new backplane

Included the V800R016C00SPC100 updates.

Updates in Issue 14 (2015-04-30)

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

3 Board Added the 3.21.15 H807ADPE Board Description,

Included the V800R016C00 updates.

Updates in Issue 13 (2015-03-30)

3 Board Added the 3.22.14 H80AVCPD Board Description and

Updates in Issue 12 (2015-01-19)

3.2 Mapping Between l Modified the H801GICF replacement relationship.

Included the V800R015C10SPC100 updates.

Updates in Issue 11 (2014-11-25)

Issue 23 (2018-04-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3 Board Added the 3.6.3 H802SCUB Board Description, 3.11.3

3.4 Board Modified the H80BADPE and H80BVDPE boards

Included the V800R015C10 updates.

Updates in Issue 10 (2014-07-30)

3 Board Added the 3.6.6 H801SCUK Board Description.

1 Cabinet Optimized the description of cabinets.

3 Board Optimized the description of boards, including panel

Included the V800R015C00SPC100 updates.